LunaNotes

Download Subtitles for Introduction to DaVinci Resolve Full Course

Introduction to DaVinci Resolve - [Full Course] for Beginners (2025)

Introduction to DaVinci Resolve - [Full Course] for Beginners (2025)

Casey Faris

8751 segments EN

SRT - Most compatible format for video players (VLC, media players, video editors)

VTT - Web Video Text Tracks for HTML5 video and browsers

TXT - Plain text with timestamps for easy reading and editing

Subtitle Preview

Scroll to view all subtitles

[00:00]

I designed this video from the ground up

[00:02]

to be the greatest video ever created on

[00:05]

Da Vinci Resolve. This is an entire

[00:07]

introduction course. This is a course

[00:09]

that we used to charge hundreds of

[00:11]

dollars for. We've helped millions of

[00:13]

people learn Resolve. And I'm excited

[00:15]

for you to learn Resolve, too. By the

[00:16]

end of this video, you're going to be

[00:17]

able to use Da Vinci Resolve to start

[00:19]

creating the videos that you want to

[00:21]

create. Everything from media management

[00:23]

to laying out your clips in the timeline

[00:25]

to color grading to compositing to audio

[00:28]

mixing all the way to final delivery so

[00:30]

that you can upload your footage to

[00:31]

YouTube or output it for whatever

[00:34]

purpose you need. We're going to go over

[00:36]

all the essential need to know stuff,

[00:38]

everything about Resolve that you'll

[00:39]

need to know to get started. You can

[00:40]

download footage and follow along.

[00:42]

There's the top link in the description

[00:43]

there. And yeah, this is just a

[00:45]

massively amazing course that we're

[00:46]

giving out for free. Why are we doing

[00:48]

that? Well, because at ground control,

[00:50]

we actually have quite a few courses on

[00:52]

Da Vinci Resolve. A little bit more

[00:53]

advanced stuff, pretty much all of the

[00:55]

next steps that you would want to take

[00:56]

right after this course. And so, if you

[00:58]

want to dive a little bit deeper, we're

[01:00]

hoping you might buy a course. That

[01:01]

said, you can just watch this video and

[01:03]

be off to the races. Man, you're about

[01:05]

to go from somebody who doesn't know

[01:07]

anything about Resolve to being able to

[01:08]

use Resolve to make videos that you want

[01:10]

to make and even make videos that you

[01:12]

can charge for and get clients. I

[01:14]

absolutely love being able to empower

[01:16]

people to be creative and Resolve is one

[01:18]

of the coolest tools available to be

[01:19]

able to be creative with uh digital

[01:21]

media. You ready to go? Let's do it. So,

[01:24]

what do we need to get started here? The

[01:25]

first thing that you'll need is a good

[01:27]

system. Now, you can use Resolve on a

[01:29]

pretty basic computer, but once you

[01:31]

start getting a little bit deeper,

[01:32]

especially into compositing and things

[01:34]

that uh take a little bit more system

[01:36]

resources, if you don't have a good

[01:38]

graphics card and kind of a good uh like

[01:41]

a mid-range gaming PC or maybe like a

[01:43]

Mac M2 or later, you're probably going

[01:46]

to have a hard time. Resolve is really

[01:48]

resource hungry. So, I want to make sure

[01:50]

that if you're following along, you're

[01:51]

doing that on a good system, or else uh

[01:53]

it's not going to be very much fun. So,

[01:55]

that's number one. You got to have a

[01:56]

good system. Okay. Two, you need a copy

[01:59]

of Resolve. Resolve has a free version

[02:02]

that's amazing. Pretty much everything I

[02:04]

show you in this video, you can do in

[02:05]

the free version. Okay. I'll let you

[02:07]

know if there's a paid version thing.

[02:09]

Something that would be helpful in this

[02:10]

video is a little bit of knowledge on

[02:12]

kind of how video editing works and

[02:14]

stuff. It's not totally essential. If

[02:16]

you've taken videos with your phone

[02:17]

camera and you've kind of scrubbed

[02:18]

through a video before, that's a really

[02:20]

good start. But learning Resolve is

[02:22]

going to be especially easy for you if

[02:24]

you've used something like iMovie or Cap

[02:26]

Cut or Premiere or something like that.

[02:28]

All of those editing skills transfer

[02:31]

nicely into Resolve. The other big thing

[02:33]

I'd recommend is that you actually

[02:35]

dedicate some time to this. Learning any

[02:37]

new skill takes time and Resolve is a

[02:40]

great big deep program that can do all

[02:42]

kinds of stuff and it's really easy to

[02:45]

feel lost and frustrated especially when

[02:46]

you start looking at the interface like

[02:48]

we're going to look at in a few minutes.

[02:49]

But I want you to take some time and

[02:51]

have some patience. Be kind to yourself

[02:54]

because learning this kind of thing,

[02:55]

especially if you're brand new to it, is

[02:57]

not easy. That said, I'm going to do my

[02:59]

very best to move slowly and to give you

[03:01]

just the need to know knowledge in

[03:03]

little bite-sized chunks so it doesn't

[03:05]

take quite as much time and you don't

[03:06]

need quite as much experience. You can

[03:09]

use the free version. And a lot of this

[03:10]

stuff you can do on a system that maybe

[03:12]

isn't the highest spec system ever,

[03:14]

especially the media that we link down

[03:15]

below, that should all run on just about

[03:17]

any system without lots of trouble. So,

[03:19]

let's start with the very basics. What

[03:22]

the heck is Resolve? Resolve is a piece

[03:25]

of video editing software and what makes

[03:27]

it unique is that not only can you do

[03:30]

video editing like in the traditional

[03:32]

sense of putting clips together in a

[03:34]

story and kind of lining that out and

[03:36]

cutting out the parts you don't want and

[03:37]

that kind of thing. But it can also do

[03:39]

fancy things like adding explosions and

[03:42]

lightsabers and duplicating people and

[03:44]

cloning things out. things that you

[03:46]

would maybe think of using Photoshop

[03:47]

for, but for video. Da Vinci Resolve is

[03:50]

also really, really great at color

[03:52]

correction. And it can also mix audio

[03:54]

really well. And so all of these things

[03:56]

kind of come together as sort of a

[03:58]

one-stop shop for what we call

[04:00]

post-prouction. That's everything that

[04:02]

happens after you shoot. So managing

[04:04]

your media, putting it together in a

[04:06]

timeline, graphics and effects, and all

[04:08]

kinds of stuff. That all can happen

[04:10]

inside of Resolve. And Resolve is a very

[04:12]

high quality program. It's a

[04:14]

professional program. This is the kind

[04:16]

of app that Hollywood uses and they use

[04:18]

on great big movies and TV shows and all

[04:22]

kinds of stuff. Like here on the

[04:23]

Blackmagic website, you can see clips

[04:25]

from movies that have used Resolve. I

[04:28]

mean, from Marvel and from Disney and

[04:31]

things that you would see in the

[04:32]

theaters. This is the kind of production

[04:35]

quality that we can do with Resolve. I

[04:37]

mean, it's nuts. So the fact that we

[04:40]

have such a high quality piece of

[04:43]

software available, you know, in the

[04:44]

free version for free is just nuts.

[04:49]

And the thing that's really cool about

[04:51]

Resolve is it's really like several

[04:53]

programs all in one. And they split

[04:56]

these different programs up into pages.

[04:59]

And so here we can see the kind of

[05:00]

different pages in Resolve. And they

[05:03]

each have a different job. So there's

[05:05]

the cut page and the edit page which is

[05:08]

focused on putting your clips together

[05:09]

in a story on a story line. We have the

[05:12]

color page which is all about color. We

[05:14]

have the fusion page which does the

[05:16]

effects and graphics and things like

[05:18]

that. We have the Fairlite page which is

[05:21]

all about audiom mixing. And so this is

[05:23]

the kind of thing that you would

[05:24]

traditionally need to use several

[05:26]

different apps for but it's all built

[05:28]

inside of Resolve. And so here we have

[05:30]

the pages of Resolve. They're actually

[05:31]

represented by these buttons that are

[05:33]

down below on the interface of Resolve.

[05:35]

So here, if I bring up Resolve, we see

[05:36]

these buttons right here. And this is

[05:39]

how you switch in between those

[05:41]

different apps to do the different parts

[05:43]

of your video editing. And there is a

[05:46]

lot to go over for every page here. I

[05:49]

mean, every page is its own huge

[05:51]

monster. And we're going to go over the

[05:53]

basics of each of them so that you

[05:55]

aren't lost. And you'll be able to use

[05:57]

each page at least in its basic form by

[05:59]

the end of this video. Resolve has a

[06:02]

bunch of different effects and I mean

[06:04]

things that you would think about like

[06:05]

Instagram filters. It has stuff like

[06:06]

that. It has blurs and film looks and

[06:08]

different filters to stylize your video.

[06:11]

It has a whole bunch of AI stuff built

[06:13]

in. A lot of that is only available in

[06:15]

the paid version, but I'll show you a

[06:17]

couple really uh interesting unique

[06:19]

things as we go along. It works with

[06:21]

other plugins and all kinds of third

[06:23]

party tools and stuff. There's even

[06:25]

specialized hardware that it works with.

[06:27]

They have these unique editing keyboards

[06:30]

as well as color grading panels which

[06:32]

are really fun. And I mean you can just

[06:34]

go crazy. You can get this huge mixing

[06:36]

board for Fairlite. Look at this. That's

[06:39]

nuts. Or you can just use the free

[06:41]

version on your laptop. That's the

[06:43]

amazing thing about Resolve is it scales

[06:45]

to your ability and your needs. You can

[06:47]

use the free version on a laptop on a

[06:49]

plane or you can use the paid version

[06:51]

with all kinds of hardware in a huge

[06:53]

studio. and it's all using the same

[06:55]

piece of software with just, you know,

[06:57]

little different features. So, let's

[06:59]

talk about the free version versus the

[07:01]

studio version. People always ask me

[07:02]

what's the difference. The long story

[07:04]

short is if you are watching this video,

[07:07]

you can probably use the free version. I

[07:09]

would recommend that you get the free

[07:10]

version, you download it, you open it

[07:12]

up, and you start making stuff with it.

[07:14]

If you get into some corner of Resolve

[07:16]

where something is only available in the

[07:18]

paid version, it will pop up and tell

[07:20]

you. And I always recommend that you

[07:22]

only upgrade if you keep running into

[07:24]

that. It can do nearly everything I show

[07:27]

you in this video. You can work with

[07:28]

just about any kind of video. You can

[07:30]

even collaborate with other editors

[07:32]

online with the free version. You can

[07:34]

render up to UHD, so that's a little

[07:36]

smaller than 4K. That's like the

[07:38]

consumer 4K. It has color grading. It

[07:40]

has Fusion compositing. It has Fair

[07:42]

Light. You can use it for commercial

[07:44]

work. There's no demo period. There's no

[07:46]

watermark. It's just a ridiculously good

[07:49]

deal. It's free. There's no catch. It's

[07:54]

just awesome. Now, for the studio

[07:56]

version, you do get a bunch of really

[07:58]

cool stuff. Most notably, Resolve

[08:00]

effects, which are just a lot more

[08:02]

effects to stylize your video, as well

[08:05]

as all the AI stuff. There are a lot of

[08:07]

new AI features that will do things like

[08:10]

sweeten your audio or cut out a person

[08:12]

walking across your video so you can put

[08:14]

graphics behind them. And there's a lot

[08:16]

of really nice little features that just

[08:18]

make Resolve even better. Resolve

[08:20]

Studio, you buy it once for $295. It's a

[08:24]

smoking deal. There's no subscription.

[08:26]

You just buy it for 295 and you get it

[08:28]

forever. And so far, they have not been

[08:31]

charging for upgrades. It's very

[08:32]

possible they'll charge something for

[08:34]

upgrades in the future, but even if they

[08:36]

do, this is a smoking deal because there

[08:39]

are a lot of really cool things in the

[08:40]

paid version of Resolve that I would

[08:42]

highly recommend getting the paid

[08:43]

version for. But again, if you're just

[08:45]

starting out, and even if you're not

[08:47]

starting out, but you just don't need

[08:48]

some of those features, use the free

[08:50]

version. It's amazing, and there's just

[08:52]

no reason not to do that. So, my answer

[08:54]

is get the free version and see how it

[08:57]

goes. Consider getting the paid version

[09:00]

when you have some extra money or if you

[09:02]

need some of the really specific things

[09:04]

that Resolve Studio will give you. But

[09:05]

the free version is perfect for I mean,

[09:08]

90% of people can totally use the free

[09:10]

version. And this is really the reason

[09:12]

why we teach Resolve at Ground Control

[09:14]

is because our mission is to encourage

[09:16]

and empower creativity. We want people

[09:18]

to be able to create the things that

[09:19]

they want to make. And right now, Da

[09:21]

Vinci Resolve is like the greatest tool

[09:23]

for that. So, I'm really excited that

[09:25]

you're looking into it. Let's get into

[09:26]

the actual software, shall we? By the

[09:28]

way, I'm using Da Vinci Resolve 20 for

[09:31]

this video. In the future, whether

[09:32]

you're using Da Vinci Resolve 20 or 20.5

[09:35]

or 21 or whatever comes out next, 99% of

[09:38]

what we're going over is going to apply

[09:40]

perfectly. But if you're on Resolve 21

[09:42]

or something, probably not a big deal.

[09:44]

Another thing to mention is that I am

[09:45]

using the studio version of Resolve, but

[09:47]

everything that I'm going to show you is

[09:48]

in the free version. Okay? So, don't be

[09:51]

asking me in the comments, is this all

[09:53]

in the free version? Do you even listen?

[09:55]

So, when you open Resolve, this is the

[09:57]

first thing that comes up. Now, this

[09:58]

panel right here, this is called your

[10:00]

project manager. This is how you

[10:02]

navigate to your different project

[10:04]

files. You can see I have some of these

[10:06]

older projects here. Yours might look

[10:08]

more like this, and that's totally fine.

[10:10]

But here is where we open past projects

[10:12]

and make new projects. And all of the

[10:15]

projects here, these live in our project

[10:18]

library. We can browse our project

[10:20]

libraries over here. And by default,

[10:23]

you'll be working on your local

[10:24]

libraries. Now, what the heck does that

[10:26]

mean? So, a library is just a database

[10:29]

of your projects that lives on your

[10:30]

system. It's basically just a folder

[10:32]

that has your projects in it. Resolve is

[10:35]

kind of picky about where that folder

[10:36]

goes. It always wants to have access to

[10:39]

just that folder. You can't just put

[10:40]

projects willy-nilly all over the

[10:42]

landscape. So, by default, it's probably

[10:44]

on your system drive. You can hit this

[10:46]

little I and then click on open file

[10:48]

location. And so, for me, it's under C

[10:50]

users Casey documents resolve disc

[10:52]

library. And if you go through a whole

[10:54]

bunch of subfolders, you'll find all of

[10:55]

your projects. Now, I wouldn't worry

[10:58]

about this too much. Here's why. The

[11:00]

only time you're going to need to open

[11:01]

up a project is in Resolve. And Resolve

[11:03]

knows where that is. If you want to save

[11:06]

a project that's not in that library,

[11:08]

maybe you want to save it and give it to

[11:10]

somebody else or you want to save it as

[11:12]

a backup or something like this, all you

[11:14]

have to do is rightclick on your project

[11:15]

and go down to export project. that will

[11:18]

let you save a copy of your project to

[11:20]

your desktop or to an external drive or

[11:23]

to cloud storage or whatever you want to

[11:24]

do. That's going to make a DRP file.

[11:26]

That's short for Da Vinci Resolve

[11:28]

project. This is a great way to do

[11:30]

things, but just know by default all of

[11:32]

your projects live in your library,

[11:34]

which is a folder that Resolve knows

[11:36]

about on your system. You can have

[11:37]

multiple libraries and multiple folders.

[11:39]

We'll get into that some other time.

[11:41]

Now, you also have network libraries and

[11:44]

cloud libraries. A network library is

[11:47]

for a studio that has kind of a server

[11:49]

and all that stuff. You probably don't

[11:50]

need to worry about that. Cloud

[11:52]

libraries are shared projects. These are

[11:55]

projects that you can actually share

[11:56]

with other editors that have access to

[11:59]

your cloud account. And so just like we

[12:01]

have this folder on our local library on

[12:04]

our system, we can have a folder that

[12:05]

lives on the Blackmagic website

[12:07]

basically that you can all kind of share

[12:09]

and access and it's really slick. If you

[12:11]

want a video about that, let me know and

[12:13]

we'll talk more about it. But for now,

[12:15]

all we really have to do is go down here

[12:17]

to where it says new project. And let's

[12:19]

make a new project. And we're going to

[12:21]

call this intro to Resolve

[12:24]

to Resolve like this. And we'll just say

[12:27]

2025 cuz that's the year that I'm

[12:29]

recording this. And it's going to ask

[12:31]

you for a media location. For now, let's

[12:33]

just not worry about that. Let's just

[12:35]

leave it at default and hit create. Once

[12:37]

you do that, it's going to open up the

[12:39]

Resolve interface. This is where we

[12:41]

actually have to start doing things.

[12:43]

But first, a little tour. Most of this

[12:46]

interface, like everything within the

[12:48]

red box, is actually going to switch out

[12:50]

depending on what page you're on in

[12:52]

Resolve. Here we have the pages. And as

[12:56]

I click on the different pages, that's

[12:58]

going to switch out my interface.

[13:01]

And kind of like we were talking about

[13:02]

earlier, it switches it to kind of like

[13:04]

a different app, but it's not a

[13:06]

different app. This is all Resolve. And

[13:08]

it all kind of shares the same project,

[13:10]

which is really slick. And we'll get

[13:11]

into that here in a little bit. But

[13:13]

that's the first thing I want you to do

[13:14]

is go down here and just switch these

[13:16]

pages and get used to switching out that

[13:18]

interface. But where we're going to

[13:20]

start is this far left page, the media

[13:23]

page. All the way over here. Click on

[13:26]

media for me. And now all of our panels

[13:28]

have switched out for the panels for the

[13:30]

media page. Now, something to mention

[13:32]

here is that this isn't just switching a

[13:34]

layout. This is actually switching into

[13:36]

kind of a different mode. Even though

[13:38]

there are common panels in between the

[13:40]

pages, it's not just a different

[13:42]

workspace. It's actually like a

[13:43]

different mode of creating. So, let's

[13:46]

start talking about what the heck the

[13:47]

media page is. Well, each page has a

[13:50]

really a specific job. The media pages

[13:52]

job is to manage media. And so, this is

[13:55]

a perfect mode to put Resolve in when

[13:57]

you don't have any media in your project

[13:59]

and you're looking to put some in there.

[14:01]

So, a little tour of the interface. In

[14:03]

the upper left, we have this panel,

[14:05]

which is our media storage panel. This

[14:08]

is a way to navigate on your system to

[14:11]

any media that you want to bring into

[14:12]

Resolve. So, I'll just navigate to some

[14:15]

media here. And once you find the folder

[14:17]

up here, then you can actually preview

[14:19]

the media just by mousing over any of

[14:22]

these thumbnails. This is what we call

[14:24]

hover scrub because you hover over this

[14:26]

thumbnail and it scrubs the video. That

[14:28]

means it just moves that playhead back

[14:29]

and forth so you can see what's going

[14:31]

on. This is a great way to be able to

[14:33]

preview the footage that you have before

[14:36]

you bring it into your project. Now,

[14:39]

what do I mean by that? Well, even

[14:40]

though we're looking at this media here,

[14:43]

the media isn't actually imported into

[14:45]

the project. We haven't told Resolve to

[14:47]

use the media. We're really just kind of

[14:49]

using Resolve to go and find it. But, we

[14:51]

haven't said anything about wanting to

[14:53]

edit anything or combine clips together

[14:55]

or change them. So, in order to change

[14:57]

anything or work with this media, we

[14:59]

need to import it into Resolve. To do

[15:01]

that, real simply, we can just grab a

[15:03]

piece of media here from our media

[15:04]

storage and drag it down to this panel

[15:07]

down here, which is called our media

[15:09]

pool. It's going to ask if we want to

[15:11]

change the project frame rate. We'll

[15:12]

explain this a little bit later. I'll

[15:13]

hit change right now. Okay. What that's

[15:16]

going to do is put this piece of media

[15:18]

down here in the media pool. Anything

[15:20]

that's down here in the media pool

[15:22]

actually lives in our project. So, we've

[15:25]

told Resolve that, hey, there is a piece

[15:28]

of media called A54191

[15:31]

blah blah blah. And it lives on our

[15:33]

system. Here it is. I want to actually

[15:36]

work on this. And so, we've told Resolve

[15:38]

that we're actually going to use this

[15:39]

and play with it and work with it and

[15:41]

edit it with other videos and all the

[15:43]

fun stuff that Resolve does. All the

[15:44]

media up here in this panel is not in

[15:47]

our project yet. It's just on our

[15:49]

system. So, as far as Resolve is

[15:51]

concerned, it only really knows about

[15:53]

this one clip. In fact, I would consider

[15:55]

using this panel a little bit optional.

[15:59]

It is a nice way to be able to hover

[16:00]

scrub and kind of find the media that

[16:02]

you want. But you could also just close

[16:04]

this media storage and bring things

[16:06]

directly into the media pool. You could

[16:08]

do that a couple ways. You could

[16:09]

rightclick here and say import media.

[16:12]

You could go up to file and go down to

[16:14]

import media. Or you can just drag media

[16:16]

into the media pool from your system.

[16:19]

And so here I have a bunch of footage. I

[16:21]

can grab any of these and just drag them

[16:23]

into the media pool. And again, now it

[16:25]

knows about this footage because I put

[16:27]

it in the media pool. It lives in the

[16:29]

project. So now we have two clips that

[16:31]

we can work with. What if we had a bunch

[16:33]

of clips? So I'll just grab a bunch of

[16:35]

this and drag this in here. Now we have

[16:37]

a bunch of clips here in the media pool.

[16:39]

We have all these clips that we can work

[16:40]

with for our movie. But it would

[16:43]

actually help to start getting organized

[16:44]

here. That's one thing that the media

[16:47]

page is really good for. And especially

[16:48]

working here in the media pool. You can

[16:51]

rightclick anywhere here in this empty

[16:53]

space and you could go up and say new

[16:55]

bin. That makes a little folder inside

[16:58]

of the Resolve project where you can put

[16:59]

different pieces of media. So we can put

[17:02]

whatever piece of media we want here.

[17:04]

Just anything with the girl. Let's say

[17:06]

great. We just say girl. Sure. Can

[17:10]

double click and open this. And we have

[17:12]

our media here. We also have a list of

[17:15]

bins over here on the left which we can

[17:18]

kind of navigate to. And it's kind of a

[17:20]

little folder structure here. And so if

[17:22]

we have another bin here, we could say

[17:25]

wide shots. Sure. Let's pick all the

[17:28]

wide shots here and put them in wide.

[17:31]

Sure. And now we have these different

[17:33]

bins here. We can organize this. We

[17:36]

could also right click here in the bin

[17:37]

list and say new bin. That works too.

[17:40]

Bin three. Sure. And we can put those

[17:43]

into bin three. We can also drag them

[17:45]

like this. There are different views in

[17:48]

the media pool. You can zoom these

[17:50]

thumbnails in and out with this slider.

[17:53]

You can switch it to list view if you

[17:54]

want to see a little bit more

[17:56]

information about your clips.

[17:58]

You can switch this to metadata view,

[18:00]

which is kind of a mix of the thumbnail

[18:02]

view and there's also a little bit more

[18:04]

data on them. Most of the time I either

[18:07]

use the thumbnail view or the list view.

[18:09]

And this is really how we get organized

[18:11]

when it comes to our media here in

[18:14]

Resolve. All about the media pool. So,

[18:16]

I'm actually going to get rid of all of

[18:18]

these just so we have no clips here. And

[18:20]

I want you to do this with me. If you

[18:22]

downloaded the media to follow along,

[18:24]

you should have a folder called drag

[18:25]

these folders into media pool bin list.

[18:28]

Now, this is going to be absolutely

[18:29]

shocking, but here's what I want you to

[18:32]

do. I want you to select all of these

[18:34]

folders and I want you to drag them into

[18:36]

the media pool bin list right here. Just

[18:38]

like this, right under here where it

[18:40]

says master and drop them.

[18:43]

That's going to take Resolve a second.

[18:45]

And then it's going to make bins out of

[18:47]

each of those folders. So, that's going

[18:49]

to be organized just like it is in our

[18:51]

Finder or Explorer window in these

[18:52]

different folders. If you drag these

[18:55]

into the media pool itself and not the

[18:56]

bin list, it's just going to throw all

[18:58]

of the media in there without the

[18:59]

folders. So, make sure to drag them

[19:02]

here. All right. So, now we have all of

[19:05]

the media that we're going to use for

[19:07]

the rest of this video. and feel free to

[19:09]

open up the bins, go through it, and

[19:11]

take a look at some of this footage. We

[19:13]

have all kinds of fun stuff. We have a

[19:15]

production meeting here with multiple

[19:18]

cameras. We have footage that we're

[19:19]

going to color grade later. We have

[19:21]

footage that needs some compositing and

[19:23]

some effects. And we have some clips

[19:25]

that we're going to edit together into a

[19:27]

story in the edit page. Now, I don't

[19:29]

want to spend tons and tons of time on

[19:31]

this, but I do want to show you a couple

[19:33]

little extra things about the media

[19:36]

pool. One thing that can be really

[19:38]

helpful in the media page is the

[19:39]

metadata. Now over here we have a

[19:43]

metadata panel which has nothing to

[19:45]

inspect right now. But if I select the

[19:47]

clip that's going to show us metadata on

[19:50]

this clip. Now what is that? It's just

[19:52]

basically information that is recorded

[19:55]

with the clip. We can make this panel

[19:57]

bigger by going up here and clicking

[19:59]

where it says audio. That's going to

[20:01]

close our audio panel here. In fact, any

[20:04]

panel in Resolve pretty much has some

[20:07]

kind of header like this, usually at the

[20:09]

top. And when it's bright white, that

[20:10]

panel is open. And when it's gray, it's

[20:13]

closed. And so, this is how we can open

[20:15]

and close different panels in Resolve.

[20:17]

And this is common to all of the pages.

[20:19]

We're going to be doing a lot of that.

[20:21]

So, we have our metadata panel open

[20:23]

here. And I can see all kinds of

[20:24]

information about this, but there's

[20:26]

actually even more information. If I go

[20:27]

up here to the upper right, this little

[20:29]

button right here, I can click this and

[20:31]

say all groups. And that gives us just a

[20:35]

ton of stuff. Most of this is stuff that

[20:38]

we can fill in later. And so if you're

[20:40]

the kind of person that really likes to

[20:42]

be organized and really, you know, you

[20:44]

write notes about stuff and you tag

[20:47]

things and you have labels all over your

[20:48]

house and you have spreadsheets, this is

[20:52]

the best place for you. You can write

[20:54]

all kinds of notes about every single

[20:56]

thing that you want for your piece of

[20:58]

media here. You can write a description,

[21:00]

comments, the shot, scene, take, angle.

[21:03]

All of this stuff you can do right here

[21:04]

in the metadata panel of the media page.

[21:06]

It's probably way more detailed than you

[21:08]

ever really need to be. But here's

[21:10]

what's really cool about that. Let's

[21:12]

select this uh clip 24. I'm just going

[21:13]

to double click on this clip 24 here.

[21:15]

That'll load it up in this viewer. So,

[21:18]

if I double click on it, then I don't

[21:19]

have to be hover scrubbing it. I can

[21:21]

just scrub this up here in the viewer.

[21:24]

And what I can do is zoom in by just

[21:25]

rolling with the scroll wheel here to

[21:27]

this slate. This is the reason why we

[21:29]

shoot with slates is because then we can

[21:31]

easily tell what scene and take a clip

[21:34]

is. And we could if we wanted to go here

[21:37]

into the metadata and kind of record

[21:39]

that. So scene 4.5

[21:42]

take five. So now we have that here in

[21:45]

the metadata because we kind of read it

[21:47]

off of here and just typed it in. We can

[21:49]

do the same thing for other clips here.

[21:51]

Let's find it. So this is 4.6.

[21:55]

4.6 take two.

[21:58]

4.7 take 3. And you could go through and

[22:01]

tag all of your clips with this. What's

[22:04]

neat about this is I can switch this to

[22:05]

list view and I can rightclick up here

[22:07]

in this header and I can pick any kind

[22:10]

of metadata that I want to show. In

[22:13]

fact, I'll uncheck a bunch of this stuff

[22:15]

cuz I don't care about most of it. Just

[22:17]

uncheck all the stuff I don't care about

[22:20]

and then just check the stuff I do care

[22:21]

about. So, for instance, scene, take,

[22:25]

and then I can organize this by scene

[22:27]

and take, and I can quickly see where my

[22:29]

scenes and takes are, match that up to

[22:31]

my script if I want to, whatever I want

[22:33]

to do here. And so, this is a really

[22:35]

nice way to get organized. I could also

[22:37]

rightclick here and select keyword. And

[22:40]

here I could do something like, all

[22:41]

right, this is an over- the-shoulder

[22:43]

shot. So, we could go into keywords here

[22:45]

in my metadata, and type OTS. That's

[22:48]

short for over the shoulder. Just like

[22:50]

that. That's going to add that keyword

[22:52]

here. And anything that I have that's an

[22:55]

over-the-shoulder shot, I can just kind

[22:56]

of page through here and see if there's

[22:58]

anything else that's an OTS. This is

[23:00]

sort of an over- the-shoulder shot.

[23:02]

Sure, let's call it that. OTS like that.

[23:06]

Boop. Now, we have these listed as OTS.

[23:10]

So, I could sort them by keyword, but I

[23:12]

can also go to something called a smart

[23:14]

bin. Smart bins are like a live filter.

[23:18]

It's sort of like a folder that it puts

[23:20]

a copy of things into based on whatever

[23:23]

you set the smart bin to. And by

[23:25]

default, if you click on keywords, it

[23:27]

makes a smart bin for every keyword. So,

[23:29]

I can click on OTS, and that's going to

[23:31]

show me just the OTS shots. And you can

[23:33]

make keywords for absolutely anything

[23:35]

you want. It can be completely custom,

[23:37]

which is really neat. There's also these

[23:39]

collections here, which will give you

[23:41]

some quick things to sort by. for

[23:43]

instance, video clips, audio only, and

[23:45]

it even has a way with AI where it can

[23:47]

kind of sort and categorize things. In

[23:50]

fact, let's do that. Let's grab our

[23:51]

audio only stuff. Let's just grab all of

[23:53]

this here. I'm going to just shiftclick

[23:55]

the end of that, right click, and go

[23:58]

down to AI tools, audio classification,

[24:01]

analyze. This is something that's only

[24:03]

available in the paid version. I

[24:04]

promised I'd tell you when there's paid

[24:06]

version stuff. Any kind of AI stuff is

[24:08]

pretty much in the paid version. All

[24:09]

right. But what's neat about this is

[24:11]

once it analyzes all of that, then I can

[24:13]

go and look for clips just with

[24:15]

dialogue, clips with just music, clips

[24:17]

that are more for effects, and there's

[24:20]

also subcategories, and it will try and

[24:23]

figure out clips that have things like

[24:25]

effects in them, things like a door,

[24:27]

things like a dog barking, things like

[24:29]

laughter or liquid. Sometimes it does

[24:33]

all kinds of weird things, like it

[24:34]

thinks they're sheep or pig. There's a

[24:36]

toilet flushing sound. It nailed that

[24:37]

one. And so that's kind of fun. If you

[24:39]

have lots and lots of clips that you

[24:41]

want to organize a little bit better,

[24:43]

you can use that AI to do that. But

[24:45]

again, that's in the paid version and

[24:47]

you don't need to do that. You can

[24:48]

always make your own keywords and kind

[24:50]

of organize this yourself. You can even

[24:52]

rightclick here and say add smart bin

[24:56]

and you can do kind of a live filter

[24:59]

based on all kinds of stuff. So media

[25:01]

pool properties. You could even do like

[25:04]

things from a certain scene. If the

[25:06]

scene contains, you know, scene four,

[25:08]

then that's going to only show scene

[25:10]

four. And if we hit create, then we have

[25:13]

the smart bin one, which we could rename

[25:15]

scene 4. And you could have one for each

[25:18]

scene. All kinds of stuff you can do

[25:20]

with this. This is especially helpful

[25:22]

for documentaries and things where you

[25:24]

have lots and lots and lots of footage

[25:25]

that you need to stay organized with.

[25:27]

Things where you have, you know, 20

[25:29]

hours of B-roll. It's great to spend

[25:31]

some time before you edit to kind of get

[25:33]

this all organized here. And there are a

[25:35]

few more things that you could do in the

[25:36]

media page, but this is really what I

[25:39]

use this for most of the time is going

[25:41]

through and getting organized, logging

[25:44]

footage, putting putting metadata in,

[25:46]

and just kind of getting our head around

[25:47]

all of the media that's in our project.

[25:50]

And I'm going to show you one more cool

[25:51]

thing before we get into the edit page.

[25:53]

And this is something that you can

[25:54]

actually do in the other pages, but is a

[25:56]

great thing to do in the media page as

[25:58]

well. And that is syncing audio. If we

[26:01]

open up our clip and play this back, we

[26:03]

have the audio from the camera.

[26:07]

The kids are talking, but you can't

[26:08]

really hear them very well because the

[26:11]

camera is really far away. Now, we had a

[26:13]

boom mic here where we were recording

[26:15]

some audio so that we can actually hear

[26:17]

them, but that recorded to a separate

[26:19]

recorder. In fact, if we open up our

[26:21]

audio here, this clip 108,

[26:24]

scene four, shot 18, take three.

[26:28]

He said, "Scene four, shot 18, take

[26:30]

three."

[26:33]

Scene four, shot 18, take three.

[26:36]

Scene four, shot 18, take three.

[26:41]

So, how do we get this audio and this

[26:44]

video to sync up? Well, you could

[26:46]

actually put them together on a

[26:48]

timeline, which I'll show you a little

[26:49]

bit on how to do something like that

[26:50]

later. But one thing that Resolve can do

[26:52]

that's really great is we can take this

[26:54]

audio. Let's actually just take grab all

[26:55]

this audio and throw this into that

[26:57]

folder. So, we have all of the audio and

[26:59]

video together. I can take this clip and

[27:02]

this clip. I'm just holding control and

[27:04]

selecting both of these. And I can

[27:05]

rightclick and go up to audio sync,

[27:08]

autosync audio. This is something that

[27:10]

is still available in the free version.

[27:12]

and we're going to select synchronize

[27:14]

using waveform like this and hit sync.

[27:17]

What that's going to do it you just

[27:19]

about miss it. What that's going to do

[27:22]

is replace the audio in our video clip

[27:25]

with the audio from that mic. So here

[27:31]

camera audio

[27:32]

scene four shot 18 take three.

[27:36]

That still works but now go check it

[27:38]

out.

[27:39]

No, you go check it out. we can actually

[27:40]

hear them because we have that good

[27:42]

audio switched out. What's cool about

[27:44]

this is we can actually select all of

[27:45]

our clips. Just shift select all of

[27:47]

this, right click, audio sync, autosync

[27:49]

audio, and that's going to go through

[27:52]

all of our clips and sync them together.

[27:55]

So, anything that matches with the other

[27:57]

one, it's going to replace that audio.

[27:59]

Now, some of the clips it didn't really

[28:01]

work for, and that's okay. We can worry

[28:03]

about those later, but for most of them,

[28:05]

it worked. So, it says clip 20 and clip

[28:08]

19. Let's look at clip 20 and clip 19.

[28:13]

And there's not really any audio that we

[28:15]

need to hear. There's not not any

[28:18]

dialogue. So, it's really not that big

[28:19]

of a deal. But from now on in our

[28:22]

project, we'll hear the good audio fine

[28:26]

instead of the on camera audio. And

[28:28]

that's going to make editing a lot

[28:29]

easier. In fact, if we want to double

[28:31]

check and make sure that things are

[28:32]

synced up, we can rightclick here in

[28:34]

this header and find synced audio. And

[28:37]

that's going to list the audio right

[28:39]

here that it synced up with that clip.

[28:42]

Isn't that nice? Such a great feature.

[28:45]

Next, let's talk about editing. And for

[28:47]

that, I'm going to go into the edit

[28:49]

page. I'm actually going to skip over

[28:50]

the cut page for just a minute. But to

[28:52]

switch to the edit page, all I have to

[28:53]

do is click on edit. And that'll switch

[28:55]

to the edit page, and we're ready to

[28:57]

start working on our story. Now, a lot

[29:00]

of what you do in Resolve is going to be

[29:02]

in the edit page because you can kind of

[29:04]

think of it as like the hub for all of

[29:07]

the things that happen in your video.

[29:09]

The edit page is where we take all of

[29:11]

these clips that we have in our project

[29:13]

and we actually put them together in a

[29:16]

timeline. The timeline is where we

[29:18]

figure out the order of the clips and

[29:19]

how long they take and which parts we

[29:21]

use. And we're basically building our

[29:23]

new edited video with the timeline.

[29:27]

It's really all about building a story.

[29:29]

And so if we're shooting a scene in a

[29:32]

movie about Bill getting into his car,

[29:34]

we can shoot all of the different pieces

[29:36]

of this. Bill walking to his car, Bill

[29:37]

getting in the car, Bill getting a phone

[29:39]

call, Bill opening the door, Bill waving

[29:41]

to the neighbor. We can shoot all of

[29:42]

these things happening in any order we

[29:44]

want and then choose to change the order

[29:47]

in our edit. So, Bill opens the door.

[29:49]

That's the fourth thing that we shoot,

[29:51]

but we're going to put it first in our

[29:52]

edit. Bill waving to the neighbor comes

[29:54]

next.

[29:56]

Bill getting a phone call, Bill walking

[29:59]

to the car, and then Bill getting in the

[30:01]

car. And so even though we shot this out

[30:03]

of order, the order that we're building

[30:05]

in our edit is Bill opens the door, Bill

[30:08]

waves to the neighbor, Bill gets a phone

[30:10]

call, Bill walks to his car, Bill gets

[30:12]

in the car. This is the kind of thing

[30:14]

that I'm so excited about when it comes

[30:16]

to editing is because what we're doing

[30:17]

is we're building a story here. So

[30:20]

everything in the edit page is about

[30:22]

building that story. And that timeline

[30:24]

is going to be where everything in our

[30:26]

video lives. And we're going to make

[30:27]

more tweaks to it later in these other

[30:29]

pages. But for now, kind of keep that in

[30:32]

mind that that's our goal with the edit

[30:33]

page. So, let's talk about the

[30:35]

interface. We are going to have some

[30:37]

familiar stuff here. Actually, we have

[30:40]

these little buttons up here. When we

[30:42]

click these and they're white, they open

[30:44]

up different panels. And the panel

[30:46]

that's open by default over here on the

[30:48]

left is our media pool. Now, this is

[30:50]

exactly like the media pool in the media

[30:53]

page. The only difference is instead of

[30:55]

it being down here,

[30:58]

it's over here to the left. But you can

[31:01]

still do all the same things. This is

[31:03]

all the media that lives in your

[31:05]

project. We still have our bins. We

[31:07]

still have our smart bins. We can still

[31:09]

look at our media in various different

[31:11]

ways. But you can sort of think of this

[31:13]

as like your cabinet of ingredients that

[31:16]

we're going to use to make our video.

[31:18]

Here we also have a couple of viewers.

[31:20]

This left viewer is called our source

[31:22]

viewer.

[31:24]

And this right viewer here is called the

[31:26]

timeline viewer.

[31:31]

What the source viewer is for is if I

[31:34]

open up one of these pieces of media,

[31:35]

double click on it, I can preview this

[31:37]

piece of media. So I can scrub through

[31:39]

this and preview this and look all

[31:41]

through any kind of media that I have.

[31:44]

And you do that just by double clicking

[31:45]

on any of these pieces of media. And you

[31:47]

can sort of think of this as like

[31:49]

picking up something and looking at it.

[31:51]

So if you have a snack in your cabinet,

[31:53]

you pick it up and you look at it like

[31:54]

this, but you haven't actually added it

[31:56]

to your plate yet. All you're doing is

[31:57]

just kind of previewing it, looking at

[31:59]

it. So that's cool. You can double click

[32:01]

on any piece of media to load it up here

[32:02]

in the viewer. You can also switch this

[32:05]

to this second mode right here with this

[32:07]

little button. And this is called source

[32:09]

tape mode. And what this is is it

[32:12]

basically takes all of your footage and

[32:14]

it loads it all into this source viewer

[32:16]

all at once and it just kind of puts

[32:18]

them all together. And so if I scrub

[32:20]

through this, I'm scrubbing through this

[32:22]

first clip. And if I go to this second

[32:24]

part after this little tick mark, I'm

[32:26]

scrubbing through the second clip and

[32:28]

the third clip and so on. And so I can

[32:29]

scrub through all of my clips in my

[32:31]

media pool, at least in the bin that I

[32:33]

have up here, all at once in one motion.

[32:36]

This is great if you're looking for a

[32:37]

specific shot visually that you want to

[32:39]

lay over something. Makes it really,

[32:41]

really quick to be able to find what you

[32:43]

need to find. But you might find it less

[32:45]

confusing, maybe a little bit easier

[32:47]

just to use this first icon here, this

[32:50]

first mode where you double click on a

[32:52]

piece of media and load it up here in

[32:53]

the viewer. Now, once we have a piece of

[32:56]

media selected that we like and we

[32:58]

actually want to add that to our video,

[33:00]

we want to put that into our edit, what

[33:02]

we have to do is add it to a timeline.

[33:04]

If the media pool is like our cabinet

[33:07]

and our viewer is like picking up a

[33:10]

ingredient from that cabinet, then the

[33:12]

timeline down here, this is kind of like

[33:14]

our plate.

[33:16]

So, if we want to actually eat

[33:18]

something, we're going to put it on our

[33:19]

plate. So, if we want to add this to our

[33:21]

video, I can grab this clip just in the

[33:23]

middle. I'm just grabbing it and

[33:25]

dragging it down here to our timeline.

[33:27]

And that's going to add this clip to our

[33:30]

timeline, which is like, you know,

[33:32]

putting an apple on our plate. So now we

[33:35]

have an active timeline. We have this

[33:37]

playhead that goes back and forth. And

[33:39]

this is actually going to make the story

[33:41]

of our video. Right now our story is

[33:43]

this. If we go all the way to the left

[33:46]

and I hit spacebar to play, we have a

[33:48]

bunch of black space here. We have an

[33:50]

empty space. And then eventually our

[33:53]

clip starts. And this is our full clip,

[33:56]

not edited. We haven't done anything

[33:58]

with this. It's just literally the clip

[33:59]

thrown into the timeline. We still have

[34:02]

people moving around. We still have the

[34:03]

slate, all of that kind of stuff. And so

[34:05]

if we were going to export this movie

[34:07]

right now and we were going to put this

[34:08]

on YouTube or something, this is exactly

[34:10]

what people would see is 6 seconds of

[34:13]

black followed by just this unedited

[34:16]

footage. That doesn't really make a

[34:18]

whole lot of sense. But we've done

[34:19]

something really exciting already. We've

[34:22]

put this clip down onto our timeline,

[34:25]

which means that we actually have a

[34:26]

video in progress. Now, we could render

[34:29]

this out and it will be a video that's

[34:31]

different than this clip. So, we've done

[34:34]

a little bit of magic already. We've

[34:35]

created something. Now, it's not very

[34:37]

good. It's not very interesting. So, we

[34:39]

can change that. But all of the magic of

[34:41]

building our story happens down here in

[34:45]

the timeline. So, let's change our story

[34:48]

to be a little bit better here. The

[34:50]

first thing I want to do is I don't want

[34:51]

this black right here. I don't want to

[34:52]

watch 6 seconds of black before anything

[34:54]

happens. So, we can take this and just

[34:55]

drag it to the left. And we always want

[34:58]

this kind of pushed all the way to the

[34:59]

left at the very start of our clip

[35:01]

because then we start with an actual

[35:04]

video, right? We can zoom into this

[35:06]

timeline by clicking this little plus

[35:08]

right here. That's kind of our zoom bar.

[35:10]

We can zoom in and out. And I can adjust

[35:12]

this middle bar here. And I can move

[35:14]

this up and down. And by default, we

[35:16]

have a video track and an audio track

[35:18]

added here. If I take the bottom edge of

[35:20]

this audio track and I drag it down,

[35:22]

that'll make these waveforms a little

[35:24]

bit bigger. And so we can see a visual

[35:26]

representation of what's happening in

[35:28]

the audio. So the bigger the spike, the

[35:30]

more the louder the audio. So we can see

[35:33]

where the slate is right here. We zoom

[35:36]

in here. We have these little spikes.

[35:38]

Teen take one.

[35:40]

That's where that slate made that spike.

[35:43]

And so we're going to start sometime

[35:44]

after this.

[35:46]

What was that?

[35:47]

So her saying, "What was that?" So

[35:49]

that's a good place to start this clip.

[35:50]

That's where it actually gets

[35:52]

interesting. That's the part that we're

[35:53]

supposed to show. And so what we can do

[35:55]

is we can trim this and kind of cut out

[35:58]

all of this part and just start the clip

[36:01]

there. The way that we do that is we

[36:03]

just mouse over the edge of this. And

[36:05]

you'll see how my mouse kind of turns

[36:07]

into this left bracket. I can grab this

[36:09]

and then just slide this over like this.

[36:13]

And I'll have that clip kind of start

[36:15]

right there. This is called trimming a

[36:17]

clip. So just like you would trim a

[36:19]

hedge or something like that or trim a

[36:20]

piece of paper, you kind of cut off all

[36:22]

the excess. Right? So, we're cutting off

[36:25]

this first part. Let's play this back.

[36:27]

I'll just hit spacebar.

[36:29]

What was that?

[36:30]

Great. I like that. Let's stop right

[36:32]

after that. And I'll take the edge of

[36:34]

this and drag this over here.

[36:36]

And we can see the outline of the full

[36:38]

clip. And we're just going to use that

[36:40]

little part. There we go. So, now this

[36:42]

is a lot shorter, but we have all this

[36:44]

black here. So, we can take this and

[36:45]

slide it all the way to the left. Just

[36:47]

like that. Okay. I'll zoom in here so we

[36:49]

can see what's going on.

[36:51]

What was that?

[36:52]

Great. This literally this literally

[36:56]

what I just showed you. Picking a clip

[36:58]

here,

[37:00]

dragging it down, and then deciding

[37:03]

where you want to start that clip. So

[37:06]

maybe starting it right here.

[37:07]

Go check it out.

[37:09]

And trimming it to just be that part

[37:11]

that you like.

[37:13]

Check it out.

[37:15]

Um, no. You go check it out.

[37:18]

Trimming off all the excess. This is

[37:21]

like the bread and butter of editing.

[37:24]

This is like 90% of it. You can make so

[37:27]

many amazing videos literally with what

[37:29]

I just showed you. That's all you need.

[37:33]

That's all you need for so much stuff.

[37:35]

We're just bringing those clips in,

[37:37]

trimming them, and then putting them

[37:38]

here in the timeline. And ideally, there

[37:41]

wouldn't be any empty spaces in between

[37:43]

them. So, we cut from one video.

[37:46]

Go check it out.

[37:47]

Next video.

[37:48]

All right. We're putting these clips

[37:49]

together. And that makes a new story.

[37:52]

Just like in our example of Bill walking

[37:55]

to his car, we're taking all these

[37:56]

separate clips and then putting them

[37:58]

together here in an order that we like

[38:00]

in the timeline. Okay. And what's cool

[38:03]

is that we have control over this. We

[38:05]

can do something like completely cut out

[38:08]

the phone call. Bill opens the door.

[38:09]

Bill waves to his neighbor. Bill walks

[38:10]

to his car. Bill gets in the car. We can

[38:12]

cut out this this whole first part and

[38:14]

just say Bill walks to his car and then

[38:16]

Bill gets in the car. We are in complete

[38:18]

control of this story and it's all about

[38:21]

where these clips go in the timeline and

[38:23]

what order they go in. So this is so

[38:26]

great. Let's let's get our hands dirty

[38:28]

here a little bit. Let's let's make a

[38:29]

story. So if we were to go to this

[38:33]

second icon here, this source tape, and

[38:35]

scrub through this, we can kind of get a

[38:37]

good idea of the story here. These kids

[38:39]

arrive and they see this crashed UFO.

[38:43]

They're a little bit scared about it, so

[38:44]

they kind of argue who should go check

[38:46]

it out. The girl finally convinces her

[38:48]

brother to go and check it out. So he

[38:50]

walks towards the UFO. So he walks up to

[38:52]

the UFO. They're both really nervous.

[38:55]

And then as he walks up there, something

[38:57]

moves. So this is just a few clips from

[39:00]

a scene from our movie called Tuesday on

[39:02]

Earth. And so what's great is we have

[39:04]

all these clips and we can choose to

[39:05]

tell this story however we want. So a

[39:08]

good way to start oftent times is with a

[39:11]

wide shot. And we want the wide shot

[39:13]

that shows the first thing that happens,

[39:15]

right? So, we have the kids kind of

[39:17]

riding up on their bikes, putting their

[39:19]

bikes down.

[39:22]

And so, let's use that for our first

[39:23]

clip. So, that's clip 10. I'll just

[39:26]

double click on that. That'll switch to

[39:27]

our source viewer. I'll grab this and

[39:29]

drag this down into our timeline.

[39:35]

For this first clip, let's scrub through

[39:37]

until we're ready, until something

[39:38]

interesting starts happening. So, right

[39:40]

as they kind of get off their bikes,

[39:41]

that's probably a good place to trim

[39:43]

this beginning. Move this down. Let's

[39:46]

play this back.

[39:48]

I can hit control F to play this full

[39:51]

screen like this.

[39:59]

Whoa.

[40:03]

Great. That's about all we need right

[40:05]

there. And so we could use that and trim

[40:08]

it this way. We also have other takes

[40:11]

here. And so let's scrub through this

[40:13]

and see how this works.

[40:20]

And you'll notice now when we scrub

[40:22]

through things, the video changes on the

[40:24]

right viewer. That's because again, this

[40:25]

is the timeline viewer. This is the

[40:28]

preview of what your actual movie is

[40:30]

going to be. This is just picking up

[40:33]

footage from over here and looking at

[40:34]

it. Nothing that happens over here is

[40:37]

necessarily going to happen in your

[40:38]

video. It's all about this viewer right

[40:41]

here, the timeline viewer. If you forget

[40:43]

which one is which, just scrub your

[40:44]

timeline and see which one moves. We can

[40:47]

scrub through this and figure out what

[40:48]

we like for our different tanks.

[41:00]

Great. I like that. Let's trim the end

[41:02]

and let's trim the beginning

[41:04]

right after they start moving.

[41:08]

Okay, something like that. And move this

[41:11]

all the way to the left. So, we have our

[41:13]

first shot of our

[41:16]

movie. Them getting off their bikes and

[41:18]

walking up.

[41:21]

Let's maybe go back into our source tape

[41:23]

here. Kind of scroll around and try and

[41:26]

figure out what what we should do next.

[41:28]

Again, we're in control of this. That's

[41:30]

what's so nice. So, they end this shot

[41:32]

by kind of standing there like this. So,

[41:35]

let's cut to them standing together.

[41:37]

I think probably this shot right here,

[41:39]

shot 31. But this time, instead of

[41:42]

dragging this entire clip down here to

[41:44]

the timeline and trimming it, we're

[41:46]

going to do a little bit of work before

[41:47]

we add it to the timeline. We're going

[41:49]

to do that by setting ins and outs. See,

[41:52]

in our source viewer, we're viewing the

[41:54]

entire clip, right? The whole thing. And

[41:58]

everything that might happen in that

[41:59]

clip is not necessarily stuff we want to

[42:01]

keep. Saying action, the actor having to

[42:04]

sneeze, Bill waving to the neighbor,

[42:05]

Bill waves to the neighbor again.

[42:06]

awkward ending and cut. Most of that

[42:08]

stuff we don't need. What we really want

[42:10]

is Bill waving to the neighbor, right?

[42:12]

So, what we can do is kind of trim out

[42:14]

the extra stuff in the source viewer

[42:16]

before we take this and we put it down

[42:18]

into the timeline. And so, what we'll do

[42:20]

is we'll set what's called an in and an

[42:22]

out. An in is like the start of the clip

[42:25]

that you want and the out is the end of

[42:27]

the clip you want. You can think of this

[42:30]

like swimming. When you get in the pool,

[42:32]

you start swimming and when you end

[42:34]

swimming, you get out of the pool. So an

[42:36]

in is the beginning of your clip and out

[42:38]

is the end of your clip. So we're going

[42:40]

to scrub through and try and find the

[42:42]

beginning of our clip, which is probably

[42:44]

going to be right before he starts

[42:45]

talking.

[42:46]

Kind of scrub through this. And then

[42:47]

let's just play.

[42:49]

Go check it out.

[42:50]

Great. So yeah, right about there. And

[42:53]

we want that to start there. So we're

[42:54]

going to set an in. There's a few ways

[42:55]

to do that. One of them is you can click

[42:57]

this button right here, which is our set

[42:59]

in button. Like that. No way. You

[43:03]

The other thing you could do would be to

[43:04]

hit I on the keyboard. I for in

[43:07]

go check it out.

[43:08]

Let's play this back and see what it

[43:09]

looks like.

[43:10]

No way. You go check it out.

[43:15]

Fine.

[43:17]

Okay,

[43:19]

I'll go check it out.

[43:23]

Good. Now, let's end the clip there. And

[43:25]

we can either click this set out button

[43:27]

or we can hit O for out. Just like that.

[43:30]

Now, we have these little gray

[43:31]

indicators here. And what that means is

[43:34]

that our clip is this long, but we're

[43:36]

only going to use this part of the clip.

[43:39]

This is what we're actually going to

[43:40]

use. And if I click and drag from the

[43:42]

middle of this clip down here, we'll see

[43:44]

it's much shorter than it would have

[43:46]

been, and it's already pre-trimmed. Now,

[43:49]

that doesn't mean that we can't change

[43:50]

it. We can grab this, and we can take

[43:52]

the edge of this and trim this. And you

[43:54]

can see how big the original clip is

[43:55]

with this little gray outline that shows

[43:57]

up. It's just like we were to put this

[43:59]

down and trim it. We just don't have to

[44:02]

move things around in the timeline to do

[44:03]

that. We could just kind of trim this

[44:04]

beforehand and bring this in. And so

[44:06]

what some people will do is go through

[44:08]

all their footage and pick the part that

[44:10]

they like. They'll kind of do some

[44:11]

pre-edits.

[44:16]

Like this I for in. And I can also use

[44:18]

the J, K, and L keys on the keyboard as

[44:21]

these buttons right here. J plays

[44:24]

backwards. K starts and stops. and L

[44:26]

plays forwards. So you can kind of move

[44:28]

things back and forth with J and L.

[44:31]

Go check it out.

[44:33]

Um, no, you go check it out.

[44:38]

Fine.

[44:39]

Okay,

[44:41]

I'll go check it out.

[44:43]

Good. That looks good. I'll hit O for

[44:45]

out. And I've just grabbed the part that

[44:46]

I want and I can drag it down into the

[44:48]

timeline. Just like that. And so a great

[44:51]

way to start getting things here on the

[44:52]

timeline is just to go through all of

[44:54]

your clips and pick the parts you like.

[44:58]

Go check it out.

[45:00]

Um, no. You go check it out.

[45:05]

Fine.

[45:06]

Reset. We don't want you to move.

[45:08]

Right.

[45:08]

Okay. Needs to back up a little bit. So,

[45:10]

we're going to use the second take. I

[45:13]

can scrub through this faster by hitting

[45:15]

L twice. That's going to go through this

[45:17]

at 2x speed. And then I can hit K to

[45:20]

stop and then L to play back normal

[45:22]

speed.

[45:24]

Go check it out. Right. I guess

[45:27]

J to kind of reverse. I for in.

[45:30]

Go check it out.

[45:32]

Um, no, you go check it out.

[45:37]

Fine.

[45:38]

And again, I can just drag this down.

[45:40]

So, you can do this for all of your

[45:41]

footage. And a good way to do this is

[45:43]

just kind of throw all the footage into

[45:44]

a timeline. And then remember, you can

[45:47]

always move things around,

[45:50]

change the order, and play around with

[45:52]

things, and you can always trim it more

[45:54]

or less. You really can't ruin it too

[45:58]

badly. And so, this is the fun part

[45:59]

about editing is creating this story.

[46:02]

So, let's just maybe cut to this second

[46:04]

shot here. And I'll just trim this back

[46:07]

a little bit to where they're kind of

[46:08]

just looking dumb at this thing. And

[46:11]

we'll cut from this wide shot into this

[46:14]

closeup like this

[46:17]

action.

[46:19]

We got to cut out that action though.

[46:28]

Go check it out.

[46:31]

No way. You go check it out.

[46:35]

Fine.

[46:37]

Okay,

[46:39]

I'll go check it out.

[46:42]

Great. So, we have the basic actions

[46:44]

happening where they come up, they see

[46:47]

something,

[46:48]

they start arguing, and eventually the

[46:50]

guy starts walking towards the craft.

[46:53]

But we want to show this in a more

[46:54]

creative way. And so, we actually have

[46:56]

these other shots that we can cut in

[46:58]

between them and make it look a little

[47:00]

bit more interesting. So, for instance,

[47:02]

when the girl's talking, we want to see

[47:05]

the girl's face a little bit closer. So,

[47:07]

let's see if this take works.

[47:08]

Go check it out.

[47:11]

Um, no, you go check it out.

[47:13]

And I like that little Wait, what? Like

[47:15]

this? This right here. So, let's trim

[47:17]

that. And let's see if we can put this

[47:19]

in there somewhere right after he says

[47:21]

go check it out.

[47:23]

Go check it out.

[47:26]

Right there. That's probably a good

[47:28]

place to cut. Now, we haven't done this

[47:30]

yet, but we have this clip, and this

[47:32]

shouldn't go before or after. It should

[47:34]

go right in the middle here. So, what we

[47:35]

can do is we can split this clip a

[47:37]

couple of different ways. One way we

[47:39]

could do it would be to go and click on

[47:41]

this little icon here, this little razor

[47:43]

blade, and that's going to turn our

[47:45]

mouse into a razor blade tool. And

[47:47]

whenever we click on this clip, that's

[47:48]

going to split the clip right there

[47:50]

wherever we click. So, we can just chop

[47:52]

this up if we want to. I'll hit

[47:54]

control-z a few times to undo that. What

[47:57]

I like to do is figure out where I want

[47:58]

to cut by moving this playhead back and

[48:01]

forth and then use a keyboard shortcut

[48:03]

to split it. The default keyboard

[48:05]

shortcut for Resolve is control

[48:07]

backslash. That's the backslash that's

[48:09]

right above enter, like the return key,

[48:11]

kind of in the middle of the keyboard.

[48:13]

If you hit that, that will split this

[48:15]

clip right where that playhead is. And

[48:17]

then you can move the clips around and

[48:19]

put this clip here in between them like

[48:22]

this. So now, let's see what this looks

[48:24]

like.

[48:25]

Go check it out.

[48:28]

Um, no, you go check it out.

[48:30]

See how that kind of works. Fine.

[48:34]

Now we want to see him say fine. And so

[48:36]

really this is kind of the same process.

[48:38]

So we split it right there. Controll

[48:40]

backslash.

[48:42]

And we might not use the rest of this.

[48:44]

But we'll just bring it down there kind

[48:45]

of out of the way for now. Have him

[48:47]

saying fine. Let's see. Where's another

[48:49]

one? There we go. Him saying fine.

[48:51]

No, you go check it out.

[48:53]

Right there. I like that. Let's trim

[48:56]

that here. Bring this in like this.

[48:59]

Oh, check it out.

[49:03]

Fine.

[49:05]

Great.

[49:06]

So, he says fine here.

[49:08]

Fine.

[49:10]

Let's trim this.

[49:12]

Put this in order. So, now we're putting

[49:14]

clips in the order for the story, but

[49:16]

we're also choosing clips that show the

[49:19]

story the very best. This is where it

[49:21]

starts to get really fun.

[49:22]

Go check it out.

[49:25]

Um, no. You go check it out.

[49:30]

Fine.

[49:33]

Okay,

[49:35]

I'll go check it out.

[49:37]

Great. So, we'll maybe cut right there.

[49:40]

And now we have a sequence of a few

[49:41]

different shots that really start to

[49:43]

tell our story. And then it's up to you

[49:45]

as the editor to go in and think about,

[49:48]

okay, how fast should one clip cut to

[49:50]

another clip?

[49:51]

Go check it out.

[49:53]

So, he kind of pushes her. I feel like

[49:55]

this should happen a little bit quicker.

[49:58]

go to that other shot. Anytime that you

[50:00]

cut in between one shot and another, you

[50:02]

can decide to show more or less time.

[50:04]

And so you can kind of control time a

[50:06]

little bit. This is the one part of the

[50:07]

world where you can control time. That's

[50:09]

what's really neat.

[50:10]

Um, no, you go check it out.

[50:13]

Good.

[50:15]

Let's cut that a little bit tighter,

[50:16]

too. Move this down.

[50:20]

Fine.

[50:24]

Okay.

[50:24]

You notice how this cut works really

[50:26]

well.

[50:26]

Fine. The reason for that is because he

[50:29]

starts to turn his head back in this

[50:31]

shot and he finishes turning his head on

[50:33]

this shot. This is called cutting on

[50:35]

action. That means that there's one

[50:38]

action that happens in one shot that's

[50:40]

continued in the other shot. And so our

[50:42]

mind accepts the little differences in

[50:44]

between the shots and it makes it feel

[50:46]

like they're continuous. Just like I

[50:48]

start waving my hand in this shot and

[50:51]

then we cut to this shot, it feels like

[50:54]

it's continuous, right? And that's

[50:55]

because it is. I mean, this is kind of

[50:57]

recorded live, but that's what really

[50:59]

helps

[51:00]

is that little tiny movement. And so,

[51:03]

looking for those opportunities to make

[51:05]

those cuts a little bit easier. For

[51:07]

instance, when he pushes her, she kind

[51:09]

of moves a little bit.

[51:12]

Maybe

[51:14]

this happens in this shot, too. Does he

[51:15]

push her? Yeah, she moves forward a

[51:17]

little bit. So, maybe as she moves

[51:20]

forward just a touch, maybe that'll work

[51:21]

a little better. I can select this empty

[51:23]

part and hit delete. And that's going to

[51:25]

get rid of that gap.

[51:28]

See how there's like that little

[51:29]

movement? She's moving forward. Kind of

[51:31]

moving forward a little bit there, too.

[51:33]

That might be a good cut. It might just

[51:35]

take too long, and we don't want to do

[51:36]

that. We'll see. But that's all up to

[51:39]

you. Now, a couple other things about

[51:41]

adding clips. Let's go through here and

[51:44]

let's add this shot right here. Shot 24.

[51:48]

This is what we would call their POV,

[51:50]

sort of. It's actually an

[51:52]

overthe-shoulder shot, but it's what

[51:53]

they see. And so, anytime that you're

[51:56]

editing, especially when somebody's

[51:59]

looking off screen and they have some

[52:01]

kind of reaction, just like what's

[52:02]

happening here where they're walking

[52:04]

towards and they go, "Wo

[52:07]

then that sparks a question in the

[52:09]

viewer's mind. What are they looking

[52:10]

at?" And so, a lot of the time it's a

[52:12]

good idea to show what they're looking

[52:14]

at in the next shot. Now, the next shot

[52:16]

in the timeline right here is actually

[52:18]

them standing. And it's sort of a

[52:20]

problem because they're actually

[52:21]

standing farther apart here than they

[52:24]

are in this shot. And that's something

[52:26]

you'll probably notice. Like it looks

[52:28]

weird. So, we can kind of feed two birds

[52:30]

with one scone here. We can answer the

[52:32]

question, what are they looking at off

[52:34]

screen? And we can bridge this gap to

[52:37]

not be distracting by adding this shot

[52:40]

in here. Couple ways that we could do

[52:42]

this would be to zoom out, select all of

[52:45]

our shots to the right, and move it down

[52:46]

so that we have some space to put this

[52:48]

shot. And we can drag this shot in here.

[52:50]

And we could set the in and the out on

[52:52]

this shot, and we can drag it in here

[52:54]

like that. And then kind of delete the

[52:55]

gaps, and that would work. What's a

[52:58]

little bit faster is to put our playhead

[53:00]

right on that edge. You can tell it to

[53:02]

snap to the edges by clicking this

[53:04]

button right here. If this magnet is

[53:06]

white, it'll snap to the edges like

[53:08]

this. If it's not, then it won't really

[53:10]

snap. It'll You can kind of put this

[53:11]

wherever you want. But I like have

[53:13]

snapping on for this kind of thing. Put

[53:15]

this right on that edit, that edge in

[53:17]

between the two clips. And what we can

[53:19]

do is click one of these buttons right

[53:21]

here. These are our edit buttons. This

[53:24]

one is insert clip. And what we'll do is

[53:28]

we can set an in and out like the

[53:30]

beginning and the end of this clip.

[53:31]

Something like that. And we can hit this

[53:33]

insert button. And look what happens

[53:34]

when I click this. It inserts this clip

[53:38]

right where that playhead was and it

[53:40]

moves all the other clips this way down

[53:42]

the timeline. So if I hit control +- Z,

[53:44]

we can kind of see what happens. Control

[53:46]

shift Z to redo it. It's just putting

[53:48]

that clip in there. So now we have in

[53:51]

our story, they show up and say, whoa.

[53:55]

And then we see what they see. Ooh yeah,

[53:57]

baby. That looks good. And now we've

[54:01]

forgotten how far apart they were in

[54:03]

that first shot. And so now we cut here

[54:05]

and nobody cares. Works great.

[54:07]

Go check it out.

[54:09]

That's how we build a story here in the

[54:10]

edit page. So cool. And this basic

[54:14]

process works for any kind of video

[54:15]

you're making. Whether you're making a

[54:17]

film like this, or whether you're just

[54:18]

doing a YouTube video, documentary

[54:20]

commercial, it's all about finding the

[54:22]

clips you want, setting the in and out,

[54:25]

and putting it on the timeline in some

[54:26]

way. Whether it's dragging it to the

[54:28]

timeline, or whether it's using an edit

[54:30]

button like this insert. There's also a

[54:32]

couple other edit modes. for instance,

[54:34]

overwrite, which just kind of pastes

[54:36]

this over everything. There's replace,

[54:39]

which will swap out the clip here for

[54:41]

the clip that we're over here in the

[54:43]

timeline. And you can click and drag

[54:45]

here and drag this viewer onto this

[54:47]

viewer. And you have a few more options,

[54:49]

too. For instance, place on top puts

[54:52]

that clip on top and on the next layer.

[54:56]

We're always going to be looking at the

[54:57]

top layer in our viewer,

[55:00]

but we can decide to turn this off and

[55:03]

move this around without overwriting

[55:04]

this clip. One handy edit button here

[55:07]

would be append.

[55:09]

If you drop it on this append, it's

[55:11]

going to throw this clip, whatever we

[55:13]

have selected here, at the end of our

[55:14]

timeline, which is great if you're just

[55:16]

kind of gathering the clips that you

[55:18]

want. You can just double click, set

[55:20]

your in and out. Okay, drag it over

[55:23]

here. Append it end. You don't have to

[55:24]

worry about where you are in your story.

[55:26]

You can just kind of go through here.

[55:29]

Pick the parts you like.

[55:32]

Append. You don't really have to worry

[55:34]

about it.

[55:37]

Great. Append at end. And you can throw

[55:40]

those all in the timeline. And then you

[55:41]

can move them around and adjust them and

[55:43]

trim them and split them and all the

[55:44]

stuff that you need to do. So, if you

[55:46]

want to get really used to how the edit

[55:48]

page works, I would highly recommend

[55:51]

grabbing this footage, dragging it down

[55:53]

into the timeline and just trying to

[55:55]

make a story out of these clips. Now, a

[55:58]

couple quick tips that I think are

[55:59]

pretty helpful for actually putting

[56:01]

together a story here is I like to use

[56:04]

what I call the anchor technique. This

[56:06]

is something that we go into a little

[56:07]

bit more in our end toend editing

[56:09]

course, which I'll tell you more about

[56:10]

in a little while. But the big idea here

[56:12]

is that you start with one shot where

[56:14]

multiple things are happening. So, we

[56:16]

have this wide shot of him walking

[56:18]

towards the craft. We have her kind of

[56:20]

looking around. And so, we can kind of

[56:22]

start with this as our anchor for this

[56:25]

part of the edit. And then we can use

[56:27]

these other shots to enhance it. So, we

[56:29]

have her kind of looking back and forth

[56:31]

right here. We also have this shot of

[56:34]

her kind of looking as he walks forward.

[56:37]

We have the shot of her looking back and

[56:39]

forth right here. And so, we can take

[56:41]

this shot and we'll just kind of trim

[56:43]

this

[56:45]

And we can drag this up to a new track

[56:48]

and kind of put this over our shot like

[56:50]

this. So we have our wide shot here and

[56:54]

then we have the close-up here. And we

[56:57]

can kind of move this back and forth

[56:58]

without overwriting this just because

[57:00]

it's in that top layer. And we can kind

[57:02]

of just play around with this

[57:05]

until we feel like it works.

[57:15]

Maybe we want to cut to a closeup of

[57:17]

him, which we have right here.

[57:20]

Yeah, maybe this one. Sure. And again,

[57:23]

we'll just drag that up like this.

[57:28]

Maybe we'll just cut to this first and

[57:31]

then cut to her. So, we have him

[57:35]

walking forward.

[57:47]

And we can kind of mix these in however

[57:49]

we want

[57:51]

to make this scene not only have all of

[57:54]

the actions that happen in the scene,

[57:56]

but also make it look exciting and have

[57:59]

a bunch of dynamic shots, right? And we

[58:01]

can choose whether to use shots or not.

[58:03]

I mean, we have this shot right here,

[58:04]

which I really like of her kind of

[58:08]

thinking things over a little bit.

[58:09]

Check it out.

[58:12]

We could decide to put this right here

[58:15]

if we want to, but we're using the shots

[58:17]

that are already here down in the

[58:18]

timeline to figure out where to put our

[58:21]

other shots. So, that's the anchor

[58:23]

technique. Now, for a couple of

[58:25]

shortcuts, these are really, really

[58:26]

important. Let's go ahead and put this

[58:28]

right here. And let's say I want to trim

[58:31]

this about this much. I can do that with

[58:33]

my normal selection mode, my normal tool

[58:35]

here, which is activated right here in

[58:38]

the toolbar. Or I can use the trim mode.

[58:42]

That's this one right here. And what

[58:43]

this does is it does similar things, but

[58:46]

if I grab the edge like this and I bring

[58:48]

it this way, it actually kind of sucks

[58:51]

the clips down. And so I can grab the

[58:54]

edge here and I can trim this, but it

[58:55]

doesn't leave a gap. And so it's just a

[58:57]

little bit quicker way to trim things.

[58:59]

It's the exact same thing as trimming

[59:01]

this with our normal selection mode,

[59:03]

selecting this emptiness, and moving it

[59:05]

down like that. It just does this all in

[59:07]

one little thing. The other thing this

[59:10]

tool will do, this this trim tool, is if

[59:13]

you click and drag in the middle of a

[59:14]

clip towards the top, what this will do

[59:16]

is slip this clip. And that means that

[59:19]

it's going to keep the same in and out,

[59:22]

but it's going to use a different part

[59:23]

of the clip. And so if I want to move it

[59:26]

down like this and use this part

[59:28]

just what happened

[59:29]

then that works. I can also slide the

[59:32]

clip if I click and drag in the middle

[59:34]

towards kind of the bottom of the clip

[59:36]

like this. And that moves this back and

[59:38]

forth and it kind of trims the other

[59:40]

clips around it. And this makes more

[59:41]

sense if we have these all on one line.

[59:44]

I'll just drop these in real quick. If

[59:46]

I'm in the trim mode here and I grab

[59:49]

this lower part, I can move this back

[59:51]

and forth and it trims the other clips

[59:53]

there with it. So, I can trim the other

[59:55]

clips or I can move this kind of clip

[59:58]

back and forth. And so, this is a nice

[60:00]

way if you don't quite have your clip

[60:03]

settled in just right. You can use the

[60:05]

trim tools to really kind of move things

[60:09]

back and forth. And so, it really,

[60:10]

really helps, especially if you're

[60:13]

trying to make an edit just right. And

[60:15]

when you grab this and you move it back

[60:17]

and forth, it shows this multiple view.

[60:19]

And so we have the first frame and the

[60:21]

last frame of this clip. Then we have

[60:25]

the last frame of this clip and the

[60:28]

first frame of this clip. And so you can

[60:30]

see all of the transition points all on

[60:33]

one view here. So trim tool is really

[60:35]

useful, especially if you're trying to

[60:37]

edit a little bit quicker. And speaking

[60:39]

of editing quicker, keyboard shortcuts

[60:41]

are very, very important. You can hit T

[60:44]

to select your trim tool and A for your

[60:47]

normal selection mode. Remember, A just

[60:49]

kind of moves things around like this.

[60:51]

Overwrites things, but T will do the

[60:54]

slip and slide and that kind of thing.

[60:56]

You can hit B to go to your blade tool

[60:59]

to chop this up however much you want.

[61:02]

But again, I would highly recommend

[61:03]

learning the keyboard shortcut just to

[61:05]

split this at the playhead. Controll

[61:07]

backslash like that because that's a

[61:09]

nice way to do that. The other major

[61:11]

keyboard shortcut I'd highly recommend

[61:13]

learning is the ripple trim shortcut.

[61:15]

Let's say I want to chop this part of

[61:18]

the clip off either by doing this and

[61:21]

then deleting it and moving it down or I

[61:24]

could use the trim tool and move it down

[61:27]

like this.

[61:29]

Well, I can do that with a keyboard

[61:30]

shortcut by aiming my playhead right

[61:33]

where I want the clip to start and

[61:34]

hitting control shift left bracket.

[61:36]

That's going to do all of that all at

[61:38]

once. is just going to trim this and

[61:40]

ripple everything down this way. Ripple

[61:43]

is the fancy word for moving clips down

[61:45]

so that there's no gaps. And so we can

[61:47]

ripple trim control shift left bracket

[61:50]

for the beginning. And then if we want

[61:52]

to trim the end, control shift right

[61:54]

bracket like that. Now you may notice

[61:57]

that both control backslash and control

[62:01]

shift left and right bracket take two

[62:03]

hands on the keyboard. And so if you

[62:05]

have one hand on the mouse, it's kind of

[62:07]

awkward to remove your hand from the

[62:09]

mouse and then hit a keyboard shortcut.

[62:11]

It's slightly faster actually to

[62:13]

probably just grab it with the mouse.

[62:15]

And so to actually save time, I'd highly

[62:17]

recommend customizing your keyboard

[62:19]

shortcuts. So how do you do that? Up

[62:22]

here in our Da Vinci Resolve menu, we

[62:24]

can go down to keyboard customization.

[62:28]

And this is a whole big panel

[62:31]

dedicated to keyboard shortcuts. And all

[62:34]

you have to do is click on whatever

[62:36]

modifiers you want and then whatever you

[62:37]

would press after that modifier. So

[62:39]

control shift left bracket. And this

[62:42]

will show you the command. So this is

[62:44]

start to playhead. If I click on this,

[62:45]

that'll open up start to playhead right

[62:47]

here. And if you want, you can change

[62:49]

the keyboard shortcut for this. So I

[62:51]

have mine set to Q for start to playhead

[62:54]

and W for end to playhead. Let me kind

[62:56]

of walk you through this because it's

[62:57]

kind of annoying. So I'm going to switch

[63:00]

back to my Da Vinci Resolve shortcuts

[63:02]

here.

[63:05]

By the way, they have presets for

[63:06]

shortcuts that are kind of like Adobe

[63:08]

Premiere Pro and Apple Final Cut, Avid

[63:12]

Pro Tools. What I usually do is I set

[63:14]

this to Da Vinci Resolve. And I'll do

[63:15]

this, this control shift left bracket,

[63:18]

this is start to play head. If I click

[63:20]

on this command right here, that'll

[63:21]

bring that up right here. If I click on

[63:23]

this little plus, that will make a

[63:25]

little box here, and I can type whatever

[63:28]

keyboard shortcut I want. So, start to

[63:30]

playhead, I'm going to select as Q.

[63:32]

Great. Now, it's going to come up and

[63:34]

say Q is already assigned to something,

[63:36]

which is fine with me because I'm never

[63:38]

going to use this view source timeline

[63:40]

viewer. You might use it, but I'm not

[63:41]

going to. So, whatever you assign to it,

[63:43]

it's going to tell you if that's already

[63:45]

a keyboard shortcut. So, I'm just going

[63:47]

to say assign. Now, it gives you a

[63:50]

little warning here. The reason there's

[63:52]

a warning is because neither of these

[63:54]

keyboard shortcuts are going to work

[63:55]

anymore because one keyboard shortcut is

[63:58]

assigned to two things, which you would

[64:00]

think it would just do both things, but

[64:02]

it actually does neither. So, I'm going

[64:03]

to go out of here, go back to my just

[64:07]

vanilla keyboard here, and click on Q.

[64:09]

Then, it's going to list all the

[64:10]

commands that are under Q. So, we have

[64:13]

start to play head, which is what I

[64:14]

want, and then source timeline view.

[64:15]

Let's click on source timeline view

[64:17]

here, and let's just get rid of the Q

[64:19]

shortcut right there. Great. We're going

[64:21]

to do the same thing with W. So, let's

[64:23]

go ahead and open up W, dynamic trim

[64:25]

mode. Let's take that off. Okay. And

[64:28]

then we're going to look up control

[64:30]

shift right bracket, which is end of

[64:31]

playhead. Let's make this W. Great. So,

[64:35]

now we have Q and W set to start and end

[64:38]

of playhead. The other thing that I like

[64:40]

to do is set this S key to split clip,

[64:43]

which is control backslashplit clips

[64:45]

right here. So, I'm going to actually

[64:48]

set this to S. It's going to say, "Hey,

[64:50]

S is already something." I'll say,

[64:52]

"Okay, assign." Then let's go back to S

[64:55]

and take away toggle slip slide. Boom.

[64:58]

Like that. Now I have Q and W and S. And

[65:02]

those are really the only keyboard

[65:03]

shortcuts that I change for Resolve.

[65:05]

Everything else seems to make pretty

[65:06]

good sense to me. But those are the ones

[65:08]

that are really nice because I can use

[65:10]

three fingers to do a lot of editing.

[65:11]

And I'll show you the power of that here

[65:13]

in just a second. But this looks good. I

[65:15]

want to make sure to save this. So, I'll

[65:17]

go up to these three dots and say save

[65:18]

as new preset. We'll call this intro

[65:21]

intro shortcuts. Hit okay. Great. So,

[65:24]

now this is saved. I can close this. And

[65:27]

now we should be able to hit Q and

[65:29]

that's going to trim the edge. And W.

[65:31]

That should trim the edge. And S should

[65:33]

split this. So, I have three fingers

[65:37]

that can do a lot of these editing

[65:39]

tasks. So, check this out. Especially if

[65:42]

you're editing something where you have

[65:44]

a lot of footage or whether you're just

[65:45]

trying to cut down maybe a podcast or

[65:47]

something like that.

[65:50]

You can go through here and just look at

[65:52]

the waveforms like this and see when

[65:54]

somebody's talking, right? And so you

[65:57]

can split it with S. And then you can

[65:59]

get rid of this

[66:01]

part with a ripple trim to start. So Q

[66:06]

like that. See how this works? S Q

[66:11]

just like that. And I can do this by

[66:14]

just aiming with my playhead

[66:16]

and then Q.

[66:18]

Right.

[66:19]

Just like that. And I can trim this

[66:22]

whole thing and cut out all of the

[66:24]

silence

[66:27]

really, really quickly

[66:31]

just by looking at the waveforms and

[66:32]

trimming it to

[66:34]

those waveforms. So, that's a great way

[66:36]

to cut down things that have a lot of

[66:38]

talking and just keep the talking. In

[66:40]

fact, that's how my editor Sam is

[66:42]

cutting this tutorial. Pretty much same

[66:44]

thing. QWS. What I would recommend

[66:47]

doing, especially if you haven't edited

[66:48]

before, is I would double click on each

[66:50]

of these clips, set the in and out for

[66:53]

whatever part looks interesting and drag

[66:55]

it down here into the timeline. Add

[66:57]

these all to the timeline, and then kind

[66:59]

of mix them together and put together a

[67:02]

story in the edit page. Now, I'm going

[67:04]

to cheat a little bit and use a timeline

[67:06]

that I've already worked on just so I

[67:08]

can show you some more cool stuff. And

[67:10]

to show you this kind of stuff, I'm

[67:11]

going to import a bin. So, just like you

[67:14]

can open a project or export a project,

[67:16]

you can export just a bin or a timeline

[67:19]

in Resolve. It's really helpful. I can

[67:22]

rightclick here in the empty space in my

[67:24]

media pool and go down to import bin.

[67:27]

And I'm going to select a bin that says

[67:28]

Casey only. You will not have this bin.

[67:31]

Okay, say it with me. I will not have

[67:33]

this bin. This is Casey only. All right.

[67:36]

It's not included in the files. This is

[67:38]

just for my demo purposes. Okay. So,

[67:40]

we're gonna hit open. And that's how you

[67:42]

import a bin. Inside of this bin, I'm

[67:44]

going to have a couple of timelines that

[67:45]

are going to help us learn some stuff.

[67:47]

Just double click on my edit demo thing

[67:49]

here. And here we have an edit that I

[67:51]

made using this footage here on the edit

[67:54]

page. Let's take a look.

[68:03]

Whoa.

[68:03]

Whoa.

[68:07]

Mhm.

[68:14]

Go check it out.

[68:16]

Um, no. You go check it out.

[68:20]

Fine.

[68:22]

Okay.

[68:25]

Check it out.

[68:33]

What was that?

[68:42]

So, it's a cohesive story. It has a

[68:45]

beginning, a middle, and an end. The

[68:47]

kids show up, drop their bikes. This is

[68:50]

what they see. They argue. The guy

[68:52]

starts to walk forward. He's nervous.

[68:54]

She's nervous.

[68:56]

it moves. They kind of panic and they go

[68:59]

in to investigate. Now, a couple of

[69:02]

things to point out here about this edit

[69:04]

that I made.

[69:06]

One clip here has a split,

[69:09]

but there's no cut. We're not really

[69:11]

cutting to a different clip. It's just

[69:13]

split here for essentially no reason.

[69:16]

What we can do is we can actually repair

[69:18]

this by right-clicking here on this edit

[69:20]

point and saying delete through edit.

[69:23]

And that's going to make this into one

[69:25]

clip, which is going to be helpful later

[69:26]

when we're doing color. There's no

[69:27]

reason to have a clip split if you're

[69:30]

not going to cut to a different clip or

[69:32]

severely change that clip. By the way, a

[69:34]

great way to move up and down the

[69:36]

timeline when you're zoomed in is to

[69:38]

click and hold the middle button on your

[69:41]

mouse and drag. And what that will do is

[69:43]

let you kind of grab this timeline and

[69:45]

move it back and forth. And that

[69:47]

actually works for just about everything

[69:48]

in Resolve. I can move this preview

[69:51]

around by clicking and dragging on my

[69:52]

middle button, on my scroll wheel

[69:54]

button. That's kind of the click and

[69:56]

drag and pan sort of shortcut for most

[69:58]

things here in Resolve. So, I can move

[70:00]

this over here. And it doesn't look like

[70:02]

we have any more through edits. Oh,

[70:04]

wait, there's one. Let's right click on

[70:06]

this, delete throughit. There we go.

[70:09]

Good.

[70:11]

But actually, I had this split over here

[70:14]

for my audio. And the reason for that is

[70:16]

because this audio is really loud. So,

[70:18]

if we play this back,

[70:22]

those are just really loud bike sounds.

[70:25]

And so, the cool thing about the edit

[70:26]

page is not only can you organize your

[70:28]

video tracks and kind of change their

[70:30]

order and everything, but you can also

[70:31]

mess with your audio. And so, what we

[70:33]

really want to do is take the volume

[70:35]

down on this clip. We actually have the

[70:37]

volume turned way up here in our edit,

[70:39]

but normally there's a little line right

[70:42]

here, and you can click and drag this up

[70:44]

and down to change the volume of your

[70:46]

audio. And so I had this turned way up

[70:48]

because I want to hear kind of the quiet

[70:51]

parts, but it's way too loud for when

[70:53]

the bikes fall down. And so what we can

[70:56]

do is just split this right here. And I

[70:58]

just want to split the audio. And when I

[71:00]

select this, it's going to select both

[71:02]

the video track and the audio track. And

[71:05]

I can just select the audio by going up

[71:07]

here and unlinking this chain link here.

[71:10]

And then I can just select the audio and

[71:11]

move that separately. I can also hold

[71:14]

alt and click on this track just to

[71:17]

select it by itself. But either way, I

[71:20]

want to select just the audio and then I

[71:22]

can split it with control backslash or

[71:24]

whatever you set your keyboard shortcut

[71:26]

to. I can just split that right there.

[71:28]

And then I can have a separate volume

[71:31]

line for this part and this part.

[71:36]

And that lets you change the volume of

[71:38]

your audio. Now, we don't want there to

[71:41]

be a really harsh difference in our

[71:44]

audio where the ambient noise is really

[71:46]

loud and then it turns it down

[71:47]

immediately. See, if I bring this back,

[71:49]

we'll have this kind of sound

[71:53]

where it turns it down immediately. And

[71:56]

so, what we might want to do is

[71:57]

crossfade this. I can rightclick on this

[72:00]

edit and go down and I can pick one of

[72:02]

these crossfade options. It doesn't

[72:04]

really matter. You can pick the 12

[72:05]

frame, let's say. And what that's going

[72:06]

to do is crossfade these clips together,

[72:09]

which if you have two different clips,

[72:11]

it's going to fade out the first clip

[72:13]

and then fade in the second clip kind of

[72:14]

gradually so that you don't notice a cut

[72:17]

there. But when you have the same clip

[72:19]

at different volumes, what it

[72:20]

essentially does is it kind of just

[72:22]

turns down the volume over this amount

[72:24]

of time. So, it's a lot more gradual

[72:28]

and you don't notice that difference.

[72:32]

We could do the same thing here.

[72:36]

Yeah, that's nice. And I find this is a

[72:38]

really nice way to adjust your audio

[72:40]

over time. The other way that you can do

[72:42]

that, I'll just take this volume line

[72:43]

down a little bit. The other way you can

[72:45]

do that is hold alt and click on this

[72:48]

line and that will give you these little

[72:51]

control points and you can move one up

[72:54]

and one down and you can kind of adjust

[72:57]

the level of volume over time here. So

[73:01]

you can get really detailed with how you

[73:03]

want to change your audio in your clip.

[73:05]

And so if you have one really loud part,

[73:07]

you could just kind of squish that down.

[73:09]

So we could do this. I'll just kind of

[73:12]

get rid of this and bring that out like

[73:14]

this. We could

[73:16]

hold alt and add a couple of control

[73:19]

points here.

[73:21]

I can bring this control point down and

[73:23]

just bring down that little part. And

[73:26]

that's good, too.

[73:30]

It's really kind of dependent on what

[73:32]

you want to do. The reason I tend not to

[73:34]

do this so much is because it's kind of

[73:35]

a pain to grab these little points and

[73:38]

move them around. And it's easy to kind

[73:40]

of mess this up or get too many points

[73:42]

or, you know, if I have to move one,

[73:44]

then I have to move the other one. It

[73:45]

just kind of is annoying. And so what

[73:48]

I'll usually do is just select this

[73:49]

audio,

[73:53]

turn this clip down, and crossfade these

[73:58]

because then I can do stuff like roll

[73:59]

these edits back and forth.

[74:04]

And that's going to change where that

[74:06]

adjustment is really easily. It's really

[74:09]

up to you. Here you'll notice this

[74:12]

little triangle. This is from bringing

[74:14]

this little white handle over. And what

[74:17]

this does is this makes a fade, like a

[74:20]

fade out. And so anytime that you have a

[74:23]

clip where you want it to fade in or

[74:25]

out, you can take these little white

[74:27]

handles and bring them in, and that's

[74:29]

going to adjust a fade. That works for

[74:30]

both audio as well as video. We have

[74:33]

these little white handles in this

[74:35]

video, too. And so we have this fade up

[74:37]

from black.

[74:38]

Go figure it out.

[74:39]

And then fade down, right? So, if you're

[74:41]

making a movie trailer where you have

[74:43]

stuff fade in and out all the time,

[74:45]

that's a good way to do it. And oh my

[74:47]

gosh, there's so much more to get into

[74:49]

with adjusting stuff on the edit page.

[74:51]

But we're already going to have a long

[74:52]

enough YouTube video here. So, I want to

[74:54]

show you just a couple other things in

[74:55]

the edit page before we move on. Let's

[74:57]

talk about the inspector. So, the

[74:59]

inspector is a panel that you can open

[75:02]

up over here on the right. And what this

[75:04]

is is a list of properties for whatever

[75:06]

we have selected. Now, this is a

[75:08]

universal thing in Resolve. There is

[75:11]

some version of an inspector on just

[75:14]

about every page. And so, this is an

[75:16]

essential concept for you to understand.

[75:19]

When you select something, this clip has

[75:21]

certain properties. And when we have

[75:23]

this selected, what it does is it opens

[75:25]

up those properties here in the

[75:26]

inspector. So, we select something and

[75:29]

we adjust its details and its properties

[75:31]

in the inspector. Now I can hit this

[75:33]

little button to expand the inspector so

[75:36]

that it's the full height of the screen

[75:38]

and we can see all these different

[75:40]

properties. So every clip has a bunch of

[75:43]

properties. So I'll select this clip

[75:45]

here and we'll just see what these all

[75:46]

do. There are tabs up here and these are

[75:50]

different categories of properties. So a

[75:53]

clip by default is going to have video

[75:54]

and audio tab. And depending on what

[75:57]

other fancy things you do, these other

[75:58]

tabs might be available. But the video,

[76:01]

we start with the transform properties.

[76:03]

These are ways that you can move and

[76:05]

scale and rotate your video. And these

[76:07]

controls, some of them have sliders,

[76:08]

which makes sense. You slide this back

[76:10]

and forth. And some of them just have

[76:12]

numbers, which you can double click in

[76:13]

and replace with a number. Or you can

[76:17]

click and drag left and right on any of

[76:19]

these numbers to control it, sort of

[76:20]

like a slider. You can doubleclick on

[76:23]

any of these properties to reset them.

[76:25]

You can also hit this little reset

[76:27]

button. And so now if we want to zoom in

[76:29]

on her face, we can zoom like this. And

[76:32]

we can adjust the position to be right

[76:35]

there on her face. We can adjust the

[76:38]

rotation if we want to. And that's how

[76:40]

we would do that for this clip. Now,

[76:42]

it's only adjusting this clip because

[76:43]

this is the clip that we have selected.

[76:45]

If we go to this clip, it is unaffected.

[76:48]

In fact, if we're over this clip and

[76:49]

we're looking at it, we're adjusting the

[76:51]

zoom and nothing's happening. That's

[76:52]

because we have this clip selected. And

[76:54]

so that's loaded into the inspector. So,

[76:56]

we zoom this way far up.

[77:00]

We go back to this one and it's zoomed

[77:01]

in really far, right? So, let's go ahead

[77:05]

and reset everything in our transform.

[77:07]

We also have cropping where we can crop

[77:09]

the image. We can adjust the softness of

[77:12]

that crop.

[77:14]

This is great if you want to mix kind of

[77:15]

one side of one shot and the other side

[77:17]

of another shot, something like that. Or

[77:19]

if you want to do kind of a pictureand

[77:21]

picture thing, you could do some

[77:23]

cropping.

[77:27]

on your image and then position it down

[77:30]

into the corner. Something like that.

[77:32]

And at that point, if you wanted to put

[77:34]

this clip over something else, you could

[77:36]

just put this over other clips here in

[77:38]

the timeline, and those would be layered

[77:41]

like that.

[77:44]

You can adjust the composite mode, which

[77:46]

is kind of the transparency of things.

[77:48]

If I put this image over this image, we

[77:51]

could take the opacity down and kind of

[77:52]

fade this. So, it's kind of ghosted over

[77:55]

it. We could also change the composite

[77:57]

mode to different things like add or

[77:59]

multiply and all different kinds of

[78:01]

composite modes. This works a lot like

[78:02]

an image editing program like Photoshop

[78:04]

or something like that. Same kind of

[78:06]

idea. And there's just so much more to

[78:08]

go over, but basically if you want to

[78:10]

adjust how a clip is treated, its

[78:12]

position, its rotation, how it interacts

[78:15]

with other clips, the volume of the

[78:17]

audio, the pan of the audio, the pitch,

[78:20]

there's equalizer, there's all kinds of

[78:21]

stuff that we'll get into a little bit

[78:22]

more when we talk about Fairlite, but

[78:24]

this is where the properties for

[78:25]

anything that you have selected lives.

[78:27]

Okay, so again, if we want to make this

[78:29]

small, we can zoom it out like that

[78:33]

just by selecting it and adjusting it in

[78:35]

the inspector. One thing that's cool is

[78:37]

that we can stabilize clips here right

[78:39]

in the edit page. I can just select the

[78:41]

clip, go over to stabilization, and hit

[78:43]

stabilize.

[78:45]

And what that's going to do is take out

[78:46]

all of the little jitters and everything

[78:48]

for the clip. And it works pretty darn

[78:50]

well. Works pretty darn well. The

[78:54]

stabilization here is excellent. And

[78:56]

there are a bunch of different options

[78:57]

here for the stabilization, which you

[78:59]

can play around with. You'll get various

[79:00]

different results, but just know that

[79:02]

that's kind of where that happens. We

[79:04]

can correct a lens. So you can distort

[79:06]

or undistort your lens. Here where it

[79:08]

says rettime and scaling, these are just

[79:10]

kind of the processes for retiming. If

[79:12]

you actually want to do a time remap on

[79:15]

something, you can right click on it and

[79:17]

go up to rettime controls. And you can

[79:19]

grab the edges like this and make it

[79:22]

play back faster

[79:25]

or slower.

[79:29]

You can even kind of stop in the middle

[79:31]

of this clip and click on this little

[79:33]

arrow and that'll bring up a little menu

[79:35]

and you can add a speed point. And what

[79:37]

this will do is let you change part of

[79:39]

the clip's speed

[79:43]

to one value and the other part to

[79:45]

another value. So, we can go from slow

[79:47]

motion into fast motion. This is great

[79:50]

for drone shots and punchy edits and

[79:52]

things like that. That's how that's

[79:53]

done. And when you're done with your

[79:55]

speed changes, you can just hit this

[79:56]

little X button right here, and it'll

[79:58]

give you a little indicator that there's

[80:00]

a speed change on it. But the idea that

[80:02]

you select something and adjust its

[80:04]

properties in the inspector is really,

[80:05]

really, really important. Now, sort of

[80:08]

related to that is there is a whole

[80:12]

section of the edit page called effects.

[80:14]

So, if I switch to effects, that's going

[80:16]

to bring up my effects panel. And this

[80:18]

has I mean, just so much stuff in it.

[80:21]

This is where you get a little bit more

[80:23]

fancy in the edit page. There are all

[80:26]

kinds of tools here, including

[80:27]

transitions, which you just grab one of

[80:29]

these transitions and put it in between

[80:31]

two clips like this. Just drag it in

[80:34]

between on this edit. That will make a

[80:36]

little transition like that. You can

[80:39]

even select this transition and switch

[80:42]

to a different transition here in the

[80:44]

inspector.

[80:46]

Okay.

[80:48]

If you go down to open effects, there

[80:50]

are all kinds of effects here that you

[80:52]

can apply to your shots. So, if you want

[80:55]

your shot to be blurry, you can grab

[80:56]

something like directional blur. Drag

[80:58]

this on here and then you select this

[81:01]

clip. And because this clip has effects

[81:02]

on it, it has a little indicator right

[81:05]

here. And it also has the effects tab

[81:08]

enabled where you can find the effect

[81:10]

that you applied to it and you can

[81:11]

adjust the properties of the effect.

[81:13]

Right? See why this is so important is

[81:15]

because anything that happens in this

[81:17]

clip, you pretty much adjust here in the

[81:19]

inspector. And so we can adjust the

[81:22]

blurriness and all of that. All of the

[81:23]

controls for this effect right here in

[81:25]

the inspector. We can turn the effect on

[81:27]

or off or we can delete it by hitting

[81:29]

this garbage can like that. And that's

[81:31]

how we would apply any kind of effect

[81:33]

you would want to apply to a clip. So

[81:36]

sharpen stylized kind of stuff like a

[81:39]

mirror effect.

[81:45]

do all kinds of cool stuff.

[81:53]

That's cool.

[81:58]

And the free version of Resolve comes

[81:59]

with a lot of effects and the paid

[82:01]

version has a lot more. So, there's

[82:04]

still quite a bit of effects in the free

[82:05]

version, but there are certain more

[82:07]

intense effects that only come with the

[82:09]

paid version. We've been working with

[82:10]

just clips here in the timeline, but in

[82:13]

the effects panel, there are also things

[82:15]

like titles and generators. So, a

[82:17]

generator just generates video. So, I

[82:20]

can grab something like this fourcolor

[82:21]

gradient, and I can drag this down into

[82:24]

the timeline just like I would drag a

[82:26]

clip from the media pool into the

[82:28]

timeline. So, now we have this fourcolor

[82:30]

gradient. Again, I select it and go up

[82:32]

here to the inspector and I can adjust

[82:34]

the colors.

[82:38]

So, I can make a nice background with

[82:40]

that. And there's all kinds of different

[82:42]

generators. There's even some really

[82:43]

fancy ones that use the power of the

[82:45]

fusion page. So, I could do this hexagon

[82:47]

glow. That thing's pretty crazy. One of

[82:50]

my favorites is this honeycomb.

[82:53]

There's all kinds of controls here to

[82:55]

change how this looks. There's also

[82:58]

transitions and all kinds of stuff here.

[83:00]

So, we can drag this in. This will be

[83:03]

kind of some graphics. There we go. And

[83:06]

you can select this and adjust your

[83:07]

text, you know,

[83:09]

intro, right?

[83:12]

That's cool.

[83:14]

You can use a custom logo. You can do

[83:16]

all kinds of stuff with this. And each

[83:17]

effect is slightly different because

[83:19]

it's just kind of built for different

[83:20]

purposes, right? So, this one has

[83:22]

different color controls and things to

[83:24]

be able to customize this template. Now,

[83:27]

if you want to make your own text that's

[83:29]

maybe just a little bit less specific

[83:31]

that isn't this kind of specific looking

[83:33]

effect, you can go up to titles and

[83:36]

there are kind of two sections of titles

[83:38]

here. There are just the normal titles

[83:40]

and then there are fusion titles. Fusion

[83:42]

titles are just fancier titles that use

[83:44]

the power of the fusion page. We'll get

[83:46]

into that in a little bit, how Fusion

[83:48]

works and all that, but we have some

[83:49]

basic stuff here that's actually really

[83:51]

great. So, for instance, text. If I just

[83:53]

grab normal text, I can put this over my

[83:56]

fourcolor gradient. And I can select the

[83:59]

title controls here in the video in the

[84:01]

inspector with the text title selected.

[84:04]

You know, my title and I can change the

[84:06]

font and the size and the tracking and

[84:09]

all of that kind of stuff to design this

[84:11]

title to be exactly how I want. And

[84:13]

there are quite a bit of controls here

[84:16]

to make this look how I want for my

[84:19]

project. Let's go and kind of make a

[84:22]

title here. I could just take this text

[84:23]

and drag this down. And we'll call this

[84:25]

uh Tuesday on Earth. That's the name of

[84:27]

the movie. Pick a different font. Let's

[84:29]

just say Poppins Black. Push up that

[84:31]

tracking a little bit. There we go. It's

[84:34]

nice and tasteful. Let's change the

[84:36]

color. Maybe make this kind of a

[84:38]

slightly kind of teal color. Something

[84:40]

like that. Great. There we have our

[84:42]

title. Now, let's say that we want to

[84:46]

animate something. we want to change a

[84:49]

property of a clip or a property of this

[84:52]

title over time. Here's how we can do

[84:54]

that. We have this text which is

[84:56]

actually just generating a video. If I

[84:59]

go over here to the inspector, it says

[85:01]

title and settings. If I switch to

[85:02]

settings, this is going to give us the

[85:04]

same transform controls that we have

[85:06]

with any of these clips. Pretty much the

[85:08]

same transform controls. And so what we

[85:10]

can do is change the position of this

[85:12]

text just by taking the video that the

[85:14]

text generator generates and moving that

[85:16]

video around. There are these little

[85:19]

diamonds right here. These diamonds are

[85:23]

what we call key frame diamonds. I don't

[85:25]

actually know the real name for it, but

[85:27]

I call it key frame diamonds because

[85:29]

what you do is you click on this diamond

[85:32]

and that will set a key frame. Now, if

[85:34]

you don't know what a key frame is, a

[85:35]

key frame is basically a way to tell

[85:38]

your software that you want a property

[85:40]

to be a certain value at a certain time.

[85:43]

So, when we click this key frame

[85:45]

diamond, we're telling Resolve that at

[85:47]

49 seconds and 11 frames, so right here

[85:51]

on this clip, that we want the position

[85:53]

to be at 0 0. if we move to a different

[85:56]

time. So, let's move to kind of the

[85:58]

start of the clip. We can adjust this

[86:00]

position again and you'll see there's

[86:02]

this little tiny greater than indicator,

[86:04]

this little arrow. That means that there

[86:06]

is a key frame on this track and it's

[86:09]

that way. And what that also means is

[86:11]

that if I change this position right

[86:13]

now, that's going to add a new key

[86:15]

frame. You can see that it turned this

[86:17]

key frame red.

[86:19]

And what it's going to do is animate in

[86:22]

between those two key frames

[86:25]

over time. And so we've just made an

[86:27]

animated title. Isn't that cool? Now, is

[86:30]

this really the only indicator that

[86:32]

something is animated? No. If we go up

[86:34]

here to these buttons right here, and we

[86:37]

click on this one, this one that looks

[86:40]

like some diamonds, we click on that,

[86:42]

that's going to open up our key frames

[86:44]

panel for our timeline. And here we have

[86:47]

these familiar little diamonds

[86:50]

and we can see the properties that these

[86:53]

are animating. So we have a diamond on

[86:55]

this track for position X and a diamond

[86:57]

on this track for position Y. And then

[86:59]

we also have diamonds here for transform

[87:01]

which is kind of like the group of those

[87:03]

properties. So I can take this diamond

[87:05]

for the transform and I can move this

[87:07]

back and forth and that's going to

[87:08]

change where that key frame is on my

[87:11]

track. And so I can take this first key

[87:13]

frame and move this up at the start and

[87:15]

the last key frame and move this at the

[87:17]

end. And throughout the entire

[87:20]

length of the clip,

[87:23]

it's going to move from down here to up

[87:26]

here. If I want this to go faster, I can

[87:28]

push these key frames together because

[87:31]

it'll take less time to go from one key

[87:32]

frame to the other, which means this

[87:35]

goes faster. And so that's generally how

[87:37]

you'll animate stuff in Resolve. and and

[87:40]

really that same kind of way of

[87:42]

animating things by setting a key frame

[87:44]

and adjusting the distance between the

[87:46]

two key frames. That's pretty much how

[87:47]

you animate anything in most software.

[87:49]

In fact, as you use Fusion, key frames

[87:52]

are all over the place. But just know

[87:54]

for now that you can animate stuff by

[87:55]

using those key frames and adjusting the

[87:57]

distance between them. Now, when

[87:59]

something moves and comes to a stop on a

[88:01]

video, it actually looks a lot nicer if

[88:04]

it kind of slows down before it stops.

[88:06]

That is called easing. Easing a key

[88:08]

frame. like you easily just stop, right?

[88:10]

You ease into it. And so what we really

[88:13]

want to do would be to ease this key

[88:15]

frame, this last key frame, so that it

[88:16]

slows down before it stops. So it

[88:18]

doesn't just kind of jerk to a stop like

[88:20]

this. It doesn't look good. And so

[88:21]

here's how you ease those key frames.

[88:23]

Right now in this version of Resolve,

[88:25]

there is another key frame panel which I

[88:28]

can click and that will open up here

[88:29]

kind of where the media pool and the

[88:30]

effects go and it will give you another

[88:32]

graph just like is down here. But you

[88:36]

can click on this little button right

[88:38]

here and that will switch to your curves

[88:41]

view. And this will give you a graph of

[88:43]

the values over time. And you can select

[88:47]

this last key frame and click on this

[88:49]

button right here which will let you

[88:51]

flatten the handles on this key frame.

[88:54]

So you can grab this little handle.

[88:55]

Let's just zoom this in a little bit.

[88:57]

You can grab this handle and kind of

[88:59]

adjust the graph. And so if you grab

[89:01]

this handle and kind of push it out like

[89:03]

this so it's flat, you have this nice

[89:06]

easy curve as we go into the key frame.

[89:09]

And so as this comes in, it kind of

[89:11]

slows down before it stops. Isn't that

[89:12]

nice? Comes in fast, slows down before

[89:15]

it stops. And so this is the interface

[89:17]

that you can use to get really detailed

[89:19]

with your key frames. Now, it's possible

[89:21]

that this panel is going to change in

[89:24]

the future. I've recommended that they

[89:26]

actually put all of this down here

[89:28]

because it makes a lot more sense to be

[89:30]

able to move this based on our timeline

[89:32]

rather than moving things back and forth

[89:33]

on this grid where you don't really have

[89:35]

any idea of the actual timing of things.

[89:37]

And so if you're watching this video in

[89:39]

the future and you're like, there is no

[89:40]

key frames panel here or it looks

[89:42]

different or something, just look

[89:43]

around. Some of these buttons up here

[89:46]

might be down here. We'll see. You

[89:48]

should be able to click on this expand

[89:50]

button and that will give you a undocked

[89:53]

key frame editor here that gives you a

[89:54]

really nice interface for working with

[89:56]

your key frames. Again, that button

[89:58]

might be down here in the future. Who

[89:59]

knows? The key frames panels, this one

[90:02]

and this one are brand new to Resolve

[90:05]

when I'm recording this. So, if it's

[90:06]

slightly different on your version, that

[90:08]

might be a thing. But either way, it

[90:09]

should pretty much work the same. You

[90:11]

move your key frames back and forth to

[90:12]

change the timing, and you adjust the

[90:14]

curve to ease the key frames. There are

[90:16]

similar tools to this in the Fusion

[90:18]

page, which we'll go over in a little

[90:20]

while, but that's how you animate things

[90:21]

here on the edit page.

[90:24]

There are so many more things that I

[90:26]

want to tell you about the edit page,

[90:28]

but we have to move on. This should be

[90:30]

plenty to get you started grabbing the

[90:32]

footage and putting it into a timeline

[90:33]

and creating a story. This is the magic

[90:36]

of video editing is that you're in

[90:37]

control of that story. H so good. Next,

[90:41]

let's jump into the cut page, which is

[90:43]

just a little bit of a different angle

[90:45]

on the same kind of idea of creating a

[90:48]

story in a timeline. So, the cut page,

[90:52]

the cut page is kind of like the edit

[90:54]

page, but it's built for a slightly

[90:56]

different application. You can think of

[90:58]

the cut page as sort of like a version

[91:01]

of the edit page, but designed with one

[91:03]

value in mind, speed. Speed of editing.

[91:06]

Everything in this page is designed to

[91:08]

help you edit faster. Now, it has some

[91:12]

pretty familiar elements. We have our

[91:15]

media pool up here, which works pretty

[91:17]

much exactly like the media pool does in

[91:18]

the other pages. The only difference is

[91:21]

that instead of a bin list, you have a

[91:22]

little drop down here, but pretty much

[91:24]

the same idea. We have a viewer.

[91:28]

You can double click on a clip and you

[91:29]

can hover scrub. You can scrub through

[91:31]

it here in the source viewer. You can

[91:33]

switch to source tape and bring up all

[91:35]

of the different clips one after

[91:36]

another. You can also switch to the

[91:39]

timeline viewer.

[91:41]

So, there aren't two viewers in the edit

[91:43]

page. There's only one that kind of

[91:44]

switches out like this. But other than

[91:46]

that, it pretty much works the same. We

[91:48]

do have an inspector. Same idea. But we

[91:50]

also have kind of this slightly

[91:52]

different style of inspector, which if

[91:54]

you click on this button right here,

[91:56]

will bring up a bunch of controls that

[91:59]

are the same as the inspector controls,

[92:01]

but they're kind of just on a different

[92:02]

interface.

[92:04]

The idea being that this would be a

[92:05]

little bit faster.

[92:07]

We also have effects and titles and even

[92:11]

a key frames editor like we do on the

[92:12]

edit page.

[92:14]

There's transitions, that kind of thing.

[92:17]

But really the big difference here in

[92:19]

the cut page versus the edit page is

[92:21]

that we have two timelines.

[92:24]

We have this upper timeline here and we

[92:28]

have the lower timeline down here. Now,

[92:31]

this can be a little bit confusing, but

[92:33]

these are the same timeline at different

[92:36]

zoom levels. So, this upper timeline is

[92:39]

your entire movie from beginning to end.

[92:42]

So, it's zoomed all the way out. The

[92:45]

lower timeline is the zoomedin version

[92:47]

of that same sequence. And so, if I want

[92:49]

to adjust this part where we have a

[92:51]

transition, I can quickly move to that

[92:54]

part using this top timeline. And then I

[92:57]

can adjust the details of the clips here

[93:00]

in the lower timeline. And so the idea

[93:02]

here is that you can quickly move from

[93:04]

one side of the world to the other

[93:05]

without having to zoom in and out a

[93:08]

whole bunch because that does take some

[93:09]

time to zoom in and out and kind of get

[93:11]

the right view for what you're working

[93:12]

on. The other thing you might notice is

[93:14]

these little indicators here where if we

[93:17]

have a clip, let's say, let's just open

[93:18]

a clip like this. We have this little

[93:21]

animation here that's kind of shooting

[93:24]

little arrows down here. And we also

[93:26]

have this green highlight. This is our

[93:29]

edit indicator. And what that means is

[93:31]

that if we use some of these edit

[93:33]

buttons, which are very similar to the

[93:35]

edit buttons you get over here in the

[93:38]

edit page, but if we use one of these

[93:40]

edit buttons, some of these have to do

[93:42]

with a specific edit point. So, for

[93:44]

instance, this insert button, this smart

[93:47]

insert, what it's going to do is look

[93:49]

for the nearest edit point, which is

[93:51]

going to be highlighted in green, and

[93:53]

that's where it's going to insert the

[93:55]

clip. Normally, on the edit page, if I

[93:58]

were to be right over this title, and I

[94:01]

were to insert this like this, that's

[94:03]

going to throw that right in the middle

[94:04]

of that clip, exactly where my playhead

[94:07]

is, just like that. in the cut page

[94:10]

because it takes time to completely line

[94:12]

this up exactly where you want it to be.

[94:14]

It's just going to put this on the

[94:16]

nearest edit point. So, if I grab this

[94:19]

right here and I say smart insert,

[94:21]

that's going to put that right there in

[94:23]

between those two clips. It's not going

[94:24]

to put it exactly where the playhead is.

[94:27]

If I have that playhead less than 50%

[94:28]

through this clip, we're going to

[94:30]

highlight this edit point and that's

[94:33]

where whatever clip I have selected is

[94:35]

going to be inserted.

[94:37]

So, this is the kind of thing that can

[94:38]

get you in trouble, but if you're aware

[94:40]

of it and kind of the thinking behind

[94:42]

why this is built this way, then it can

[94:45]

actually be really helpful and speed you

[94:46]

up. Sort of a similar thing with this

[94:48]

edit point is with our transitions.

[94:50]

There's these three buttons right here,

[94:52]

and this will allow you to quickly

[94:54]

select the type of transition that you

[94:56]

want for this edit point. And so, by

[94:59]

default, it's a cut, but with one click,

[95:01]

I can add a crossfade here. And so I

[95:03]

could just go to the nearest edit point

[95:04]

and go, okay, I want a crossfade here. I

[95:06]

want one here. I want one here. And you

[95:09]

can really easily just add these kind of

[95:11]

things. And you can see how quickly you

[95:13]

can go through and do stuff. And so

[95:15]

there are a lot of cool things about

[95:16]

just editing a normal project in the cut

[95:19]

page. It's a little bit of a different

[95:21]

feel. You have to get used to it, but

[95:23]

for certain applications, it can really

[95:25]

speed you up. Something like putting

[95:27]

together a narrative film is maybe not

[95:30]

something that I would do in the cut

[95:32]

page. The cut page would be really great

[95:34]

for a vlog or a news story where you're

[95:38]

trying to one move really fast and

[95:41]

probably get it out as quickly as you

[95:42]

can. And two, you generally just have a

[95:45]

bunch of clips one after another and you

[95:47]

don't have complicated sound design and

[95:49]

you know all kinds of different layers

[95:50]

and and stuff like that. It's just one

[95:52]

clip after another. And so because

[95:55]

that's kind of such a specific

[95:56]

application, we're not going to spend

[95:58]

lots and lots of time on the cut page.

[96:00]

It's sort of a divisive page. Honestly,

[96:02]

some people really like it and some

[96:03]

people don't see a point in having the

[96:05]

cut page at all. Me, I use this for some

[96:09]

things. It's nice for quickly putting a

[96:11]

whole bunch of clips down into the

[96:12]

timeline and creating kind of a rough

[96:13]

edit, but I'll generally move over to

[96:16]

the edit page to kind of refine my edits

[96:19]

and make sure that my audio tracks are

[96:21]

good and everything like that because

[96:22]

the cut page, while there are audio

[96:24]

tracks, kind of get rid of our extra

[96:26]

tracks here, move my camera here. I can

[96:29]

click on this button right here and

[96:31]

expand those tracks a little bit and I

[96:33]

can see the audio a little bit better.

[96:36]

And I can hold alt and adjust just the

[96:38]

audio like this. And so it's certainly

[96:41]

doable, but because of the way the cut

[96:43]

page is made where you don't really have

[96:45]

a normal selection tool, you only have

[96:47]

the trim tools, it can sort of feel

[96:49]

awkward and you can kind of trim your

[96:51]

audio when you don't really mean to

[96:52]

sometimes. And it's just it's a little

[96:54]

bit awkward sometimes. And so generally,

[96:56]

if you're going to do something quick

[96:57]

where you have your audio and your video

[96:59]

in the same clips and you're just going

[97:01]

to put one right after another, that's

[97:02]

what I would use the cut page for. And

[97:04]

like I said, it it kind of comes down to

[97:06]

personal preference. You might find that

[97:08]

you really like the way the cut page

[97:09]

does things and not having to zoom in or

[97:11]

out. And you might find that cutting

[97:13]

your videos together in the cut page is

[97:15]

really enjoyable. However, especially if

[97:17]

you're coming from a different editor

[97:18]

like Premiere or something like that,

[97:20]

the edit page is going to feel a lot

[97:22]

more familiar. Now, the one thing that's

[97:25]

really, really great about the cut page

[97:27]

is surprisingly it's multicam editing.

[97:31]

The way it handles multicam is actually

[97:32]

really interesting. If you want to

[97:34]

follow along, you can go to the master

[97:36]

bin right here and open cut. And we have

[97:39]

some footage that we're going to cut

[97:41]

together on the cut page. Let's make a

[97:43]

new timeline. I'll just right click and

[97:44]

say create new timeline like this. And

[97:46]

we'll say cut page multicam

[97:51]

like that. And here we have several

[97:53]

different shots of the same production

[97:56]

meeting. And so we have two kind of

[97:58]

medium shot cameras. We have one

[98:00]

overhead camera and we have a wide

[98:02]

camera. So, this is a 4 camera multi-cam

[98:04]

shoot. We also have our audio. This is

[98:07]

just an example with multiple cameras,

[98:09]

but if you have a multi- camera shoot

[98:11]

for, say, a cooking video or a live

[98:13]

event or something, this is all going to

[98:15]

work the same way. When we have all of

[98:17]

these different cameras that happen at

[98:18]

the same time, what we can do is we can

[98:20]

sync them up with each other and then

[98:22]

cut from one camera to the other just to

[98:24]

get a kind of a different angle. And

[98:26]

there are ways to do this in the edit

[98:28]

page. For instance, I can open up this

[98:30]

cut page multicam and I can start

[98:32]

bringing some of these cameras in here

[98:35]

and I can sync these up with each other

[98:37]

just by kind of lining up these audio

[98:38]

waveforms.

[98:44]

And I could cut from one camera to the

[98:46]

other

[98:52]

and make my edit that way just by kind

[98:54]

of stacking these cameras and kind of

[98:55]

turning one layer off and kind of

[98:57]

trimming it and that kind of thing to

[98:58]

cut in between the cameras. But in the

[99:01]

edit page, I could also select all of

[99:02]

these, rightclick, and say new multicam

[99:05]

clip using selected clips. I'll just

[99:07]

uncheck move source clips to original

[99:09]

clips bin and hit create. And so there

[99:12]

are ways to kind of sync these up and

[99:14]

then select the different cameras and

[99:16]

kind of cut in between them on the edit

[99:18]

page, but it is kind of a pain to set

[99:20]

that up. It's a little bit tricky. Let

[99:21]

me know in the comments if you want a

[99:23]

video on setting up multicam in the edit

[99:25]

page. But in the cut page, it kind of

[99:26]

simplifies this and that we can select

[99:29]

all of these clips and we can click this

[99:31]

button right here, which is the sync

[99:33]

button. I can select those all and I can

[99:36]

sync these by audio and then hit

[99:38]

autosync.

[99:41]

And that will sync up all of my clips on

[99:43]

this kind of preview timeline. And then

[99:45]

we can hit save sync.

[99:48]

And what that's going to do is give us a

[99:50]

little blue indicator on each of these

[99:52]

clips to show that it syncs with some

[99:54]

other clip. Once we have that done,

[99:57]

we've kind of tagged all of those clips

[99:58]

to say, "Hey, these sync with each

[100:00]

other, and here's exactly the time that

[100:02]

they should sync with." Once we have

[100:04]

that, we can drag any of these clips.

[100:06]

Let's just drag this wide clip in. We

[100:09]

can drag any of these clips in and just

[100:11]

kind of go through it. Sort of like the

[100:13]

anchor method like we were talking

[100:14]

about. We just have this wide shot and

[100:16]

we can look around for something

[100:17]

interesting happening. We have Dan

[100:19]

reaching for some candy. That's

[100:21]

something interesting right here. And so

[100:23]

what we can do is go up to our sync bin

[100:26]

and this is going to show live the clips

[100:29]

that sync up with this place in our

[100:31]

timeline. So right here when he starts

[100:34]

to reach, we can see all of our

[100:36]

different angles for what we want. I can

[100:39]

hit three and that's going to bring up a

[100:42]

clip and set an in and out to start

[100:44]

right there. I can just drag this down

[100:46]

like this and then it's going to be a

[100:49]

perfect cut

[100:53]

from one shot to another. Let's go back

[100:56]

to our timeline viewer here. So, here's

[100:58]

one shot. There we go. We can cut back,

[101:02]

trim this just like that. And so it's

[101:03]

sort of like a hybrid of a multicam and

[101:06]

kind of the traditional way of stacking

[101:08]

a bunch of clips together.

[101:11]

And so what's great about something like

[101:13]

this is we can just cut to whatever we

[101:15]

think is interesting from this wide

[101:17]

shot. And so Sam's talking right here.

[101:20]

Again, we can just open up the sync bin.

[101:22]

Let's use the shot of Sam talking here.

[101:24]

Great. And we can either drag it down or

[101:26]

we can use our edit buttons like this

[101:29]

place on top. And that's going to put

[101:31]

that exactly where it's supposed to be.

[101:33]

Switch back to our timeline. Here we

[101:35]

have him talking.

[101:37]

Great.

[101:40]

So, this is a nice way to be able to use

[101:41]

multiple cameras without having to set

[101:43]

up a multicam and play through and

[101:45]

switch your cameras in real time. You

[101:46]

can kind of just scrub through and find

[101:48]

the interesting parts. So, there's Sam

[101:50]

talking again. Sync bin. Let's switch to

[101:53]

Sam talking.

[101:56]

Put that in as a place on top. And now

[101:59]

we can cut to Sam as he's talking. Isn't

[102:02]

that great? And so if you're doing a lot

[102:04]

of multicam stuff, especially if it's

[102:06]

something like a live event where you're

[102:07]

mostly on a wide shot and then you just

[102:09]

want to cut to the interesting parts,

[102:10]

this is a really nice way to handle

[102:12]

that. There are a lot more features in

[102:14]

the cut page, things that we just don't

[102:15]

have time to get into. This is kind of

[102:17]

the main stuff. But if you're looking to

[102:19]

move a lot faster and you're kind of

[102:20]

working on a deadline, the cut page

[102:23]

might be something to really look into

[102:25]

and learn a little bit more about,

[102:26]

especially if you're doing these certain

[102:28]

kinds of multicam edits. This can be

[102:31]

really helpful. But a lot of the basics

[102:34]

here are pretty much like the edit page.

[102:36]

We're still putting clips together into

[102:38]

a timeline. We're cutting them. We're

[102:40]

trimming them. We're moving things

[102:42]

around. We're adjusting the order. And

[102:44]

we're building our story here on the

[102:46]

timeline. This timeline, whatever we

[102:49]

make for our video, this is going to be

[102:52]

the bones of our video. It's the main

[102:54]

place where all of the clips live. And

[102:57]

then everything else that we do in

[102:58]

Fusion Color in Fairlite are going to be

[103:00]

based on this timeline right here. So

[103:04]

after you organize your media, you can

[103:07]

switch to the edit page or the cut page

[103:08]

depending on what you feel like doing.

[103:10]

and you place your clips here on the

[103:12]

timeline to create a story. Once you're

[103:14]

happy with the story, then you can move

[103:16]

on and get fancier with the Fusion Color

[103:18]

and Fairlite pages, which we're going to

[103:19]

dive into next. So, let's take a step

[103:22]

back and talk about some kind of general

[103:23]

workflow here. When you're making a

[103:25]

video of some kind, you will record

[103:27]

stuff or get footage from a client or

[103:30]

online or whatever. And the very first

[103:32]

thing that you have to do is manage your

[103:34]

media. So, it's get it organized, make

[103:36]

sure it's renamed if you're going to

[103:37]

rename it, put it in folders, tag it,

[103:39]

get familiar with it, that kind of

[103:41]

thing. From there, it's building a

[103:42]

story, which is the strict definition of

[103:45]

editing. A lot of people when they say

[103:47]

editing, they pretty much mean this

[103:48]

entire workflow. But strictly speaking,

[103:50]

editing is adjusting clips in a

[103:52]

timeline. So, it's actually creating

[103:54]

what your movie is going to be. Once you

[103:57]

have that, then you can move on to get a

[104:00]

little bit fancier and a little bit more

[104:02]

detailed. For most videos, that would

[104:04]

include things like visual effects.

[104:05]

Whether it's doing simple things like

[104:07]

replacing a screen on a TV digitally or

[104:10]

cloning out a car that's driving through

[104:11]

the background of your medieval epic

[104:13]

movie or adding lightsabers and

[104:15]

explosions and portals and things like

[104:17]

that. That's all visual effects. It

[104:19]

would be adding graphics, things like

[104:21]

titles and credits and little pop-up

[104:24]

icons and things like that. And then

[104:26]

generally you'll work on color

[104:28]

correction, color grading, making sure

[104:30]

that your colors look good, working on

[104:32]

your audio, making sure your audio

[104:34]

sounds good, things are loud enough but

[104:36]

not too loud, things sound like they

[104:38]

belong there, things that should make

[104:39]

noise actually make noise. And then

[104:41]

finally, we get into rendering, which is

[104:43]

saving out your video in a format that

[104:46]

other people can watch. It's making a

[104:47]

video file and uploading it to YouTube

[104:49]

or giving it to your client, putting it

[104:51]

on a website, that kind of thing. So

[104:53]

this is the whole workflow from start to

[104:54]

finish on making a video. And it kind of

[104:57]

flows in this general order. And this is

[105:00]

really why the buttons at the bottom of

[105:03]

the Resolve interface, the pages are in

[105:07]

this order because we start with media,

[105:10]

then we do our editing, then we do our

[105:12]

effects and our graphics in Fusion. We

[105:14]

do our color grading and color. We do

[105:16]

our audio mixing in Fairite, and then we

[105:18]

render it out. So, for the rest of this

[105:20]

video, we're going to get fancy. We're

[105:22]

going to do the fancy stuff. Starting

[105:24]

out with Fusion here in a minute. So, I

[105:27]

can do my graphics, effects, color, and

[105:29]

audio right here in Resolve. And all of

[105:31]

these different apps, which are actually

[105:33]

just pages and Resolve, all share the

[105:35]

same timeline.

[105:39]

And it's instantly available to do our

[105:41]

really detailed, fancy stuff in those

[105:43]

pages. You build your story here on the

[105:46]

edit page. and the other pages let you

[105:48]

make it even better. So, let's dive into

[105:51]

Fusion. Go ahead and do this with me. Go

[105:54]

over to your media pool in the edit page

[105:56]

and open the Fusion bin. So, you should

[105:58]

have VFX alien plate, house, exterior

[106:01]

ship plate, etc. Right click anywhere in

[106:04]

there and say timelines, create new

[106:06]

timeline. And we're just going to call

[106:08]

this fusion timeline. And we'll hit

[106:11]

create. You don't have to make a new

[106:13]

timeline to work in Fusion. We're just

[106:15]

doing this because this is going to kind

[106:16]

of be the Fusion demo thing. But take

[106:18]

all of these clips. I'll just shift

[106:20]

select those and just drag those into

[106:22]

the timeline like this. So, we have four

[106:24]

main clips here. We have a little

[106:27]

puppet. We have a house. We have the top

[106:30]

of the spaceship. And we have a wide

[106:33]

shot with kids riding their bikes across

[106:35]

this mountain vista. These are the shots

[106:37]

that we're going to use to kind of learn

[106:38]

a little bit more about Fusion. So, make

[106:40]

sure that you have these shots added to

[106:42]

a new timeline. And we're going to do

[106:43]

one special thing. We're going to take

[106:45]

this VFX alien plate. We're going to put

[106:47]

this up on the second video track and

[106:49]

put this right over our VFX ship plate

[106:51]

like that. And then we'll just drag this

[106:53]

down. So we should have our VFX house

[106:55]

exterior, our alien plate, and our ship

[106:57]

plate stacked and our wideshot like

[106:59]

this. Let's just open up our widesot in

[107:01]

Fusion. The way that we do that is we're

[107:03]

just over it here on the edit page. And

[107:05]

then we go down and just click on the

[107:06]

fusion page. That's going to open up

[107:08]

this clip here in Fusion. And now we're

[107:11]

ready to work with this clip right on

[107:12]

our timeline. Now, if you've never used

[107:15]

Fusion before, you're probably already a

[107:17]

little bit, "Oh gosh, what is this? This

[107:20]

looks completely different than the edit

[107:21]

page. What the heck are these things?"

[107:24]

There's no way I'm ever going to

[107:26]

understand this. And believe me, I get

[107:27]

it. Fusion can be really intimidating

[107:30]

because it's a very different interface

[107:33]

than a lot of other apps. The edit page

[107:36]

at least sort of looks like something

[107:38]

you're familiar with. you know, there's

[107:39]

kind of like layers. There's a timeline.

[107:41]

You know, you've scrubbed through videos

[107:42]

on YouTube. It's sort of familiar, so

[107:44]

you can kind of pick it up. But the

[107:46]

Fusion page, you're like, "What? Why are

[107:48]

there little boxes?" Don't worry, I'm

[107:50]

going to explain everything and move

[107:51]

really slow. And pretty soon, you're

[107:53]

going to say, "Okay, that's pretty

[107:55]

cool." So, let's start with the easy

[107:57]

stuff. Up here, we have our familiar

[108:00]

buttons that open and close panels. And

[108:02]

we have the inspector. Look at that.

[108:04]

Remember the inspector is going to show

[108:06]

properties of whatever we have selected.

[108:08]

More on that in a little bit. Over here

[108:10]

we can open up our media pool which is

[108:13]

exactly how it's been in the other

[108:15]

pages. And also our effects which is

[108:17]

very similar as well. We have a list of

[108:19]

effects that we can drag down and apply

[108:21]

to things. We have a viewer right here.

[108:24]

And we have a viewer over here. And

[108:26]

these for now, let's just say these work

[108:28]

pretty much like the viewers in the edit

[108:30]

page where on the left you can open up a

[108:33]

clip and kind of preview it. And on the

[108:35]

right, this is what the person who

[108:36]

watches your video is going to see. By

[108:38]

default, it works in a similar way on

[108:40]

the Fusion page. There's a viewer over

[108:43]

here where we're going to use to pick up

[108:44]

little pieces and look at them. And on

[108:47]

the right, this is what the person who

[108:49]

watches our movie is actually going to

[108:50]

see. Down below here, we have sort of a

[108:53]

little bit of a different style of a

[108:55]

timeline, but it still works. It has a

[108:57]

playhead, which is this little red line,

[108:59]

and you can drag it back and forth. We

[109:00]

have our playback controls. So, we can

[109:01]

play this, stop it, go backwards. J, K,

[109:04]

and L still work. And you can play this

[109:06]

back and forth. Really, the only big

[109:08]

difference here is that we're looking at

[109:09]

one clip. We're not looking at our

[109:12]

entire timeline. We're just looking at

[109:13]

one clip from our timeline. And so, by

[109:15]

default, we'll have this loop. And so

[109:17]

this will play all the way through and

[109:20]

then loop back to the beginning and play

[109:22]

again. Here we have our current frame

[109:25]

that we're on. And as we scrub this kind

[109:27]

of changes. We also have our beginning

[109:29]

and end frames for our composition. And

[109:33]

below that we have a panel which we call

[109:35]

our toolbar. Now this is a little bit

[109:38]

different than our toolbar in the edit

[109:40]

page where when you click a tool it kind

[109:42]

of changes how your mouse reacts to

[109:44]

things.

[109:47]

This toolbar actually creates tools down

[109:50]

here in the notes. Now, if you don't

[109:52]

know what that means yet, that's okay.

[109:54]

Basically, here's how it works. You grab

[109:55]

an icon and you drag it down here, and

[109:57]

it will make a little box.

[110:00]

Okay, don't worry about that. Below our

[110:03]

toolbar, we have our nodes. This is

[110:06]

where the action happens in Fusion.

[110:08]

Fusion is all about the nodes. What the

[110:11]

heck are nodes? Basically, it's a

[110:13]

flowchart of little boxes that you run

[110:15]

images through to create whatever you

[110:18]

want to make. Now, I know that sounds

[110:20]

really generic and doesn't really

[110:22]

explain it. So, I want to back up for

[110:24]

just a minute. Fusion is a compositing

[110:27]

tool. Now, what the heck is compositing?

[110:30]

Compositing, real strictly speaking, is

[110:32]

basically putting images over other

[110:35]

images. It's combining elements. So, you

[110:38]

can think of this kind of like what you

[110:39]

would typically use Photoshop for,

[110:41]

right? If we're going to make an image

[110:43]

with some mountains and a cow and a

[110:46]

saucer abducting the cow, we would have

[110:48]

different elements here. We would have

[110:50]

possibly a shot that looks like this.

[110:53]

And then we would add this saucer

[110:55]

digitally. Or maybe we just have a shot

[110:57]

of some mountains and we put in the cow

[111:00]

digitally and we put in the saucer and

[111:02]

then we maybe add a little bit of fancy

[111:04]

clouds to the sky. It's putting all of

[111:07]

these pieces together to make a really

[111:09]

cool visual thing. And something like

[111:12]

this where you're combining photos and

[111:13]

you want to make it look real, that's

[111:15]

something that we would call like visual

[111:16]

effects. Whereas, if you're making a

[111:19]

title, you know, with 3D text that comes

[111:21]

in and flashes, that would be more like

[111:24]

a graphic. But visual effects and

[111:26]

graphics are Fusion's bread and butter.

[111:28]

That's what Fusion does. So, if you're

[111:31]

wanting to change an image so that it

[111:33]

looks different and has different

[111:34]

elements in it than it did when you shot

[111:36]

it, you're probably going to be

[111:38]

compositing in some way, just like you

[111:40]

would take a photo and clone out your

[111:42]

weird uncle because you don't want him

[111:43]

in the family picture. You can do that

[111:45]

kind of thing with video and Fusion is

[111:48]

the place to do it in Resolve. If you've

[111:50]

heard of After Effects, Fusion is kind

[111:53]

of like Blackmagic's answer to After

[111:54]

Effects inside of Resolve. It can do

[111:57]

pretty much all the same stuff. So, the

[111:59]

reason we might take a shot like this

[112:00]

into Fusion is if we want to change

[112:03]

something about it. Let's just get rid

[112:05]

of these nodes for a minute because

[112:06]

they're they're scary. Maybe we want to

[112:09]

erase one of these people riding their

[112:11]

bike. Maybe we want to add crazy clouds

[112:13]

to the sky. Maybe we want to add a

[112:16]

flying saucer.

[112:18]

Maybe we want to duplicate some trees

[112:20]

and fill in these trees a little more.

[112:22]

Anything that has to do with kind of

[112:24]

changing the actual pixels of the image,

[112:27]

that's stuff we would use Fusion for. In

[112:30]

our other shots, if we want to make this

[112:32]

image look like it was shot at night, we

[112:36]

could do a lot of that probably in the

[112:37]

color page, but we can do some fancy

[112:39]

things in the fusion page as well, like

[112:41]

brighten up these windows or replace

[112:44]

them with different windows that have

[112:46]

lights in them. We could add a big

[112:47]

statue here. Really, the thing that I

[112:50]

love about Fusion is that there are no

[112:52]

limits to what you can do in a little

[112:54]

bit. One thing that we're going to do in

[112:56]

Fusion is take this image and kind of

[112:58]

cut a hole in it and then put our little

[113:01]

alien guy into the hole of the image so

[113:04]

it looks like he's hanging out in this

[113:06]

seat smiling and happy. That's the kind

[113:09]

of stuff that you can do in Fusion. So,

[113:11]

let's go back to our wide shot here. And

[113:13]

to make all these kind of things happen,

[113:15]

we are going to use nodes. So, what is a

[113:19]

node? A node is a little box in the

[113:22]

Fusion interface that does one job. And

[113:26]

what we do is we link all of these boxes

[113:28]

together to do a bunch of fancy stuff to

[113:30]

our image. So, this is basically what a

[113:33]

node looks like. The node has one job

[113:35]

and it's generally called whatever its

[113:36]

job is. So, this node's job is to blur

[113:38]

things. And there are a couple of

[113:41]

different inputs on each node. This is

[113:44]

where you would attach other nodes. And

[113:46]

the colors of the inputs matter a lot.

[113:49]

Generally, most nodes, you would attach

[113:51]

a node to a yellow input. But there are

[113:54]

also green and blue and other inputs

[113:55]

that we'll talk about in a little bit.

[113:57]

Once the node does its job, for

[113:58]

instance, if you hook up an image to

[114:00]

this yellow input, it's going to take

[114:02]

that image and blur it. And then you can

[114:04]

connect this node to other nodes by

[114:06]

taking this little white square and

[114:08]

connecting that to the next node. After

[114:10]

the image runs through this node, it's

[114:12]

going to change the image. And so this

[114:15]

image that I connect to the next node is

[114:17]

going to be a blurry image because it's

[114:19]

already gone through this node. If this

[114:21]

is already confusing, that's okay. All

[114:23]

you really have to know is that a node

[114:25]

is a box with one job. A lot of the

[114:28]

students that we work with that are

[114:29]

learning Fusion find it's a lot easier

[114:31]

to think about nodes like a flowchart.

[114:33]

And when you're just starting out, it

[114:35]

helps to think of a flowchart for

[114:37]

something fun. Like for instance, a

[114:39]

recipe. A recipe is nice because there

[114:41]

are a series of steps. So if you were

[114:44]

going to write out a recipe for

[114:45]

lemonade, let's say. Number one might be

[114:49]

get lemons. Step two might be squeeze

[114:53]

them. Squeeze the juice. Three would be

[114:56]

add the juice to water. Four would be

[115:01]

add sugar. Five might be mix. And so we

[115:05]

can kind of split what we want to do

[115:07]

into steps. And we can do this like a

[115:10]

flowchart like get lemons, squeeze

[115:12]

juice, add juice to water, add sugar,

[115:17]

mix. And these are going to happen in a

[115:19]

certain order and they're going to flow

[115:21]

from one to the other.

[115:24]

This is pretty much how nodes work in

[115:26]

Fusion. So if we were going to make a

[115:28]

node chart for getting lemonade, it

[115:30]

might look something like this. The

[115:32]

difference is that Fusion you have to

[115:35]

tell Fusion everything. It's kind of

[115:38]

like you need to give it really specific

[115:39]

instructions on exactly what you want it

[115:42]

to do because it can't read your mind.

[115:44]

So for instance, we have a node here

[115:45]

called get lemons. Okay, so I have some

[115:47]

lemons. Squeeze the juice. Okay, so I'm

[115:50]

squeezing it. Then I add the juice to

[115:52]

the water. What water? Where's the

[115:54]

water? This is the first time I've ever

[115:56]

heard about water.

[115:58]

And so what we really need to do is make

[116:00]

another node that says uh get water. So

[116:03]

we get lemons and we get water. We

[116:06]

squeeze the juice for the lemons and we

[116:07]

add the juice to the water. So we need

[116:09]

to actually combine these two things. So

[116:11]

both of those things happen. We get

[116:13]

juice and we get water. Then we need

[116:15]

sugar. What sugar? Well, we need to get

[116:18]

some sugar. We need to add those. Right?

[116:20]

So we're mixing two things together. So

[116:23]

this is more of a node graph that you

[116:24]

would see in Fusion. You get some lemons

[116:27]

and you change those lemons by squeezing

[116:29]

them. You get some water and you combine

[116:31]

it with that squeezed juice. You get

[116:34]

this watery juice. You get some sugar

[116:37]

and you add those together. Then you

[116:40]

stir it. You mix it up. And at the end,

[116:42]

you have lemonade. One of the first

[116:45]

things I ask our students to do when

[116:47]

they're learning fusion is to make a

[116:50]

flowchart for a recipe that they like.

[116:52]

So, here is a flowchart from one of our

[116:55]

students named Ryan that I think is

[116:56]

especially great for how to make ramen

[116:58]

noodles. And we'll take a look at this

[117:00]

and then we're going to come back to it

[117:02]

in a little bit because I want to show

[117:03]

you something really cool about this.

[117:05]

But it's the idea of doing one step at a

[117:08]

time. We get a pot. We get 20 ounces of

[117:10]

water. We add the water to the pot. We

[117:12]

boil the water. We get noodles. We add

[117:14]

the noodles to the boiling water for 5

[117:15]

minutes. We drain the water from the

[117:17]

pot. We get sauce. We add the sauce to

[117:19]

the noodles. We stir fry for 30 seconds.

[117:21]

We get flakes. We add the flakes to the

[117:23]

noodles. We stir it all up and we serve

[117:25]

it. Right? So, it's thinking about

[117:27]

things in steps. That's what's really,

[117:29]

really important here. If you can get

[117:31]

your mind to start thinking in these

[117:33]

little steps, nodes are going to be

[117:36]

easy. Let's jump into Fusion and take a

[117:39]

look at this. By default, we have a

[117:42]

couple of nodes here. And this should

[117:43]

already make a little bit more sense.

[117:45]

That's what's so great about this is

[117:47]

that once it kind of clicks in your

[117:48]

mind, you go, "Oh, okay. I love seeing

[117:51]

that moment with our students. It's

[117:53]

awesome. By default, when you open up a

[117:56]

clip inside of Fusion from the edit

[117:58]

page, you'll have two nodes. You have a

[118:01]

very simple flowchart here. And you can

[118:03]

think of these nodes as kind of the

[118:05]

beginning and the end. Media in has one

[118:08]

job, just like all nodes have one job.

[118:10]

And that is to take this footage, this

[118:12]

clip from the edit page, and bring it

[118:14]

into Fusion. All right. So, that's all

[118:17]

it's doing is just importing the

[118:18]

footage. So, it's kind of bringing that

[118:20]

footage in. And then we have a line that

[118:22]

connects media in to media out. So, it's

[118:24]

flowing from left to right. So, the next

[118:26]

step is media out. Media out. What that

[118:29]

does is that takes an image, whatever

[118:32]

image you plug into this yellow input,

[118:34]

and then it puts it out to the edit

[118:36]

page. So, really what we're doing here

[118:38]

is we're taking an image from the edit

[118:40]

page, we're doing nothing with it, and

[118:42]

then we're putting it back in the edit

[118:43]

page, which is why when we go to the

[118:45]

edit page, nothing's changed. Okay? But

[118:49]

if we were to add another step here,

[118:51]

fancy things right here, then that's

[118:53]

going to change this image and we're

[118:55]

going to be putting a different image

[118:56]

into the edit page. So if I were to grab

[118:59]

maybe this icon right here that looks

[119:00]

like a teardrop and drag this down,

[119:03]

that's going to make a new node. That's

[119:05]

going to make a blur node. All right,

[119:08]

I'll get rid of that for a second

[119:09]

because I can grab this and drag this

[119:11]

down onto this line. And when this line

[119:13]

turns blue, I can let go. And what

[119:16]

that's going to do is run this image

[119:18]

through this blur node. And that's going

[119:20]

to change this image. Now, it just

[119:22]

changes it a little bit because we're

[119:24]

only blurring it a little bit. The

[119:26]

reason I know is because when I select

[119:28]

this blur node and I go to the

[119:30]

inspector, I can see the properties of

[119:32]

that blur node. And this blur size is at

[119:35]

only at one pixel. So, if I push this

[119:37]

blur size up, look, we get a blurry

[119:39]

image. Okay. So, what we're doing is

[119:41]

we're bringing a image into Fusion. Then

[119:45]

we're blurring it 31.5 pixels

[119:49]

and then we're putting it into the media

[119:52]

out which puts this back into the edit

[119:54]

page. Now if we switch over to the edit

[119:56]

page, look what happens. We have a

[119:58]

blurry image. So what's really cool

[120:01]

about this is that we've brought a clip

[120:02]

into Fusion. We've changed it in Fusion

[120:05]

and now it's already in our timeline. We

[120:08]

don't have to render it out. We don't

[120:09]

have to convert it or anything like

[120:10]

that. It's just already living there.

[120:12]

Now, Fusion can do a lot more fancy

[120:14]

things than just blur things, but just

[120:16]

go with this for now. We're building a

[120:18]

really simple flowchart. Grab an image,

[120:20]

blur it, put the image back into the

[120:23]

edit page. And this is essentially how

[120:26]

you build all the effects inside of

[120:29]

Fusion. So, take a second and just kind

[120:31]

of start to think about, okay, if I want

[120:34]

to change an image, I'm going to start

[120:36]

running it through certain nodes. I'm

[120:39]

going to get rid of this blur node. What

[120:41]

kind of node would we use if we wanted

[120:43]

to make this whole image pink? We would

[120:45]

probably use some kind of color

[120:47]

correction or tint node or something

[120:49]

like that. And there actually is a node

[120:51]

called color corrector which is right

[120:53]

here. And we can grab this and just drag

[120:55]

this down. Make sure that line turns

[120:57]

blue. Grab this color corrector and

[120:58]

wiggle it and make sure that those

[121:00]

connections are actually connected. And

[121:02]

then we can select this color corrector

[121:04]

and push this little dot towards pink.

[121:06]

And look at what happens. We have a pink

[121:08]

image. We can switch over to the edit

[121:09]

page. We have a pink image. And if you

[121:12]

can do that, if you can do just that,

[121:15]

you can use Fusion. Even though Fusion

[121:18]

can do all this really, really crazy

[121:21]

complicated stuff, it can be as simple

[121:24]

as that. Now, let's take a look at how

[121:26]

nodes work together. Here's a little

[121:28]

diagram of how we would make a foggy

[121:30]

shot. So, a shot where we're adding fog.

[121:33]

Maybe we have a shot of a house and we

[121:35]

have an image of fog. We're going to put

[121:38]

those together with a node called merge.

[121:40]

That puts one image over another image.

[121:43]

Then maybe we want to do some color

[121:44]

correction to that whole image where

[121:46]

that's already combined. Then maybe we

[121:48]

want to zoom it in a little bit. And

[121:51]

then we put this into the media out

[121:52]

which is going to put it into the edit

[121:54]

page. That's how we would add fog to a

[121:57]

shot. And really you don't even need the

[121:59]

color correction or zoom. If you're just

[122:00]

going to add fog, you could just put fog

[122:02]

over the house shot in Fusion. Call it

[122:05]

good. So, let's get to work here in

[122:07]

Fusion. In the context of the movie,

[122:09]

there's actually supposed to be some

[122:11]

smoke, kind of a smoke trail that goes

[122:13]

across this sky. And so, we're adding a

[122:16]

really simple visual effect of some

[122:18]

smoke. And we're going to do this

[122:19]

together in Fusion. But before we do

[122:22]

that, I want to set up our color

[122:23]

management. This is something that we're

[122:25]

going to talk about a little bit more in

[122:27]

the color page. But for now, I want you

[122:29]

to do this with me. Go to the media pool

[122:31]

and to the Fusion folder. Right click on

[122:34]

our Fusion timeline. We can go to

[122:36]

timelines, timeline settings. This is

[122:39]

going to allow us to change the settings

[122:41]

for our timeline. And let's uncheck use

[122:43]

project settings like this. And this is

[122:46]

where you can change the timeline

[122:47]

resolution and all kinds of stuff here.

[122:49]

But we're going to go over to where it

[122:50]

says color. And here where it says color

[122:53]

science, I'm going to switch this from

[122:54]

Da Vinci YGB to Da Vinci Y RGB color

[122:57]

managed like this. I'm also going to

[123:00]

uncheck automatic color management and

[123:02]

take this color processing mode and

[123:04]

switch this to HDR Da Vinci wide gamut

[123:05]

intermediate. Now, you probably don't

[123:07]

know what any of that means. We'll talk

[123:09]

about that in a little while, but for

[123:11]

now, set your settings for your timeline

[123:13]

to this and then hit okay. And that made

[123:16]

our viewer flash a little bit. And

[123:18]

that's because what it's doing is

[123:19]

putting this timeline into color managed

[123:21]

mode, which for our purposes means that

[123:23]

it's going to do a little bit of color

[123:25]

correction to make our log footage not

[123:28]

look like log footage. If you're like,

[123:30]

"What the heck is log footage?" We'll

[123:31]

talk about it in a little bit. But for

[123:33]

now, what we're going to do is shift

[123:35]

select all of these clips right here.

[123:37]

So, our alien plate, our ship plate, our

[123:39]

house exterior, and our wide shot. And

[123:41]

we're going to rightclick and go down to

[123:43]

input color space and select Blackmagic

[123:45]

Design. Blackmagic Design Pocket 4K film

[123:49]

Gen 4 right here. That's what we want.

[123:52]

Boom. This makes our colors look a

[123:56]

little bit better because we're doing a

[123:58]

little bit of initial color correction

[124:00]

to our footage. And that's just going to

[124:02]

make everything in Fusion work a little

[124:03]

bit nicer. Like I said, we'll talk about

[124:05]

this a little bit more when we get to

[124:07]

the color page. For now, your clip

[124:09]

should look like this. And we're going

[124:11]

to add some smoke to the sky here. The

[124:13]

first thing that we need to do is get

[124:15]

some smoke. And you can do this a lot of

[124:17]

different ways. You could get an image

[124:19]

of a smoke trail. You could render one

[124:21]

in 3D. You can do all different kinds of

[124:24]

things. What we can actually do here in

[124:26]

Fusion is generate something that looks

[124:29]

sort of like smoke using this little

[124:30]

icon right here. I can click this and

[124:32]

drag this in. This is called fast noise.

[124:35]

And to take a look at what this does,

[124:37]

remember I said we're going to talk

[124:38]

about these two viewers here. I'll make

[124:40]

sure to select this button right here.

[124:43]

And that's going to make sure that we

[124:44]

have two viewers. You can kind of switch

[124:45]

between one viewer and two viewers with

[124:47]

this button. There's similar buttons on

[124:48]

the other pages. They're kind of like

[124:50]

this actually. But if we have two

[124:52]

viewers here, I can take this fast noise

[124:55]

node and I can just drag it into my left

[124:57]

viewer and that'll let me see what this

[125:00]

fast noise node is doing. So this fast

[125:03]

noise node is creating this kind of

[125:06]

foggy cloud texture. And if I select

[125:08]

this and go to my inspector, I can push

[125:11]

up the detail. I can push up the scale.

[125:14]

And that's going to make these clouds.

[125:16]

So, we're going to make some kind of

[125:17]

clouds here. We'll just I don't know,

[125:18]

make it about that size. Sure. You don't

[125:20]

have to get it exactly like me. I'll go

[125:22]

ahead and close our media pool, too, so

[125:24]

we have a little room. And we're going

[125:25]

to change the color of this fog. We're

[125:27]

going to go to the color tab of our fast

[125:30]

noise here. And here for color two,

[125:32]

instead of white, I'm going to take the

[125:34]

blue, green, and red down so that it's

[125:37]

black. So, it's basically just black

[125:38]

clouds over transparent. You can see

[125:40]

it's transparent by the checkerboard

[125:42]

here. And so, this is just black clouds

[125:44]

over transparent. And now, we're going

[125:46]

to put these black clouds over this

[125:49]

image. Now, you might think that what

[125:52]

you do is you run this image through

[125:54]

this image because you're applying these

[125:56]

black clouds to it. Really, what's

[125:58]

happening here is we have one image,

[126:00]

which is our original footage, and then

[126:02]

we have this other image, which is our

[126:03]

fast noise, and we're going to combine

[126:05]

them together. To combine two images

[126:07]

together, you use a very specific node

[126:09]

called a merge node. Here's how it

[126:12]

works. This little icon right here, if

[126:14]

we grab this and drag this down, this

[126:16]

will make a merge node. And it has three

[126:18]

inputs: yellow, green, and blue. The

[126:21]

yellow input is the background for our

[126:23]

merge. So, we can take the output of

[126:25]

this media in one. I can actually just

[126:27]

click on this line once to get rid of

[126:29]

it. I can take the output, which is that

[126:31]

little gray square, drag this into merge

[126:33]

one, like this.

[126:36]

into the yellow input. And then I can

[126:38]

take my fast noise and put that into the

[126:40]

green input and take the output of my

[126:43]

merge and put that into my media out.

[126:45]

And I'll make sure to drag this media

[126:47]

out to the right viewer so that I'm

[126:48]

always looking at that media out. And

[126:50]

now we have our black clouds over our

[126:52]

image. So we put two images together,

[126:55]

our black clouds and our original image.

[126:57]

And don't miss this. Either of these

[127:00]

viewers can view any node at any time.

[127:02]

All you have to do is take the node and

[127:03]

drag it into the viewer. You can also

[127:05]

hit one or two on the keyboard with the

[127:07]

node selected to load it into either

[127:09]

viewer. What I like to do is have my

[127:11]

media out on the right viewer and then

[127:13]

just view various nodes on the left

[127:15]

viewer so that I can see what's

[127:17]

happening with little pieces of my

[127:19]

composite. A lot like you would grab a

[127:22]

piece of media here on the source viewer

[127:24]

and you'd have your timeline on the

[127:25]

right viewer. Kind of the same thing. We

[127:28]

look at pieces of it on the left viewer

[127:30]

and our media out on the right viewer.

[127:32]

So now, just as a reminder, if we go

[127:33]

over to the edit page, this clip is

[127:35]

going to have those black clouds over

[127:37]

it.

[127:39]

That's really cool. We can select this

[127:40]

fast noise and adjust the detail

[127:45]

and the scale and everything of those

[127:47]

clouds. We can adjust the se to kind of

[127:50]

move these around. That's going to give

[127:52]

us those dark clouds. But we don't want

[127:54]

those clouds to be everywhere. We only

[127:56]

want it to be kind of in one place. We

[127:59]

really want this to be kind of a streak

[128:01]

across the sky like this. So what we can

[128:04]

do is mask this fast noise and limit

[128:07]

this image so that it only exists right

[128:10]

there inside of this little shape. So we

[128:12]

can do that with a mask node. So there

[128:14]

are quite a few little mask nodes here

[128:17]

in Fusion. And we can grab whichever one

[128:19]

of these that we think is the best.

[128:20]

There are a few. There's a ellipse node

[128:23]

which draws a circle,

[128:25]

a rectangle which draws a rectangle.

[128:27]

This is pretty This is pretty intense

[128:28]

stuff.

[128:31]

We also have a polygon node which lets

[128:33]

you kind of use a pen tool to make a

[128:35]

custom shape. And that's the kind of

[128:37]

shape that we're actually going to use.

[128:38]

So, let's grab a polygon node. That's

[128:40]

this middle one here. Drag this down.

[128:43]

And then we're going to make the shape.

[128:44]

I'm going to just kind of make like a

[128:46]

triangle thing here that's sort of going

[128:48]

off the screen like that. There we go.

[128:50]

It's actually kind of a rectangle, I

[128:52]

guess, but it's really skewed. And so

[128:54]

the idea here is that we're only

[128:56]

highlighting this part of the image and

[128:59]

this is where we want to draw those

[129:01]

clouds. So we can take the output of

[129:03]

this and we can plug this output into

[129:05]

the blue input of this fast noise. And

[129:08]

what's going to happen? Check this out.

[129:09]

Take this, plug this into the blue

[129:11]

input. That's going to limit this fast

[129:14]

noise to only exist inside of that

[129:17]

shape. So now if I double click off of

[129:19]

this, we can see that those clouds are

[129:21]

only inside of that shape. You can think

[129:24]

of a mask this way. If a node has one

[129:26]

job, like this fast noise has a job of

[129:28]

making these black clouds. You can use a

[129:31]

polygon to draw a shape and say whatever

[129:34]

your job is node, I want you to only do

[129:37]

that job right here inside of this

[129:39]

shape. When we connect this to the blue

[129:40]

input, we're limiting it to that shape.

[129:43]

If we had a different shape like a

[129:45]

ellipse and we put that into the blue

[129:47]

input, it would limit it to that

[129:49]

ellipse. All right? So, it's sort of

[129:51]

like we're cropping what that node is

[129:53]

doing.

[129:55]

So, we put that into the vast noise. And

[129:57]

then let's view our media out. And now

[130:00]

it looks like the edges here are just

[130:01]

too sharp. So, something we could do

[130:03]

would be to select our polygon and go

[130:05]

over here to soft edge. We can push that

[130:08]

soft edge up. We could really soften

[130:10]

this. And look, now we have just kind of

[130:13]

a trail of dark clouds here. And it

[130:16]

doesn't look like we cut that out with a

[130:17]

mask. It just looks like a nice little

[130:19]

trail. So that works really, really

[130:21]

well. So if you can do this, this is

[130:23]

like your first visual effect inside of

[130:26]

Fusion. What an exciting thing. And so

[130:28]

now when we play this back, we have the

[130:30]

bikes going across and we have the smoke

[130:32]

trail. The other thing we can do is we

[130:34]

can go to our fast noise and we can push

[130:36]

up the sea rate. Can push that up a

[130:38]

little bit. I'm going to push it up way

[130:39]

too much right now just so we can see

[130:40]

what's going on. But this see rate will

[130:42]

animate those clouds just continuously.

[130:45]

So when we play this back, we can see

[130:47]

how the clouds are kind of like

[130:48]

wobbling, right? We don't want it this

[130:51]

fast. So I can take this down a lot. I

[130:54]

just want it just just ever so slight.

[130:58]

Just so it has a little bit of movement.

[131:00]

Just so it isn't totally static.

[131:04]

Yeah, maybe something like that where

[131:06]

it's just almost imperceptibly moving so

[131:09]

it doesn't look like just a still. There

[131:11]

we go. Now we have this smoke trail from

[131:13]

the crashed UFO going across the screen.

[131:16]

I love that. And anytime we want, we can

[131:19]

change this polygon and kind of change

[131:21]

this shape to change where our smoke

[131:24]

trail goes. Now, the one thing that

[131:25]

you'll run into when you're adjusting a

[131:27]

polygon mask is that it automatically

[131:30]

animates. And so, if we were to look at

[131:32]

this and play this back, see how that

[131:34]

mask is animating? When I go back and

[131:36]

forth, it animates. That's because I

[131:39]

have a key frame on this mask, that

[131:42]

first frame where I drew this mask. And

[131:45]

when I changed it just now, we were

[131:47]

actually at a different place in time.

[131:49]

So, if we're doing this on purpose, it's

[131:51]

great. But one thing that I always do

[131:53]

with masks that I'm not going to animate

[131:55]

is I go over here to the inspector. I

[131:57]

select the polygon mask. Go over here to

[131:59]

the inspector. Right here where it says

[132:01]

right click here for shape animation, I

[132:03]

rightclick and then go down and I say

[132:05]

remove polygon one polyline. like that.

[132:08]

Boop. Like that. What that's going to do

[132:10]

is get rid of the key frames, which are

[132:11]

the little white ticks that were on

[132:13]

here. It's not going to have a red key

[132:14]

frame diamond. It's just going to stay

[132:17]

where it's at. And no matter where I

[132:19]

change this mask, it's always going to

[132:21]

stay like that because there is no

[132:23]

animation. All right, that has got me in

[132:26]

trouble so many times. That's why I'm

[132:28]

telling you about it now. If your mask

[132:31]

is animating, it's because it's

[132:32]

automatically key framed. You got to

[132:34]

right click and get rid of that

[132:35]

animation. So, now we have a little bit

[132:37]

of movement there. We have a nice

[132:39]

looking shot. We have this kind of

[132:41]

streak across the sky. How do we get it

[132:43]

back into the edit page? I'm testing

[132:45]

you. All you do is switch back to the

[132:47]

edit page and boom, there it is. That's

[132:49]

our finished visual effects shot. Isn't

[132:51]

that awesome? We did that all right here

[132:53]

inside of Resolve, inside of Fusion.

[132:55]

Beautiful. Let's go to our first shot,

[132:58]

this house exterior. I'll switch back

[133:00]

over to Fusion. Again, I'm moving this

[133:02]

around by clicking and dragging with my

[133:05]

middle button on my mouse, my scroll

[133:06]

wheel button. And you can kind of move

[133:08]

this around. Same thing here for the

[133:10]

viewers. But now, what we're going to do

[133:12]

is we're going to turn this into a

[133:13]

nighttime shot. So, this is going to

[133:15]

involve a couple things. One is we need

[133:18]

to make it darker. Two is we need to

[133:19]

make it blue. Three is we need to kind

[133:23]

of keep some of the light that's here so

[133:25]

that it doesn't look weird and it

[133:26]

doesn't look too dark. So, we're

[133:27]

darkening everything except for these

[133:29]

lights basically. How do we do this? In

[133:32]

Fusion, we can run an image through an

[133:35]

effect. So, for instance, this color

[133:36]

correction effect. We could grab this

[133:39]

and drag that down like this. And we can

[133:41]

select the color corrector. Maybe we'll

[133:43]

push this a little bit blue. Maybe push

[133:45]

up a little bit of contrast. Maybe take

[133:47]

this gain down. That's just the

[133:49]

brightness of the brightest parts of the

[133:50]

image. Maybe something like that. Now,

[133:53]

we're really darkening that kind of

[133:55]

thing down. That's one way that we could

[133:57]

do it. We could also use a curves node.

[134:01]

And this, if we uncheck alpha, we can

[134:03]

add a little bit of a contrast curve

[134:04]

like that. But the tool that I really

[134:06]

like for this kind of thing inside of

[134:08]

Fusion is our brightness and contrast

[134:10]

node. That's this node right here.

[134:13]

We can take this and drag this in. I

[134:15]

like this because it's a little bit more

[134:17]

simple. I could just take maybe this

[134:19]

gamma down. Push this down like this.

[134:22]

Take the saturation down a little bit.

[134:24]

And now we're just making this a little

[134:25]

bit darker. Like that. Yes. And we're

[134:28]

pretty quickly going to figure out that

[134:30]

the color here is going to be too dark

[134:32]

here and not dark enough up here. So,

[134:35]

what we're going to have to do is do

[134:37]

this in a couple different parts. So, I

[134:38]

could take this brightness and contrast

[134:40]

down. And I'm just going to pick one of

[134:41]

these. I can either pick the sky or I

[134:43]

can pick the ground and the building and

[134:45]

stuff. So, I'll just pick the building

[134:47]

first. Maybe just kind of take that

[134:49]

down. Something like that. Great. The

[134:52]

other thing I want to do is clip black

[134:53]

and clip white. This makes sure that no

[134:56]

craziness happens with our color.

[134:57]

Sometimes you can make things that are

[134:59]

blacker than black or whiter than white

[135:01]

and that kind of messes with things and

[135:02]

gives you weird results sometimes. So

[135:04]

you always want to clip that black and

[135:05]

white unless you're doing something

[135:06]

really specific. I also tend to click

[135:09]

pre-ivide post multiply. This makes sure

[135:11]

that if you're color correcting

[135:12]

something that has transparency, like an

[135:14]

alpha channel, maybe it's a logo or

[135:16]

something like that that has

[135:17]

transparency, that when you adjust the

[135:19]

colors that it only adjusts the colors

[135:21]

on the pixels that aren't transparent.

[135:23]

Sometimes you can color correct

[135:25]

transparent pixels and weird stuff

[135:26]

happens too. So basically you tick all

[135:29]

of these boxes to make sure weird stuff

[135:31]

doesn't happen. Okay, so we have this a

[135:33]

little bit darker. Let's darken the sky

[135:36]

too. So what I could do would just be to

[135:38]

copy and paste this just by hitting C,

[135:41]

double clicking, hitting Ctrl +V. And

[135:43]

let's do another version of this. Let's

[135:45]

take our original footage and we'll run

[135:46]

it through brightness and contrast like

[135:48]

this. Take this brightness and contrast.

[135:50]

Make sure we're looking at that. Just

[135:51]

dragging it up here. And then we'll clip

[135:54]

black and white. Pre-divide, post

[135:55]

multiply. And this time we're going to

[135:57]

take this gain down a lot. We're going

[135:59]

to take the gamma down a lot. We're just

[136:01]

going to make that sky really dark. All

[136:03]

I care about is the sky. Yeah, something

[136:06]

like that. Really, really dark.

[136:08]

Everything else is way too dark, but we

[136:09]

just care about the sky. Also going to

[136:11]

take the saturation down a lot. Maybe

[136:13]

like all the way. Okay. So, we have a

[136:16]

separate color correction for the sky,

[136:18]

and we have a separate color correction

[136:19]

for the bottom part. Now we're going to

[136:21]

combine these images together. So we can

[136:23]

do that with a merge node that always

[136:25]

combines images like this. So we're

[136:28]

going to put this merge node here. And

[136:29]

let's look at our media out. So now we

[136:31]

have this color correction for the

[136:34]

building. And now we're going to take

[136:36]

the output of the color correction for

[136:37]

our sky and put that into the foreground

[136:40]

of this merge. And look what happens. We

[136:42]

only see the foreground. Okay. So here's

[136:45]

the background before the merge. Here's

[136:48]

the foreground before the merge.

[136:50]

And here is the composite after the

[136:53]

merge, but we only wanted it for the

[136:55]

sky. Well, the thing is we didn't tell

[136:57]

Fusion that we only want on the sky. So,

[137:00]

what we got to do is use a mask just

[137:02]

like we did with the black smoke. And

[137:03]

so, I could take something like this

[137:05]

polygon mask. I'll drag this down. And

[137:07]

this time, I'm going to mask the merge

[137:10]

because this merge is doing one job.

[137:12]

What it's doing is it's putting the

[137:13]

foreground over the background. And what

[137:15]

I want to do is tell it to only put that

[137:17]

foreground over the background inside of

[137:20]

this shape that I'm going to draw. So,

[137:22]

actually, let's go ahead and draw this

[137:24]

shape first. And I'm just going to start

[137:26]

kind of up here. I'm going to select

[137:28]

this polygon and start up here and just

[137:31]

kind of draw around where I want the

[137:34]

sky. There we go. Something like that.

[137:37]

Then I can connect this polygon to the

[137:38]

blue input of that merge. And look what

[137:40]

happens. We have the sky color grade

[137:43]

over the building color grade. And

[137:45]

again, just like we did with the black

[137:47]

smoke, I can take this polygon and push

[137:49]

up the soft edge like this. We'll just

[137:52]

push it up a little bit.

[137:55]

Maybe bring this down.

[137:58]

Soften that edge a lot.

[138:02]

And we're just going to kind of move

[138:04]

that around to where we get a good

[138:09]

solid combination of both of those

[138:12]

colors.

[138:14]

Might want to make this even softer.

[138:17]

And now we can select this merge and

[138:18]

turn off on and off this switch. And we

[138:21]

can see the difference, right?

[138:24]

Makes a big big difference. I also want

[138:26]

to take this polygon and maybe move it

[138:27]

up a little bit just so we're not

[138:29]

softening the edges. is we'll take it

[138:30]

way off the canvas here like this. And

[138:34]

now we have essentially two color

[138:36]

corrected images combined together. We

[138:39]

have our sky grade and our building

[138:42]

grade and we're putting those together

[138:44]

in two different layers. Now let's take

[138:46]

this whole thing and turn it blue. I'm

[138:48]

going to take this media out and we're

[138:50]

going to take some color correction.

[138:51]

We're going to run this through our

[138:52]

color corrector and we're going to push

[138:54]

this a little bit blue. All right. Let's

[138:56]

make sure we're looking at our media

[138:57]

out. Oh yeah, that's too blue. We just

[138:59]

want it a little bit blue. Something

[139:02]

like that. Maybe take the saturation

[139:04]

down a little bit.

[139:08]

And we can really start to dial this in

[139:10]

and make this look like it's nighttime.

[139:12]

Okay. Now, a lot of this is stuff that

[139:14]

we could probably do in the color page,

[139:16]

honestly. But I like this exercise

[139:18]

because it gets us used to working with

[139:20]

nodes. And this will also help us with

[139:22]

color here in a little bit. If anytime

[139:24]

you get lost in a node tree, you can

[139:27]

just grab the nodes on the left and just

[139:29]

start dragging each one into this left

[139:31]

viewer and kind of think about it in

[139:33]

steps. The first step we have is our

[139:35]

original footage. Then we're adjusting

[139:37]

it with the brightness and contrast.

[139:40]

Then we're taking our original footage

[139:42]

again and we're adjusting it differently

[139:44]

with our brightness and contrast. So we

[139:46]

have two versions of this color

[139:48]

corrected image. One that's sort of dark

[139:50]

and one that's really dark. Then we're

[139:52]

merging our really dark one over our

[139:54]

sort of dark one, but we're only doing

[139:57]

it inside of this polygon mask. So just

[140:01]

on the sky part. Then we're taking that

[140:03]

whole thing and we're color correcting

[140:06]

it to tint it blue. And that gives us

[140:09]

our composite where we have multiple

[140:12]

images put over one another. Now we

[140:14]

could go even crazier here. What really

[140:17]

sells a day fornight shot is when we

[140:19]

have these bright yellow lights kind of

[140:20]

lighting things up. And so we could copy

[140:23]

this media in again. I'll just copy and

[140:24]

paste. Now we have our original footage

[140:28]

again. And we can put this over our blue

[140:32]

kind of nighttime shot like this. We can

[140:35]

do that by adding a merge node and

[140:38]

putting it into the foreground. And if

[140:40]

we look at our media out, we have our

[140:42]

original footage with nothing over it,

[140:44]

right? But we're only going to merge

[140:46]

this where the bright parts are here. So

[140:48]

we could do something like grab a

[140:51]

ellipse and plug this into the blue

[140:53]

input here.

[140:56]

And I can make this ellipse really small

[140:59]

and move it like this. And then soften

[141:01]

that edge like this. See what we're

[141:04]

doing here?

[141:07]

Soften that edge. And now we have that

[141:09]

yellow that looks like the light is

[141:14]

emitting light. Right. We could copy and

[141:17]

paste this ellipse mask. I'll just drag

[141:19]

this down. Hit Ctrl + C and then Ctrl

[141:22]

+V. It's going to copy and paste that.

[141:24]

And it's going to run that mask through

[141:26]

that mask, which is basically just going

[141:27]

to combine them. So I can add another

[141:29]

mask over here. Create. I'll move these

[141:31]

down. Grab this one. Copy paste. Crl +

[141:34]

Crl + V. Move this over here for this

[141:36]

one. Maybe make this one a little bit

[141:38]

bigger. So we have a little bit more

[141:41]

light over here. Something like that.

[141:44]

And now we have that light showing up

[141:47]

here and it looks more like a night

[141:50]

shot. Isn't that cool? This is the kind

[141:52]

of stuff that you can do in Fusion

[141:54]

really easily. Maybe we want to add some

[141:57]

fog to this. Remember, we kind of know

[141:59]

how to do that already. We can take this

[142:01]

second icon, which again makes fog. It's

[142:04]

a fast noise. push up the detail. Maybe

[142:07]

maybe push down the scale a little bit.

[142:09]

And let's merge this over everything. By

[142:12]

the way, there is a quick trick to merge

[142:15]

something over something else. So you

[142:17]

don't have to grab this merge node and

[142:19]

then plug it into the foreground. What

[142:20]

you can do is just take the output, this

[142:22]

little gray square, and drop it on the

[142:25]

white square here like this. Boop. And

[142:27]

that will automatically put it in the

[142:29]

foreground of a merge right after this

[142:31]

node. So now we have our fast noise over

[142:34]

everything just like we did before. And

[142:36]

again, we can grab a polygon

[142:40]

and let's just kind of make a little

[142:43]

mask around here. I'm just clicking and

[142:44]

dragging to make it soft. Pushing this

[142:47]

soft edge.

[142:49]

Selecting these

[142:51]

and just

[142:53]

messing with this shape that I can get a

[142:57]

little bit of fog.

[142:59]

Isn't that cool?

[143:02]

Now, this fog is a little bit strong.

[143:03]

So, I want to take this merge and I'm

[143:06]

going to turn down the opacity of the

[143:08]

foreground. I'm going to make it more

[143:09]

transparent. With this merge, I can take

[143:11]

this blend and push the blend down like

[143:14]

this. And so, I can kind of fade this on

[143:16]

or off. So, if I want to split the

[143:18]

difference, I can take this blend to

[143:19]

0.5.

[143:21]

And I'll actually just push this in just

[143:23]

a little bit, maybe like 20% or so. And

[143:27]

now we have this fog in our shot.

[143:31]

And it really adds a lot. Makes it feel

[143:33]

like it's a nighttime kind of foggy

[143:36]

shot. Look at that big difference.

[143:39]

Here's our original footage

[143:42]

and here's after. That's a big big

[143:44]

difference. Isn't that cool? The other

[143:45]

thing we can do with this fog is we can

[143:48]

grab this fast noise and look at this.

[143:50]

We can move the center of the fast noise

[143:52]

around and that just kind of moves this

[143:54]

texture. And we can start this here at

[143:57]

the beginning of our shot. And just like

[144:00]

we can animate stuff in the edit page,

[144:02]

we can animate stuff here in the fusion

[144:05]

page. So I could take this fog. I'll

[144:07]

take the center and just start it there.

[144:08]

You can really start it anywhere. It's

[144:10]

just going to be easier to animate from

[144:11]

one side to the other rather than

[144:12]

starting here and then animating it off

[144:14]

screen. We're going to start right here.

[144:16]

And I'm going to animate the center.

[144:17]

I'll just click this key frame diamond.

[144:19]

And then at the end, we'll move this

[144:21]

over a little bit. I don't know, maybe

[144:23]

halfway or so. So now as

[144:27]

we play this back, we see the fog kind

[144:29]

of rolling across a little bit. Oh,

[144:31]

that's so cool. We could also adjust the

[144:35]

seed rate and push that up just a little

[144:36]

bit so that this kind of changes over

[144:38]

time. Maybe a little bit stronger than

[144:41]

that. There we go. So now we have the

[144:44]

fog kind of rolling in across this. I'm

[144:46]

going to turn this up so you can see it

[144:48]

a little better. We have that fog going

[144:50]

from left to right.

[144:52]

I always want to keep things subtle, but

[144:54]

it's a little bit easier to see on the

[144:56]

recording here. So, let's just push this

[144:58]

up

[145:00]

just so it's nice and subtle. Little bit

[145:02]

of fog. Ah, it's so cool. Movie magic in

[145:06]

Fusion. And remember, once we have this

[145:08]

all built out, we can switch to the edit

[145:09]

page. And look, here's our shot in the

[145:11]

edit page. We don't have to render it.

[145:13]

We don't have to do anything crazy. It's

[145:15]

just already in the timeline. Isn't that

[145:17]

awesome? Now, here's kind of one of the

[145:19]

dirty little secrets about Fusion. You

[145:22]

kind of take one look at this node tree

[145:23]

and you're like, gosh, that's a lot of

[145:25]

little boxes and everything, but it

[145:27]

wasn't that hard when we were building

[145:28]

it because we're just building it one

[145:30]

step at a time. Okay? And really, we're

[145:33]

just starting with this media in and

[145:36]

we're color correcting it, which is one

[145:38]

step. We're starting with this media in

[145:40]

again and we're color correcting it.

[145:42]

We're putting it together. We're masking

[145:44]

where it goes together. We're color

[145:46]

correcting it blue. We're taking the

[145:49]

original footage again and we're just

[145:50]

putting it over everything, but only

[145:53]

within these masks. So only where it's

[145:55]

white right here. Then we're taking some

[145:57]

fast noise and we're putting it over our

[145:59]

shot, but only inside of a mask that's

[146:03]

right down here. And so it's pretty

[146:05]

simple, straightforward stuff. It's just

[146:07]

lined out with every single step that we

[146:09]

did. So that's the bad thing and the

[146:11]

good thing about nodes. The bad thing is

[146:13]

that it looks kind of intimidating. But

[146:15]

the good thing is that you can always go

[146:16]

back to any of these steps. All these

[146:18]

steps are modular. And so you can go

[146:20]

back and say, actually, I don't know if

[146:23]

I like the correction here. I can go to

[146:26]

my brightness and contrast here and

[146:28]

adjust that correction on the top part

[146:30]

of our screen, and I can see what it

[146:31]

looks like even after it flows through

[146:33]

all of this stuff. Fusion is the very

[146:36]

most powerful page in Resolve. You can

[146:38]

do absolutely anything with it. Fusion

[146:40]

is what we dive super deep into in our

[146:42]

courses. We have a course called Intro

[146:44]

to Fusion that breaks down all of this

[146:46]

in even more detail and helps you truly

[146:48]

understand how Fusion works and then

[146:50]

puts you through the paces to transform

[146:52]

you from somebody who doesn't really

[146:53]

know anything about Fusion to somebody

[146:55]

who can confidently use Fusion for

[146:57]

visual effects and for graphics and for

[147:00]

creating awesome things in Resolve. Now,

[147:02]

let's go back to our edit page and we

[147:05]

have these two shots and we want to

[147:07]

combine them. Now, to combine a couple

[147:09]

of shots in Fusion, you can do this a

[147:11]

couple different ways. One thing I could

[147:13]

do would be to just be over this bottom

[147:15]

one and switch to Fusion. And then I

[147:17]

could go to my media pool and grab this

[147:20]

other shot and drag this in like this.

[147:22]

And that's going to make another media

[147:24]

in. And so we have this footage and this

[147:27]

footage. And then I can combine them

[147:28]

just like I combined the same footage

[147:30]

over itself. The other way that we can

[147:32]

do it that's sometimes a little bit more

[147:35]

convenient, I'll just rightclick on this

[147:37]

and reset our fusion composition is I

[147:40]

can stack these on the timeline, select

[147:42]

both of them, rightclick and go to new

[147:45]

fusion clip. What that will do is

[147:47]

combine these together and then I can

[147:49]

switch into Fusion and I'll have both of

[147:52]

those clips synced up and lined up with

[147:54]

each other here in the Fusion page. So

[147:55]

here's one of them and here's the other.

[147:58]

It really doesn't matter which one you

[147:59]

use. It's kind of dependent on what you

[148:01]

feel like doing. One advantage that you

[148:03]

have with working with just one piece of

[148:05]

footage though is that when you switch

[148:06]

into Fusion, it's going to open it up in

[148:08]

its native resolution. Okay, so this is

[148:11]

1920 x 800. If you make a Fusion clip,

[148:14]

it's going to make a version of this

[148:16]

that's actually the timeline resolution,

[148:19]

which may or may not be an issue. In

[148:21]

this case, it's not really that much of

[148:23]

an issue other than we have a little bit

[148:25]

of empty space at the top and bottom

[148:26]

because this footage is widescreen and

[148:29]

our timeline settings are HD. But I like

[148:31]

to do it this way. Grab this original

[148:34]

footage. And then I'll just grab this

[148:37]

other footage from the media pool and

[148:38]

drag it in. And I can rename these nodes

[148:41]

by selecting the node and hitting F2. So

[148:44]

we'll call this alien MI for media in.

[148:47]

This one's going to be called ship_mi

[148:50]

for media in. So we have our alien, we

[148:52]

have our ship. And now it's our job to

[148:54]

combine these together so it looks like

[148:55]

this alien is inside of the ship. Now

[148:58]

this might actually be easier if we put

[149:01]

this alien in the background and the

[149:04]

ship in the foreground. So let's go

[149:06]

ahead and disconnect our ship and we're

[149:08]

going to start with our alien. We're

[149:10]

going to take him and put him into the

[149:12]

media out. This is going to be our

[149:13]

original footage. In this case, they're

[149:15]

both the same resolution, so it doesn't

[149:16]

really matter. And then we're going to

[149:18]

take our ship and we're going to put

[149:19]

this over our alien like that. So, we're

[149:21]

just going to be able to see the ship

[149:23]

and the aliens underneath it. So, if we

[149:25]

move this over, we can see the aliens

[149:26]

underneath it. But the first thing we

[149:28]

have to do is cut a hole in our clip of

[149:31]

the ship. In visual effects land, this

[149:34]

would be called a plate. Think of if

[149:35]

you're stacking two plates in the

[149:36]

kitchen. Your foreground plate is on top

[149:38]

of your background plate. All right? So,

[149:40]

this foreground plate, this ship, we're

[149:42]

going to cut a hole right here in the

[149:44]

cockpit and see if we can put our little

[149:46]

alien shot in there. To do that, we can

[149:48]

grab a polygon mask. And if we connect

[149:51]

it to the ship right now, everything's

[149:53]

going to disappear and we're not going

[149:54]

to be able to see what we're working on.

[149:56]

So, it's actually a little better idea

[149:58]

to not connect this yet. We're just

[149:59]

going to put this kind of nearby where

[150:01]

we want to connect it. select this

[150:02]

polygon and I'm just going to start

[150:05]

drawing

[150:08]

a mask right around here where I want

[150:12]

this to be cut out. Now, drawing masks

[150:15]

is kind of its own art. Let's just look

[150:18]

at this polygon here for a minute. In

[150:20]

fact, I'll grab all these and kind of

[150:21]

reset it. If you click once, that's

[150:24]

going to add a point to your polygon.

[150:26]

So, if I click once several times,

[150:28]

that's going to build a shape. Once I

[150:31]

connect that shape to itself and close

[150:33]

that path, that's going to make a

[150:35]

selection. That's this white part right

[150:37]

here. I can also add points to this by

[150:40]

just clicking and dragging. It's going

[150:42]

to add points. But there's also these

[150:44]

little handles on the line. And if I

[150:46]

click and drag that, that's going to

[150:48]

make these points softer. Like it's

[150:52]

going to make them not as pointy. And so

[150:54]

I can adjust my path using these little

[150:57]

handles. And I can make soft curves or I

[151:01]

can make them pointy depending on where

[151:03]

those handles are. When I'm drawing, if

[151:06]

I click once, that makes a sharp point.

[151:08]

If I click and drag, that drags out

[151:10]

those handles so that I can make a soft

[151:12]

shape like that. Generally, when you're

[151:15]

drawing with a mask, you want to have

[151:19]

the least amount of points possible. And

[151:22]

so if you're going to draw a curve, you

[151:24]

don't want to draw a ton of little

[151:27]

points like that to make your shape,

[151:30]

what's better is just to use one point

[151:32]

here in the middle and drag those

[151:34]

handles out like this.

[151:36]

Then you can kind of adjust it. But you

[151:38]

can get the same shape with three points

[151:41]

instead of 30. And it takes some

[151:43]

practice if you've never drawn these

[151:45]

kinds of paths before. You haven't used

[151:47]

like a pen tool, you haven't drawn

[151:49]

vector shapes, things like that. It does

[151:51]

take some getting used to, but with a

[151:52]

little practice, you'll get the hang of

[151:54]

it. All right, so let's go back to our

[151:56]

ship, and we're going to use our polygon

[151:59]

mask. And I'm going to click once here,

[152:01]

and then click and drag here for this

[152:03]

curve. Click once here. Click once here

[152:06]

because there's a little bit of curve.

[152:08]

There we go. I'm clicking and dragging.

[152:10]

Click once. Click and drag. Click once

[152:13]

to close the path. I can hold control

[152:16]

and grab this little handle. That's

[152:18]

really hard to see. Let me adjust my

[152:20]

viewer here. I'm just turning the gain

[152:21]

down in our viewer. It's just the colors

[152:23]

of the viewer. It doesn't actually

[152:24]

change the image. It's just like your

[152:26]

preview of it. Those three dots. You can

[152:28]

click on gain and gamma. And you can

[152:29]

kind of adjust the brightness of your

[152:31]

viewer just so you can do things like

[152:33]

this a little bit easier. I can hold

[152:34]

control and grab this handle and move

[152:37]

this down into line cuz I want a good

[152:40]

selection of this right here. I think

[152:42]

that looks pretty good. I can reset my

[152:44]

gain and gamma by clicking these little

[152:46]

dots here. Or I can also just go up to

[152:48]

the three dots and turn off gain and

[152:50]

gamma. And now I have this selection

[152:52]

that looks like this. And if I apply

[152:54]

this to the ship like this, look what

[152:56]

happens. That does cut out the ship, but

[152:58]

it only leaves the center. And what I

[153:01]

really want is the center to be gone and

[153:02]

everything else to stay there. So what I

[153:04]

can do is select my polygon mask and

[153:07]

right here where it says invert, I'm

[153:09]

going to invert that selection. Boop.

[153:10]

Like that. And now look, we have a

[153:13]

little hole cut out in our footage. And

[153:16]

we can see this checkerboard behind it.

[153:17]

That means that it's transparent. So I

[153:19]

can put this over our alien footage. And

[153:22]

look, there he is. He's peeking out. So

[153:25]

we have this kind of partially done. We

[153:26]

have this cut out. And we have our alien

[153:29]

in there, but he's not really the right

[153:30]

size. And so what we need to do is

[153:32]

resize this footage to fit right about

[153:35]

here. We're going to do that with a

[153:37]

transform node. So a transform node is

[153:40]

like taking an image and adjusting its

[153:42]

size, its rotation, and its scale. It's

[153:45]

a lot like the transform controls right

[153:48]

here in the edit page, but it all lives

[153:52]

in one node. And so we can take this

[153:54]

alien, this original footage right here,

[153:56]

and we're going to run it through a

[153:57]

transform node. Transform nodes are

[153:59]

right here. Can grab this and drag this

[154:01]

in like this. Make sure this is

[154:03]

connected. And then with the transform

[154:05]

node selected, I have my transform tools

[154:07]

up here. And I can push the size down.

[154:09]

And look, it kind of gives us a little

[154:11]

outline. And I can put this guy right

[154:14]

where I want him to be. Look at that.

[154:18]

And so we're combining those images

[154:20]

together and we're making one new image.

[154:23]

That's movie magic. Isn't that cool?

[154:26]

Again, this node tree looks complicated,

[154:28]

but it's our original footage of our

[154:30]

alien. We're transforming him, making

[154:33]

him smaller like this. We're taking our

[154:35]

ship footage, we're cutting out the

[154:37]

middle, and we're just pasting it on top

[154:39]

of this image. Those combine together.

[154:41]

And they make our shot here. And now we

[154:44]

can call this good or we can change it

[154:46]

around a little bit. One thing is maybe

[154:47]

this polygon mask needs a little bit of

[154:49]

softness. So I'll push up the softness

[154:51]

just a little bit. Something like that.

[154:54]

Adjust this a little bit. Make sure that

[154:56]

we right click and remove our polygon

[154:58]

one polyline or else we'll have moving

[155:00]

masks.

[155:01]

Just going to kind of adjust this and

[155:03]

make sure this looks good.

[155:07]

Always a good idea.

[155:09]

Maybe we want to color correct right

[155:11]

here and kind of put a little shadow so

[155:13]

it looks like he's really inside of that

[155:16]

craft. We could run this transformed

[155:19]

alien, this right here through something

[155:21]

like a brightness and contrast.

[155:24]

And let's view this here on the left

[155:25]

viewer. And we're going to take the gain

[155:28]

down a little bit. Maybe maybe take the

[155:29]

gamma down touch. Maybe take the

[155:31]

saturation down. Just going to make it a

[155:33]

little bit darker. But we're only going

[155:35]

to do it right here. Okay. So, we could

[155:38]

take a polygon mask or even maybe a

[155:40]

rectangle mask and we can apply that to

[155:43]

our color correction. And as we change

[155:46]

this mask, look, it's only going to do

[155:49]

that color correction. That one node's

[155:51]

job, this brightness and contrast job is

[155:53]

only going to happen inside of this

[155:55]

rectangle. And so, I can take this

[155:57]

rectangle and let's we can either move

[155:59]

it on this viewer or the other viewer,

[156:01]

doesn't matter. We'll rotate this a

[156:03]

little bit. I'll just move this right

[156:04]

there. And then maybe soften that edge

[156:07]

just so we have a little bit of our

[156:10]

color correction here. Just like that.

[156:12]

Adds a little bit of interactive

[156:14]

lighting there. So here's before and

[156:16]

here's after. And that's only happening

[156:20]

on this image because we're running it

[156:22]

through this brightness and contrast

[156:23]

before we put it under the ship. If we

[156:26]

did a color correction on this side,

[156:28]

then what we're doing is we're taking

[156:29]

this image and we're color correcting

[156:31]

it. Right? So, if I did some kind of

[156:33]

color correction here, we'll just I

[156:35]

don't know, make this

[156:38]

really yellow, right? And then we put

[156:41]

that inside of a ellipse. That's going

[156:45]

to color correct everything at least

[156:47]

inside of that ellipse. But if we were

[156:50]

to put this here before we put it under

[156:52]

the ship, I can hold shift and drag this

[156:54]

out like this and just drop it back in

[156:56]

like that. Then that's going to color

[156:58]

correct this image before it goes under

[157:00]

the ship. And so we're only color

[157:02]

correcting this image. So the order of

[157:04]

the nodes is really important. Let's get

[157:06]

rid of that. And now we have our nice

[157:08]

composite. We can switch back over to

[157:09]

the edit page. H. So beautiful. There's

[157:12]

our little guy. We can get rid of this

[157:14]

alien plate. And now we have three

[157:16]

finished VFX shots right here in our

[157:18]

timeline. And we can do this on any

[157:20]

timeline. If we switch back to our edit

[157:22]

timeline, I can quickly go into Fusion.

[157:25]

And maybe I'll do something like add

[157:27]

fog.

[157:32]

push up the detail like this. And we'll

[157:33]

just mask it to be

[157:38]

like right here.

[157:40]

Soften that. Soften that edge a lot.

[157:44]

Now we have a lot more fog than we did.

[157:48]

Really makes a big difference.

[157:52]

There are infinitely more things to go

[157:55]

over in Fusion. Man, I could spend so

[157:57]

much time on this. In fact, we have

[157:58]

several courses on Fusion. We have

[158:01]

hundreds of students that have learned

[158:02]

how to use Fusion, this part of Resolve

[158:04]

that is the most powerful, inspiring,

[158:06]

amazing part of Resolve. You can also

[158:08]

use Fusion to make motion graphics and

[158:10]

animations and all kinds of cool stuff

[158:12]

like that. In fact, you know what? I

[158:13]

don't care if this is a million hour

[158:15]

video. We're going to uh I need to show

[158:17]

you some of this stuff, too. Let's

[158:20]

switch back to our wide shot here. And

[158:22]

imagine imagine if we made this into

[158:26]

kind of like a sort of like predator

[158:28]

vision kind of shot where it's all kind

[158:30]

of washed with some color and maybe

[158:32]

there's like a little targeting system

[158:34]

or something that tracks one of these

[158:35]

bikes and maybe there's like heat vision

[158:37]

or something like that. You can do all

[158:39]

this kind of stuff in Fusion. And so

[158:40]

let's let's just walk through and play

[158:42]

around and have a little bit of fun

[158:43]

here.

[158:44]

So, after all of these nodes that we're

[158:48]

using, let's kind of do some color

[158:49]

correction here. And let's just maybe

[158:52]

turn it blue, maybe push up the contrast

[158:55]

a little bit, take the saturation down,

[158:57]

so we have this kind of like bluish gray

[158:59]

wash on everything. Let's make a little

[159:01]

graphic that kind of follows her. And

[159:03]

you can do this in a bunch of different

[159:05]

ways. One way that'd be pretty easy

[159:06]

would be to grab a background. So, this

[159:09]

just generates a background color of any

[159:12]

color you want. Maybe we'll make this

[159:14]

kind of a greenish cyan kind of thing.

[159:17]

Let's put this over our color

[159:18]

correction. And let's take a mask and

[159:21]

we're just going to put a rectangle mask

[159:22]

on this like this.

[159:25]

And then we can kind of put a box around

[159:28]

our girl here. And then let's uncheck

[159:32]

solid and push up border width for our

[159:34]

mask. And now we have a little border,

[159:36]

like a little picture frame here. Push

[159:38]

up the corner radius. Now we have this

[159:40]

little mask that's masking this colored

[159:43]

background and creating this little

[159:45]

picture frame. I'll take that border

[159:47]

width down a little bit. Something like

[159:49]

that. And I think I'll just work on a

[159:51]

little bit of this shot. Let's just go

[159:53]

to the edit page and just trim this real

[159:55]

quick just because we're playing around

[159:56]

with it. Let's make it easy on

[159:58]

ourselves. Just do a little bit of this.

[160:01]

That's going to adjust the trim points

[160:03]

here. And I can zoom in this little bar

[160:06]

so that we're only looking at the part

[160:08]

in between the yellow markers in and out

[160:10]

of this comp. And one thing we could do

[160:13]

would be to key frame the rectangle mask

[160:16]

here. And so I could end it right here

[160:18]

and adjust the center. And I could kind

[160:21]

of just key frame this

[160:24]

so that it sort of follows her sort of

[160:27]

in the middle here. I'm going to add

[160:28]

another key frame. Just move this over.

[160:30]

Sort of in the middle of that. move that

[160:32]

over like this. So now we have this kind

[160:35]

of following her as she rides. And that

[160:40]

works fine. The other way that we could

[160:41]

do this would be to track the motion. So

[160:44]

depending on what you're doing, this

[160:46]

could be more or less work. I'm going to

[160:48]

double click here in the empty space.

[160:49]

And you can hit shift and spacebar and

[160:51]

that's going to bring up a menu that

[160:53]

will let you select all of the 37ome

[160:56]

nodes inside of Fusion. There are a ton.

[160:59]

Look at that. It's crazy. But I'm going

[161:00]

to type tracker. That's going to bring

[161:02]

up this tracker node. I'll select that

[161:04]

and hit add. And you can take your

[161:06]

original footage here. I can just copy

[161:09]

and paste this. Crl + C. Double click

[161:10]

off. Ctrl +V. I'll just move this up

[161:12]

here and put this into the tracker.

[161:14]

Let's just look at this here on the

[161:15]

right. And this tracker, what that does

[161:18]

is it will lock on to a feature in your

[161:21]

image and it will follow it. And so we

[161:24]

can grab this little target thing here.

[161:27]

Let's just go to the beginning of our

[161:28]

clip here. Let's take this Intelllet

[161:30]

track and put that right on top of our

[161:32]

leading lady here. And let's track that

[161:36]

forward using this button right here.

[161:37]

What that's going to do is stick that

[161:39]

tracker to her as she rides by. It's

[161:43]

going to track that motion. It's

[161:45]

basically doing some key frames for us

[161:47]

here. And once we have that, then we can

[161:49]

do a bunch of different things with this

[161:50]

tracker. One thing we could do would be

[161:52]

to maybe take some text or something and

[161:55]

plug that into the green foreground

[161:57]

input of this tracker and say, you know,

[161:59]

text like this, select this tracker, go

[162:02]

over to operation, and here where it

[162:04]

says operation none, switch it to match

[162:06]

move. And what that's going to do is put

[162:08]

some text here. And I can select the

[162:09]

text, put this right where it's supposed

[162:11]

to be, and watch what happens here. This

[162:14]

text will follow her as she rides her

[162:16]

bike. Isn't that awesome? And so if you

[162:19]

need to stick something to something,

[162:20]

you can use a tracker to do it. So we're

[162:22]

kind of using this tracker like a merge

[162:24]

node, but it will animate the

[162:26]

foreground. Now, we don't have to

[162:28]

include the background here. We can

[162:29]

select this tracker, go to operation,

[162:31]

mesh move, and then merge. Instead of

[162:32]

foreground over background, let's just

[162:34]

say foreground only. That's going to

[162:36]

give us just the text in its own kind of

[162:38]

isolated layer, but it has the same

[162:40]

movement. So we could put this into the

[162:43]

foreground as a separate thing. Then we

[162:45]

have the tracker as a separate thing and

[162:46]

then the merge as a separate thing,

[162:50]

right? So it kind of gives us the same

[162:51]

idea, but there's the text. Now, what's

[162:54]

cool about this cool about nodes here is

[162:56]

that we don't have any effects applied

[162:58]

to anything specifically. We're just

[163:00]

running it through this effect, so it's

[163:01]

always modular. So I could take this

[163:03]

text out and I could take my rectangle

[163:04]

background, plug that into the green

[163:06]

input right there, and I'll adjust this

[163:08]

rectangle here. Let's actually reset our

[163:10]

center. I'm just double clicking on that

[163:12]

center here. I'm going to put this

[163:13]

around her. Look at this. Now it follows

[163:16]

her because it's running through that

[163:18]

tracker. Okay, so we're tracking the

[163:22]

bike and we're moving along with it.

[163:25]

Now, here's what's really cool. This is

[163:27]

where things just get so awesome. Let's

[163:29]

take all of this and move it to the

[163:32]

right here a little bit. Just make a

[163:33]

little bit of room. We could take this

[163:35]

same kind of tracker, which is really

[163:37]

just giving us an image that looks like

[163:39]

this, and we could make sort of a

[163:41]

different version of it, and we can use

[163:43]

it as a mask. So, we could do something

[163:47]

like I could just copy and paste this.

[163:49]

Ctrl + C, double click off, Ctrl +V. All

[163:52]

right. So, this is going to be our

[163:54]

frame, our cyan frame. But this one,

[163:57]

let's just drag this up here. Instead of

[163:59]

a cyan frame, let's go to this rectangle

[164:01]

mask and let's check solid and take down

[164:05]

our border width. And that's going to

[164:07]

give us just a solid mask. And we don't

[164:09]

even need the background anymore. We can

[164:10]

get rid of the background here and plug

[164:12]

this into the foreground input of the

[164:13]

tracker. Not the blue input, the

[164:15]

foreground input. And what this will do

[164:17]

is give us a animated mask that we can

[164:21]

use by plugging into the blue input of

[164:24]

something. So, I could take this output

[164:26]

of this tracker, plug this into the blue

[164:27]

input of the color correction, and look

[164:29]

what happens. It's only color correcting

[164:31]

inside of that mask. Isn't that magical?

[164:34]

We could grab this color corrector, go

[164:36]

over to settings, and here we have some

[164:40]

mask settings, and we can select apply

[164:42]

mask inverted like this. And look at

[164:44]

that. Now, it's going to be everywhere

[164:46]

except for in that mask.

[164:49]

And we can connect this to multiple

[164:50]

things. Check this out. I could grab a

[164:52]

blur and make this really blurry

[164:56]

everywhere except for inside of that

[164:58]

mask. So, I could take the same thing. I

[165:00]

could take the output and plug that into

[165:01]

the blue input of the blur. And again,

[165:04]

go to settings, apply mask inverted, and

[165:07]

everything's blurry except for inside of

[165:09]

this.

[165:12]

We can do so much cool stuff.

[165:14]

I could get rid of this color corrector

[165:16]

thing like this. And now it's just sharp

[165:19]

inside of here and blurry everywhere

[165:21]

else. So many cool things you can do.

[165:25]

But don't miss this. You can take the

[165:28]

output of a node and run it into

[165:30]

multiple different nodes. You can use

[165:32]

one node or one mask to mask like 50

[165:35]

different things if you want to. That's

[165:36]

what's so powerful about nodes. I love

[165:38]

it. This is a cool effect. Let's add a

[165:41]

little bit of graphics to it. We can

[165:42]

just grab a text node and just drag this

[165:45]

in here. And we'll call this uh sector

[165:47]

45B

[165:49]

North America.

[165:52]

Sure. And we'll take the output of this

[165:54]

and put this over the output like that.

[165:57]

Just like this. Let's take this text,

[165:59]

switch this maybe to aerial. Let's take

[166:02]

the size down. There we go. We can kind

[166:05]

of put this down here like this. And we

[166:08]

can start making our graphics. We could

[166:11]

animate this right on property like

[166:13]

this. So it looks like it's typed in. So

[166:15]

we could have this come in like right

[166:18]

here. I could animate this right on

[166:20]

property just by clicking that key frame

[166:22]

diamond and have this come up.

[166:25]

Just animate this like this. And now we

[166:29]

have this really cool effect

[166:32]

like that. Now we have like this

[166:35]

predator vision kind of thing. Isn't

[166:37]

that cool? I want to show you something

[166:38]

that's just in the paid version of

[166:40]

Resolve called Magic Mask. Magic Mask is

[166:43]

ridiculous. It is a way that you can

[166:47]

trace out things and animate that trace

[166:50]

without a whole lot of work. So, we can

[166:52]

take this original footage. I'm just

[166:53]

dragging this in here. And I can double

[166:56]

click off and hit shift spacebar and

[166:58]

type magic. Again, this is only in the

[167:00]

paid version of Resolve. And I'll just

[167:02]

hit enter. That's going to make a magic

[167:03]

mask node. I'll drag this over here. And

[167:06]

what I could do is either copy and paste

[167:07]

this media in like I've been doing. Or I

[167:09]

can even take the output of this and

[167:10]

just plug this in like this. All right.

[167:13]

So, it's the same thing as copying and

[167:15]

pasting this media and putting it in

[167:17]

here like that. I could even take this

[167:19]

one over here. Doesn't matter. But I'll

[167:21]

take this one like this. And let's drag

[167:23]

the magic mask in here. And what this

[167:25]

will let us do is you can draw a line

[167:28]

on whatever you want to select. So, I'm

[167:30]

just going to draw a line over her. And

[167:34]

what that's going to do is automatically

[167:35]

try and trace her out. I can hold alt

[167:38]

and get rid of the extra parts. So,

[167:40]

we'll just do kind of a soft mask around

[167:42]

her like this. And then we'll track this

[167:44]

back and forth. So, I'll click this

[167:46]

track back and forth. And it's going to

[167:47]

do a pretty good job of at least kind of

[167:50]

making a blob around her. There isn't a

[167:52]

lot of resolution here. There's a lot of

[167:54]

reasons why this would have a lot of

[167:55]

trouble, but this is actually going to

[167:56]

work out perfectly for what we're trying

[167:58]

to do. I can take the output of this

[168:00]

magic mask and put it on top of this

[168:02]

merge two like this. Let's look at our

[168:04]

media out. And now we have the original

[168:06]

footage layered on top, but only where

[168:08]

that magic mask is tracing it out. So we

[168:11]

could take this magic mask, go to matt,

[168:13]

push up this blur a little bit, and

[168:15]

that's going to make this a little bit

[168:17]

more of kind of a blurry little blob on

[168:19]

top of her. Okay. We could take that and

[168:22]

color correct it like this. Color

[168:26]

corrector like this. And we could maybe

[168:28]

make that bright orange like this. And

[168:32]

now look, we have this kind of

[168:36]

sort of looks like a heat signature kind

[168:39]

of thing where she's going. Isn't that

[168:41]

cool? So cool. Now, this isn't actually

[168:44]

the greatest use for magic mask. This is

[168:46]

just going to kind of work great in this

[168:48]

circumstance. Let's uh let's grab one of

[168:50]

our color clips. I'll just grab clip

[168:51]

106. Maybe put this into Fusion. Make

[168:54]

sure the clip 106 is tagged with our

[168:56]

input color space. Blackmagic Design

[168:59]

6K film Gen 4. Okay. We could run this

[169:02]

through magic mask and we'll just draw

[169:05]

on top of him like this. What that's

[169:07]

going to do is cut him out pretty darn

[169:09]

well. We can track this back and forth.

[169:12]

And now we'll completely cut him out

[169:14]

from the background.

[169:17]

And we can adjust this mat by blurring

[169:19]

it a little bit, maybe eroding it. But

[169:22]

then we can take this and maybe we'll

[169:25]

take this same media and color correct

[169:27]

it. I don't know, we'll color it blue or

[169:29]

something. put this into our media out

[169:32]

and take our magic mask and put it over

[169:34]

everything. And now it'll do a really

[169:37]

good job of separating that subject from

[169:40]

the background. Not only that, but you

[169:42]

can put stuff behind him, you know? So,

[169:44]

if you want to put some text behind him,

[169:46]

let's say,

[169:53]

we can have this behind him because

[169:54]

we're separating those layers. And you

[169:57]

can do this yourself with masks, but it

[169:59]

takes a lot more time and effort to

[170:01]

trace him out. And for certain things,

[170:03]

Magic Mask works really, really well. It

[170:06]

doesn't work perfectly with everything,

[170:07]

but it can really help you save some

[170:08]

time when you're doing things like this.

[170:10]

That said, if you do want to get into

[170:12]

Fusion, I have a whole bunch of videos

[170:13]

for free here on YouTube on how to learn

[170:15]

Fusion, as well as a bunch of courses

[170:17]

that are designed to take you from

[170:18]

somebody who has no idea how Fusion

[170:20]

works to being really comfortable and

[170:22]

using Fusion amazingly. But hopefully

[170:23]

you see the potential of what is

[170:25]

possible in the fusion page of Resolve.

[170:28]

Now let's get into the next fancy page

[170:30]

color. To follow along with this part,

[170:32]

if you have the media, there should be a

[170:34]

folder called color. And what we're

[170:36]

going to do is select and shift select

[170:38]

all of these color clips. Right click on

[170:40]

the first one and say create new

[170:41]

timeline using selected clips. Just like

[170:43]

that. We'll call this color timeline and

[170:47]

hit create.

[170:49]

That's going to put all of these clips

[170:51]

here in order. And this is pretty much

[170:53]

to simulate if you had an edit where you

[170:56]

had all kinds of different clips.

[170:57]

They're all put together in a timeline,

[170:59]

but now you want to make your colors

[171:01]

look good. We'll walk through all the

[171:02]

need to know stuff on the color page in

[171:04]

this timeline. Again, to bring it into

[171:06]

the color page, all you have to do is

[171:08]

click into color and it will bring that

[171:10]

timeline here into the color page. Very

[171:12]

exciting. So, a general overview. The

[171:15]

color page of Resolve is obviously made

[171:17]

for doing color correction. And this is

[171:20]

another one of those interfaces that I

[171:22]

mean there's so much stuff here. It

[171:23]

looks like the helm of a spaceship. And

[171:25]

you could pretty easily just look at it

[171:27]

and be overwhelmed by all the little

[171:28]

buttons and panels and everything. And

[171:30]

this isn't even all of them when you

[171:31]

switch through. I mean, look at this.

[171:33]

It's crazy. Not only can I switch out

[171:35]

these panels, but each panel has several

[171:38]

different panels. It's crazy. The great

[171:41]

news is that you really only need to

[171:42]

know a couple of these little panels.

[171:45]

And we're going to walk through all of

[171:46]

this. And by the end of this section,

[171:47]

you're going to be really familiar with

[171:49]

the color page. If you've ever used a

[171:52]

different editing app before, you might

[171:54]

be used to, you know, having a bunch of

[171:56]

shots in your timeline and then you have

[171:58]

some kind of effect like a color

[171:59]

corrector or color correction effect and

[172:01]

you drag it onto the shots and change

[172:03]

your color. Sort of like you would do

[172:05]

with an effect in the edit page. You

[172:06]

have all these shots. You drag it to the

[172:07]

shot. You click on the shot and then you

[172:09]

have some kind of properties panel or

[172:11]

something where you adjust your color

[172:13]

for the shot. And that would totally

[172:15]

make sense. And there are some color

[172:17]

effects in Resolve that sort of work

[172:19]

that way. But the idea of the color page

[172:21]

in Resolve actually kind of simplifies

[172:24]

the color correction process. You have

[172:26]

multiple shots in your timeline. And

[172:29]

whatever shot you're looking at in the

[172:30]

viewer, whatever shot your playhead is

[172:32]

over, that's the shot that you're

[172:34]

working on, and you're automatically in

[172:36]

color mode. You don't have to drag any

[172:37]

effects to the shot or anything like

[172:38]

that. You're just going to adjust the

[172:40]

colors of each clip as you look at them.

[172:43]

And so even though this looks like a

[172:44]

really complicated interface, the basics

[172:46]

of it are actually really simple. We

[172:48]

have a viewer up here where we can see

[172:50]

the shot that we're working on. We click

[172:53]

on whatever shot we want. Each one of

[172:55]

these thumbnails represents a single

[172:57]

shot in our timeline. And so if we want

[173:00]

to adjust the shot of our actor here, we

[173:03]

just click on his face. And we can play

[173:05]

this back and even loop it like this. So

[173:07]

we have that shot. And as long as we're

[173:10]

looking at it here in the viewer, we can

[173:13]

mess with our color controls. And we're

[173:15]

going to change the colors of that shot

[173:17]

and that shot only. If we want to adjust

[173:20]

another shot, we can switch to that

[173:21]

shot. And now we're adjusting that shot

[173:23]

only. You can really think of this in a

[173:26]

couple main sections. We have our viewer

[173:28]

up here. We have a way to select our

[173:31]

shots. And then we have all of the color

[173:34]

controls. So, this actually is kind of

[173:37]

like the inspector sort of for whatever

[173:39]

shot we want to do our color on. Each of

[173:42]

these little panels down here is called

[173:43]

a color palette. And we use the color

[173:45]

palettes to adjust the color on whatever

[173:47]

shot we're working on. We also have a

[173:49]

graph up here. And this is also a node

[173:52]

graph. Although the nodes in the color

[173:55]

page are slightly more simple. They're

[173:57]

the same in that they're little boxes

[173:59]

and they connect to each other and one

[174:01]

box comes after another box and the

[174:04]

nodes flow in order. So if I were to in

[174:07]

this first node make this black and

[174:08]

white and then in the second node make

[174:10]

it pink. In the third node we're

[174:12]

starting with a pinkish purple image. If

[174:15]

I were to do this the other way and make

[174:17]

this really pink and then turn it black

[174:20]

and white, we have a black and white

[174:22]

image because the order matters. The big

[174:25]

difference with these nodes compared to

[174:27]

the fusion nodes is that while fusion

[174:29]

nodes really only have one job and if

[174:31]

you want to do something different you

[174:32]

have to use a different kind of node,

[174:34]

each color node is really like a group

[174:37]

of corrections. So this first node I can

[174:40]

do a bunch of stuff down here in my

[174:43]

color palettes and it all lives in this

[174:45]

one node. So I could make a curve like

[174:48]

this. I could turn it green. I can mess

[174:51]

with all kinds of crazy stuff here. And

[174:53]

this all lives in this one node. If I

[174:56]

rightclick and say add node, add serial,

[174:58]

that's going to make another node in a

[175:00]

series after this node. And so I'm

[175:03]

starting with the image that this node

[175:04]

gave me. So if I desaturate it, and then

[175:08]

maybe I add a little bit more contrast,

[175:10]

then that correction is going to happen

[175:12]

after this first correction. I can click

[175:14]

on the number of the node to turn it off

[175:16]

and on. And so I can quickly see what my

[175:19]

image looks like with or without certain

[175:21]

corrections. That's a really nice way to

[175:23]

work. And so all of the corrections and

[175:26]

all of the work that I'm doing down here

[175:28]

lives in a node of some kind. And we can

[175:30]

have as many nodes as we want. And it's

[175:32]

really up to us to figure out how we

[175:35]

want to group those corrections. For

[175:37]

instance, some people like to adjust the

[175:39]

brightness in the first node. And I can

[175:41]

hit Alt S to add another node here. And

[175:43]

maybe in this second one, they like to

[175:44]

adjust the contrast.

[175:47]

Alt S. Maybe in this third one they want

[175:49]

to adjust the temperature or the tint or

[175:51]

whatever and make something warmer or

[175:53]

darker. And even though you could do all

[175:55]

of this in one node, it's nice to split

[175:58]

it up into three different parts so that

[176:00]

you can see what it looks like without

[176:02]

the exposure or without the contrast or

[176:05]

without the warmness. You can rightclick

[176:07]

and select node label to rename this. So

[176:10]

this could be warm, this could be

[176:12]

contrast, and this could be exposure.

[176:16]

And you can kind of split this up into

[176:17]

different jobs. There's no right or

[176:19]

wrong way to do this. It's really up to

[176:20]

you to stay organized and to do things

[176:22]

how you want. You can always reset a

[176:24]

clip's color by right-clicking in the

[176:26]

empty space and saying reset all grades

[176:28]

and nodes. That's going to reset

[176:30]

everything. And when a clip doesn't have

[176:32]

any color adjustments on it, its number

[176:35]

is gray. As soon as we touch something,

[176:38]

its number turns rainbow. That's how we

[176:41]

know that we've changed some kind of

[176:43]

color in this clip. So, it's really easy

[176:45]

to see the clips that you haven't

[176:46]

changed and the clips that you have. So,

[176:50]

the color page, just like the other

[176:51]

pages, uses the edit timeline. So, this

[176:54]

is the same timeline from our edit page.

[176:56]

It's our current timeline that we have

[176:57]

up. And any color that we do in the

[176:59]

color page happens by looking at the

[177:01]

image that we want to adjust, which

[177:03]

automatically selects it down here on

[177:05]

our thumbnail timeline. We can do any

[177:08]

kind of adjustments we want down here

[177:09]

with the color palettes. All of those

[177:12]

adjustments live in the nodes. And then

[177:14]

whatever our image looks like here in

[177:15]

the color page, it will also look that

[177:17]

way in the edit page. Again, without any

[177:20]

kind of roundt tripping or rendering or

[177:22]

converting things or anything like that.

[177:23]

So the idea is that we can quickly go

[177:25]

through our entire edit and we can make

[177:27]

all the colors look exactly how we want,

[177:30]

make everything look really good, and

[177:33]

that all lives on our timeline, and we

[177:35]

can export our edit with our color

[177:36]

applied. Now, we're going to get into

[177:39]

the major color palettes down here. The

[177:41]

stuff that you really need to know here

[177:42]

in just a minute. But first, we got to

[177:44]

build a little bit of foundation here.

[177:47]

We got to talk about it. Color

[177:48]

management. Let's take a look at this

[177:50]

shot here. I'll just bring this up full

[177:52]

screen. And there's a couple things to

[177:54]

notice about this shot. This was shot on

[177:56]

a Blackmagic Pocket Cinema Camera 6K. If

[177:59]

you don't know what the heck that camera

[178:00]

is or you don't care, it's no big deal.

[178:03]

But the way this camera shoots, and much

[178:06]

like a lot of professional cameras these

[178:07]

days, this shoots in a log format. Now,

[178:10]

what the heck does that mean? Log is

[178:12]

basically a way for a camera to capture

[178:14]

more colors and more ranges of

[178:16]

brightness by kind of desaturating and

[178:19]

decontrasting the image. There's a lot

[178:21]

of technical mumbo jumbo here that I'll

[178:23]

cover in another video at some point,

[178:24]

but basically what happens is to get the

[178:27]

very most data packed into the video

[178:29]

signal, what the camera does is it makes

[178:31]

the blacks not as black, it makes the

[178:33]

whites not as white, and it makes the

[178:35]

colors not as colorful. And we end up

[178:37]

with this kind of gray nasty looking

[178:39]

image. And so this image has a lot of

[178:42]

potential. It could look really good,

[178:44]

but right now it doesn't look very good.

[178:46]

It's sort of like if you're going

[178:47]

camping and you buy the world's greatest

[178:49]

tent. It comes in a box and the tent is

[178:52]

all rolled up in a bag and it's all kind

[178:53]

of crushed in. It could be the best tent

[178:56]

in the world, but right now it kind of

[178:57]

looks like a box with a bunch of fabric

[178:59]

stuffed in it. So, in order to actually

[179:02]

go camping and have a good time, you

[179:03]

have to take that tent out of the box

[179:06]

and spread it out and based on the

[179:09]

instructions, set up the tent so that it

[179:11]

looks right. That's kind of the same

[179:13]

thing that we need to do with this

[179:15]

image. All the information that the

[179:17]

camera saw is kind of crushed down into

[179:20]

this gray nasty looking image. And what

[179:22]

we need to do is follow the right

[179:24]

instructions from the camera to unpack

[179:26]

this image and make it look nice again.

[179:28]

That process is called color management.

[179:31]

It's pretty much for any kind of image

[179:33]

format that isn't Rex 709. What does Rex

[179:36]

709 mean? REX 709 is the color space,

[179:39]

the kind of image colors that look good

[179:42]

on your screen. So, for instance, this

[179:44]

video that you're watching right here is

[179:46]

in Rex 709. My skin is saturated.

[179:49]

There's good contrast and everything

[179:50]

like that, but without any color

[179:52]

management, it looks a little bit more

[179:54]

like this, which is kind of desaturated.

[179:56]

The colors aren't as bright. And so,

[179:57]

there needs to be this step. Takes our

[179:59]

image from gray nasty looking to

[180:01]

actually looking good. And so, this

[180:03]

image right now is Rex 709. and it

[180:06]

doesn't need any color management. It

[180:07]

doesn't need to be changed into a format

[180:09]

that looks good on your screen. It

[180:10]

already looks good. Whereas this footage

[180:12]

doesn't look good out of the box. We

[180:14]

need to convert it. Now, what some

[180:17]

people will do and what has been done

[180:18]

for a long time is somebody will look at

[180:21]

this shot and say, you know, I know what

[180:23]

this shot needs. It needs a little bit

[180:25]

more contrast and it needs a little bit

[180:27]

of saturation. If I add that to this

[180:29]

image, then that's going to look really

[180:31]

good. And so, they might use some color

[180:34]

tools. I'm just going to kind of do this

[180:36]

quickly because we're going to get into

[180:37]

these tools here in just a second. And

[180:39]

they'll up some contrast and they'll up

[180:41]

some saturation. And so they've taken

[180:43]

this image that looks gray and nasty and

[180:45]

made it look good on the screen. But

[180:46]

there's one important part that we

[180:48]

missed here. And that is we didn't

[180:50]

follow the instructions. So this is like

[180:53]

taking our tent that's all packed up and

[180:55]

then just kind of spreading it out and

[180:57]

trying to put it together just

[180:58]

willy-nilly. It might work and it might

[181:02]

be a good tent, but a couple things are

[181:04]

going to happen. Is one, it's probably

[181:05]

not going to be exactly right. And two,

[181:08]

it's going to take a lot of time. And

[181:10]

also, I'm sort of just guessing how

[181:14]

bright things should be. I'm just kind

[181:15]

of looking on my screen and saying, "Oh,

[181:18]

yeah. Okay, this white should be about

[181:20]

that white, and this black should be

[181:22]

about that black, and these colors

[181:24]

should be about that bright." And if I'm

[181:26]

being honest, I don't really have any

[181:28]

idea of if they are supposed to be that

[181:30]

bright, if this wall is supposed to be

[181:32]

bright white or not. I can guess, but

[181:34]

I'm not really going to know. And so,

[181:36]

basically, I'm taking a bunch of time to

[181:38]

kind of guess how the color should look.

[181:40]

And so, what we do instead of manually

[181:43]

color correcting this is we use color

[181:45]

management. Color management takes the

[181:48]

instructions from the camera that

[181:50]

recorded this image and made it look

[181:52]

gray and it kind of reverses those

[181:54]

instructions to sort of unpack that tent

[181:57]

and set it up perfectly so that it looks

[182:00]

exactly how it was intended to look. So,

[182:03]

how the heck does that work? Well, we

[182:04]

kind of touched on this earlier in the

[182:06]

Fusion portion of this video, but what

[182:09]

we got to do is go to our media pool and

[182:10]

let's right click on our color timeline

[182:12]

and go to timelines, timeline settings.

[182:14]

I'm going to uncheck use project

[182:16]

settings and go over to color. For this

[182:18]

color science, the default color

[182:20]

science, which is basically just how

[182:22]

Resolve thinks about colors is called Da

[182:24]

Vinci YGB. What that basically means is

[182:27]

that it's not going to mess with your

[182:29]

colors in any way. All of it's going to

[182:31]

be manual. Anything that you do is going

[182:33]

to be manual adjusting sliders and

[182:35]

buttons and things like that. So,

[182:37]

instead of that, we're going to switch

[182:38]

this from Da Vinci YGB to Da Vinci YGB

[182:41]

color managed. What that's going to do

[182:43]

is do its best to look up the

[182:46]

instructions that cameras use to make

[182:48]

those log images and it's going to apply

[182:52]

kind of reverse math to those

[182:54]

instructions to make the images look

[182:56]

good. Now, if you're not that into this,

[182:58]

you can absolutely just say Da Vinci RGB

[183:00]

color managed and then hit okay. What's

[183:03]

going to actually be slightly better is

[183:05]

if you go to Da Vinci RGB color manage,

[183:07]

uncheck automatic color management.

[183:10]

Right here where it says color

[183:11]

processing mode, switch this to HDR, Da

[183:13]

Vinci widegamut intermediate. This is

[183:17]

going to basically do the same thing as

[183:19]

automatic color management. It's just

[183:21]

going to be a little higher quality. If

[183:23]

you have questions about that, if you

[183:24]

want me to dive into it, let me know.

[183:26]

But we can switch it to this. All you

[183:27]

have to do is make your settings look

[183:29]

like this and then hit okay. Now,

[183:32]

nothing is going to happen by default.

[183:35]

All we've done is just told Resolve,

[183:37]

"Hey, we're going to use some color

[183:38]

management." And it said, "Okay, these

[183:42]

images still look gray and washed out

[183:44]

because we haven't told Resolve how we

[183:48]

shot these images. We haven't told it

[183:50]

what camera we used. So, what we can do

[183:53]

is go up to our media pool and we can

[183:56]

shift select all of our images that are

[183:58]

from the same camera. And I can right

[184:00]

click on any of them and go down to

[184:02]

input color space. This is where we tell

[184:05]

it what camera we used. So there are a

[184:07]

whole list of different cameras. If

[184:09]

you're shooting on an iPhone like a 15

[184:11]

or 16 Pro, something like that, you can

[184:13]

select Apple log. There's Blackmagic

[184:16]

Design cameras. There's Canon cameras,

[184:18]

Nikon, Leica, Samsung, Sony, all kinds

[184:21]

of different cameras here. This was shot

[184:23]

on a Blackmagic Design camera. We shot

[184:26]

this on Blackmagic Design Pocket 6K and

[184:29]

the color science was film Gen 4. Now,

[184:32]

how the heck do I know that? Well, we

[184:35]

wrote it down when we shot it. Odds are,

[184:38]

if you have a professional camera of

[184:40]

some kind, there is a way to look up the

[184:42]

color science. You can Google, "How do I

[184:44]

look up the color science for whatever

[184:45]

your camera is?" It's usually in your

[184:48]

menus under picture styles or something

[184:50]

like that. And chances are, if you have

[184:52]

a professional camera, you probably

[184:54]

bought it for that reason anyway. So,

[184:56]

however you shot this footage, that's

[184:59]

what you tag this as. If you don't know

[185:02]

how you shot the footage, you should go

[185:04]

and try and figure it out because the

[185:06]

only way to do this the right way is to

[185:08]

actually know. All right, Blackmagic

[185:11]

Design Pocket 6K Gen Film Gen 4. And

[185:14]

look what happens when I click this.

[185:16]

Boom.

[185:17]

Now we have footage that looks correct.

[185:22]

So this has good contrast, good

[185:24]

saturation. The images don't look

[185:26]

perfect. We can still make them look

[185:28]

better. There's still some style we want

[185:30]

to add, but it doesn't look halfway

[185:32]

black and white like it did. This

[185:34]

actually looks as scientifically close

[185:36]

as it can possibly be to how the colors

[185:39]

looked in real life when we shot this

[185:42]

footage. And you'll notice that I didn't

[185:44]

tweak any sliders. I didn't move

[185:46]

anything up and down. I didn't change

[185:47]

anything around. All I did was enable

[185:50]

color management and then go to my

[185:52]

footage and tell Resolve what color

[185:53]

science I used. Blackmagic Design Pocket

[185:56]

6K film Gen 4. And that gives us a great

[185:59]

starting point for our color correction.

[186:01]

It really kind of gives us the best of

[186:03]

both worlds. We have all this

[186:04]

information that we packed in when we

[186:07]

recorded the footage and we're unpacking

[186:09]

it scientifically so that we can have

[186:12]

the most information and work in the

[186:14]

highest quality possible when it comes

[186:15]

to adjusting our colors. Color

[186:18]

management is a just a massively huge

[186:20]

topic, but it's honestly not that much

[186:23]

more complicated than this. In Resolve

[186:25]

20, they've made color management a lot

[186:26]

easier. You just enable it in your

[186:28]

timeline settings under color. Make sure

[186:30]

you have these settings. Any footage

[186:32]

that you have that's log, you rightclick

[186:35]

input color space and select the color

[186:36]

space that you used. If you don't know

[186:38]

the color space or it's footage that

[186:41]

wasn't shot in log, then you can just

[186:43]

set your input color space to same as

[186:45]

timeline or project Rexto9 and it's not

[186:48]

really going to do any tweaks to your

[186:50]

colors. It's just going to try and leave

[186:52]

them alone. But do yourself a favor and

[186:54]

don't skip this step. Color management

[186:56]

is essential for getting good color

[186:58]

grades. It gives you a higher quality

[187:00]

image at the end and it saves you a

[187:02]

bunch of time because I don't have to go

[187:04]

through and make all of these look

[187:05]

normal before I even start thinking

[187:07]

about how to make them look really

[187:08]

great. I can just start with the normal

[187:10]

image and be on my way. So, now that we

[187:12]

have our color management set up and

[187:14]

everything is ready for us, let's jump

[187:16]

into what the heck we do in the color

[187:19]

page. Let's just pick a shot. Maybe this

[187:21]

shot number eight here. And let's just

[187:23]

have a look at how we would adjust an

[187:26]

image just so we have a little bit more

[187:28]

room. I'm going to close my clips and my

[187:30]

timeline panels just so we have some

[187:32]

room here. Maybe even close my effects.

[187:34]

Sure. I'll even zoom in and crop this a

[187:36]

little bit. And let's talk about how we

[187:37]

would actually adjust an image. Again,

[187:40]

because we're looking at this image in

[187:42]

our viewer, that's the image that we're

[187:44]

going to be adjusting with the color

[187:46]

palette, all of the windows that live

[187:47]

down here. And there are a lot of

[187:49]

different color palettes. Look at this.

[187:51]

We can really just go through a whole

[187:53]

bunch of these things. And the good news

[187:55]

is that you don't need to know all of

[187:56]

them. Really, you only need to know a

[187:58]

couple to do most of the work that you

[188:01]

need to do here in color. And the one

[188:02]

we're going to start with is right here,

[188:05]

this lower left panel called the

[188:07]

primaries. And I'm actually going to

[188:09]

make sure that I'm on this little button

[188:11]

right here. Up here, this should say

[188:12]

primaries color wheels. That's the one.

[188:15]

By the way, if you don't have three

[188:16]

panels here, like one,

[188:19]

two, three, and it's two panels or even

[188:22]

one, and maybe these little icons are

[188:24]

squished together, don't worry about it.

[188:26]

you have the same panels. Almost all of

[188:28]

these panels are in the free version as

[188:30]

well. Again, if something is just in the

[188:32]

paid version, I'm going to tell you, but

[188:34]

sometimes what it will do is squish one

[188:35]

or two of these panels together for

[188:37]

different resolutions on your screen.

[188:39]

So, if you have your scaling or your

[188:41]

resolution set to something different

[188:43]

than mine, it might not quite look like

[188:44]

mine, but you should have the same

[188:46]

panel. So, this primary color wheels

[188:48]

palette, this, I'd say, is where you do

[188:50]

most of the work when you're adjusting

[188:53]

your colors. And even though it looks

[188:54]

like there are a lot of controls,

[188:55]

there's really only three kind of main

[188:57]

controls down here. One is the color

[188:59]

wheel. The other is this little slider

[189:01]

here. The other kind of control are

[189:04]

these little number boxes. And if you've

[189:06]

never used anything like this before, I

[189:07]

want you to do me a favor and just

[189:09]

follow along with me. Open up this image

[189:12]

and grab the center of this color wheel

[189:13]

and just push it around. Just grab it

[189:15]

and drag it. And you can see as you drag

[189:18]

your mouse around, it's going to move

[189:20]

that little dot in the middle of the

[189:21]

wheel away from the center. And the

[189:23]

farther it gets away from that center,

[189:25]

the more color it's going to push into

[189:27]

your image. And the direction that it

[189:29]

pushes is going to be the hue, the color

[189:31]

that is pushed into the image. And so if

[189:33]

I want to make this look very blue, I

[189:35]

take this and move this down to the

[189:36]

lower right a lot. And that makes this

[189:39]

very blue. And so that's like a third of

[189:41]

what you need to know as far as actual

[189:43]

controls down here in the primaries. The

[189:45]

second one, this little slider, this is

[189:47]

called the master wheel. And if you grab

[189:49]

the master wheel and you move your mouse

[189:51]

to the right or to the left, that makes

[189:53]

things brighter to the right or darker

[189:55]

to the left. You can also mouse over

[189:57]

this and scroll with your scroll wheel.

[190:00]

Adjust that. And so just with these two

[190:02]

controls, we can adjust the tint of the

[190:04]

image as well as the brightness. And

[190:06]

this color wheel master wheel combo,

[190:08]

this is just duplicated three more

[190:11]

times. And so it's the same basic kind

[190:12]

of control, but why is this split up

[190:15]

into four parts? Well, what's happening

[190:16]

here is if you move the offset, that's

[190:18]

going to adjust the colors of the entire

[190:21]

image. Same thing for the offset master

[190:23]

wheel. The brightness is going to go up

[190:24]

or down for the entire image. But lift,

[190:27]

gamma, and gain splits the image up into

[190:29]

kind of the darker part, the midtones,

[190:31]

and the brighter parts. And so, which

[190:34]

one you grab depends on what you want to

[190:36]

adjust in the image. And so, if I want

[190:38]

the brighter parts to be more yellow, I

[190:40]

select the gain because that's the

[190:41]

brighter parts. And I push this a little

[190:43]

bit more towards yellow. Now, this is

[190:45]

going to make the entire image a little

[190:47]

bit more yellow, but it's going to be

[190:48]

strongest in the bright parts. So, we

[190:50]

can see how it's really yellow right

[190:52]

here and in here in the brighter parts.

[190:54]

And the parts that are black are maybe

[190:56]

just a little yellow, but not super

[190:57]

yellow like these brights. If I were to

[190:59]

do the same thing, take the lift, which

[191:01]

is the darkest parts, and push those

[191:03]

towards yellow. We'll see we're starting

[191:04]

to really tint the darker parts of the

[191:06]

image, but the brighter parts right here

[191:08]

stay white. That's because this is

[191:10]

strongest in the darker parts of the

[191:12]

image. And then, as you might imagine,

[191:13]

the gamma, these are the midtones, and

[191:16]

this is going to be strongest in the

[191:17]

medium brightness kind of parts of the

[191:19]

image. So, depending on what you're

[191:20]

going for here, you might choose to

[191:22]

adjust the offset, lift, gamma, or gain

[191:25]

of your image and adjust the color or

[191:28]

the brightness of that part. So, for

[191:30]

instance, if I want to make the bright

[191:31]

parts brighter, I can go to the gain and

[191:33]

take this master wheel and drag it to

[191:36]

the right, and that's going to make the

[191:37]

brighter parts brighter. The darker

[191:39]

parts are pretty much going to stay kind

[191:40]

of where they are. If I want to make the

[191:42]

darker parts darker, I can go to lift

[191:45]

and take that master wheel and take it

[191:47]

to the left. And that's going to make

[191:48]

the darker parts darker. And I can go

[191:50]

really, really crazy on this. And that's

[191:51]

going to darken the darker parts. But

[191:53]

look, the bright parts stay the same. So

[191:55]

if I want to do something like give this

[191:57]

image more contrast, one thing I can do

[191:59]

is take the bright parts and push them

[192:01]

to the right to brighten that up and the

[192:03]

dark parts and push it to the left.

[192:05]

That's going to give this more contrast.

[192:07]

And again, all of these adjustments,

[192:08]

anything that I do down here lives in

[192:11]

this node. So I could turn this node off

[192:12]

and on to see what's happening. So I'm

[192:14]

just upping that contrast by pushing the

[192:16]

gain up and the lift down in their

[192:19]

master wheels. If I want to reset

[192:20]

anything that's happening in the

[192:21]

primaries, I can click this little reset

[192:23]

button. I can also rightclick on this

[192:25]

node and say reset node grade. That will

[192:27]

reset anything that is done in this

[192:29]

node. If I want to boost up the

[192:31]

brightness of kind of medium tones right

[192:33]

here, I can take the gamma and push that

[192:35]

up. That's going to leave the bright

[192:37]

parts about where they are and the dark

[192:38]

parts about where they are and push up

[192:40]

the midtones. So, what we've gone over

[192:41]

here pretty much covers all of this

[192:43]

panel. These little numbers, these

[192:46]

little controls here, these are called

[192:47]

the primary controls. And the primary

[192:49]

controls are other kind of little

[192:51]

specific things about the image. So, for

[192:53]

instance, there is a contrast control.

[192:55]

So, this is another way that I can put

[192:57]

some contrast into the image. I can take

[192:58]

this contrast and drag it to the right.

[193:00]

And that again is going to make the

[193:01]

darker parts dark and the brighter parts

[193:03]

brighter. The pivot adjusts kind of the

[193:06]

split between what it thinks is dark

[193:08]

versus light. So if I push this pivot to

[193:10]

the left, it's going to think more

[193:11]

things are bright. If I push it to the

[193:13]

right, it's going to think more things

[193:14]

are dark. And so I can use this contrast

[193:16]

and pivot to dial in the contrast of my

[193:18]

image to be exactly how I want. And that

[193:21]

might be a little bit more easy than

[193:23]

pushing up the gain and the pushing down

[193:25]

the lift. We also have temperature and

[193:26]

tint, which is an easy way to adjust

[193:29]

something like white balance. Or if I

[193:31]

want this whole thing to feel a little

[193:32]

bit more cool, I can take the

[193:34]

temperature and just grab that and push

[193:36]

that to the left. And now kind of a blue

[193:37]

tone. And I can balance it between green

[193:39]

and magenta like this. I can warm it up

[193:42]

by bringing the temperature to the

[193:43]

right. And I can double click on any of

[193:45]

these to reset them. Down below I have

[193:47]

some more controls. Shadows are the

[193:49]

darker midtones of the image. Highlights

[193:51]

are the brighter midtones of the image.

[193:53]

So it's almost like you have a master

[193:55]

wheel kind of between the lift and gamma

[193:57]

and the gamma and gain. That's what goes

[193:59]

right here. We have the saturation of

[194:01]

the whole image. So that's how strong

[194:02]

the colors are. If I take this and drag

[194:04]

it all the way to the right, we have

[194:05]

very punchy colors. Hue is what actual

[194:08]

color things are. Pretty rarely use that

[194:10]

unless you're trying to actually change

[194:11]

the color of something. Color boost is

[194:13]

like saturation except for it targets

[194:16]

the things that are less saturated. And

[194:18]

so if you want to saturate the things

[194:19]

that are less saturated, you could push

[194:21]

up the color boost a little bit. And

[194:22]

there are a few other buttons and

[194:23]

sliders here that you can learn at some

[194:25]

point, but these are the main ones.

[194:26]

lift, gamma, gain, offset, saturation,

[194:29]

temp, tint, contrast, color boost. Those

[194:31]

are the big ones. And the cool thing is

[194:33]

that just understanding this part of

[194:35]

this panel, you can do so much. You can

[194:37]

really make your colors look good for

[194:40]

your movie. I mean, this is seriously,

[194:41]

this is all you need. This combined with

[194:43]

color management, there's no reason why

[194:46]

you can't correct your shots and make

[194:48]

them look really nice. So, here's what I

[194:50]

want you to do right now. Find this clip

[194:52]

and I want you to play around with the

[194:54]

primaries. make this shot look as good

[194:56]

as you can just using the primaries

[194:58]

palette. So, one thing that I might do

[195:00]

is just push a little bit of contrast in

[195:01]

here. I might maybe push up the offset a

[195:04]

little bit. Maybe I'll take the

[195:05]

temperature a little bit more blue. I

[195:07]

can push and pull this contrast, adjust

[195:09]

the pivot a little bit. Maybe push up

[195:10]

some saturation. Maybe we'll push some

[195:13]

color boost instead. Something like

[195:15]

that. Maybe take that offset up just a

[195:17]

little bit. And so now we have a really

[195:18]

nice looking image here. Has some

[195:20]

contrast. We have some blue coming in

[195:22]

from the windows. We have some warm on

[195:23]

her face. overall looks pretty nice.

[195:26]

This really is the Swiss Army knife of

[195:28]

the color page. If you learn just the

[195:31]

primary color wheels, I'm telling you,

[195:33]

it's so powerful cuz check this out. We

[195:35]

can go to any shot. I'm just hitting

[195:37]

down on the keyboard. Sure. Let's grab

[195:39]

this shot here where he's zipping up the

[195:40]

backpack. We can adjust this. Maybe

[195:42]

we'll take the gain down a little bit.

[195:44]

Push the gamma up. Put a little contrast

[195:46]

in there. Maybe a little saturation just

[195:48]

to make this look really nice. Maybe

[195:50]

it's a little bit too warm. We could

[195:52]

take the temperature down. Make that

[195:54]

temperature a little bit more blue.

[195:55]

Yeah, something like that. And we can

[195:56]

have a nice looking shot. Here's before,

[195:59]

which was just way too bright. After

[196:02]

looks good. Here's this shot right here,

[196:04]

which kind of feels gray and a little

[196:06]

bit dark and maybe a little bit green.

[196:08]

Maybe we'll take this offset up a little

[196:10]

bit. Push some saturation in there.

[196:12]

Maybe take this away from green a little

[196:14]

bit. Just push this tint a little bit.

[196:16]

Maybe take the temperature a little bit

[196:18]

blue just to balance out those whites a

[196:20]

little bit. Maybe add a little contrast.

[196:23]

Play with the pivot a little bit. And

[196:25]

here is before and here's after. See

[196:27]

that difference? Isn't that amazing what

[196:29]

we can do just with this one panel?

[196:31]

Isn't that nuts? This is the kind of

[196:32]

thing that is available to you for free

[196:34]

in Resolve. This is why Resolve is the

[196:37]

king of the color correction apps. It's

[196:39]

the best app in the world for color

[196:40]

correction because all of that power is

[196:42]

right here. Isn't that nuts? You already

[196:45]

know enough to color grade like a whole

[196:47]

movie. Now, is there more that you can

[196:48]

do? Are there more techniques? Are there

[196:50]

more tools? Absolutely. But this primary

[196:52]

color wheel panel, this is the bee's

[196:54]

knees. So, take some time, go through

[196:55]

these shots and see what you can do.

[196:57]

Here's our outside shot again. Maybe we

[197:00]

want to just take the exposure down a

[197:02]

little bit. Maybe add a little contrast.

[197:04]

Maybe brighten this up. I can push the

[197:05]

gain a little bit more orange. We can

[197:07]

have kind of a more of a sunset look

[197:09]

here. Just push this pivot down. Maybe

[197:12]

take this saturation down a touch. And

[197:14]

we can make a really cool look compared

[197:16]

to what we had just using those

[197:17]

primaries. Ah, so cool. Now, I'm going

[197:20]

to rightclick and reset all grades and

[197:22]

nodes right here. Let's talk about the

[197:24]

second most useful palette here on the

[197:25]

color page. And that is the custom

[197:27]

curves. The custom curves right here.

[197:30]

This, if you've used an image editing

[197:32]

app that has curves like this, is going

[197:34]

to feel very familiar. If you haven't,

[197:36]

pretty much how this works is this is a

[197:37]

graph. A graph of the brightnesses of an

[197:40]

image. So, the bottom part here, this is

[197:43]

the input. That's the input

[197:45]

brightnesses. This axis is the output.

[197:49]

down here is black and up here is white

[197:51]

and in the middle is like gray. And so

[197:54]

if I were to find a point from left to

[197:56]

right that's maybe in the middle right

[197:57]

here, this would be the input gray. So

[198:00]

that would be right there on that line.

[198:02]

If I want to make the gray parts

[198:04]

brighter, I would push this line up

[198:07]

because right now it's gray equals gray.

[198:10]

And if I want the gray to be light gray,

[198:12]

I could say gray equals light gray like

[198:14]

that. So I'll just take this and push

[198:16]

this up. And what that will do is push

[198:18]

up the midtones basically. That's maybe

[198:20]

a little strong. So I can push this up

[198:22]

like this. The black parts are down

[198:24]

here. And so I can push the black parts

[198:26]

up. That's going to essentially do the

[198:28]

same thing as my master wheel and my

[198:29]

lift. This upper part is like the master

[198:32]

wheel of my gain. So if I take my gain

[198:34]

up and to the left, that's going to make

[198:36]

more things bright. I can also take this

[198:38]

down and take the brightness of the

[198:39]

bright parts down like that. I can take

[198:42]

this black point and move it to the

[198:43]

right and keep it on the floor. And that

[198:44]

just makes more things black. And so you

[198:46]

have a lot of control over your image

[198:49]

with this curve. So if I want to make

[198:51]

the brighter parts of the image a little

[198:52]

brighter and the darker parts of the

[198:54]

image a little darker, well, I can make

[198:56]

what we call an S-curve. Kind of looks

[198:58]

like an S. And that's going to add a

[199:00]

nice bit of contrast to my image. This

[199:03]

S-curve is pretty much how you get kind

[199:06]

of a filmic contrast. There's always

[199:09]

some kind of version of this curve built

[199:11]

in. And usually you can add a few

[199:13]

different things. You could push up

[199:14]

these blacks a little bit, crush the

[199:16]

lower mid tones down, maybe take

[199:18]

highlights down a little bit, but push

[199:20]

up the upper mid tones. And you have

[199:22]

this nice kind of highlight roll off

[199:23]

there. Maybe even want to crush the

[199:26]

shadows in a little bit more. And so now

[199:28]

we have this nice feeling that's nice

[199:30]

and rich just from this curve. I tell

[199:33]

you what, getting used to using this

[199:34]

curve, oh man, you can make such nice

[199:36]

images. And especially when you combine

[199:38]

this curve with these primary color

[199:40]

wheels, chef's kiss. There are a lot of

[199:42]

controls over here that honestly I don't

[199:44]

use that often, so I'm going to skip

[199:45]

them. This is the important part right

[199:47]

here. You can also use this button right

[199:49]

here to make big old curves. So if you

[199:51]

want to get really detailed with your

[199:53]

curve here, you could totally do that.

[199:54]

But there are also some other kinds of

[199:56]

curves here. Selecting this second

[199:58]

little icon, this will bring us our hue

[200:00]

versus hue curves. Just like this curve

[200:03]

is the input brightnesses versus the

[200:06]

output brightnesses. These other curves

[200:08]

are kind of just other graphs. So this

[200:10]

one is the input hue. So that's the

[200:12]

actual color of the light versus the

[200:14]

output hue. Okay. So if I want to take

[200:17]

stuff that is kind of this reddish part,

[200:19]

I can select the red and maybe I can add

[200:22]

a couple other little control points

[200:23]

here. And if I push the red around, I

[200:26]

can kind of move this back and forth and

[200:27]

just change the reds. So this is great

[200:29]

if you need to change specific color.

[200:32]

You can just kind of target that

[200:34]

specific color here on the chart. And

[200:36]

boom, we have a purple house. It's very

[200:38]

selective. Similarly, we have hue versus

[200:40]

saturation. So you pick the hue that you

[200:43]

want to adjust the saturation for. Maybe

[200:45]

this green. By the way, you can click on

[200:47]

the image when you have these curves up

[200:49]

and it's going to add a control point

[200:51]

for you. So I could click and drag and

[200:53]

just color over where I want to select.

[200:55]

That's going to select all the kind of

[200:56]

yellowish green. And I can take the

[200:58]

saturation down. And so now we have all

[201:00]

of these trees just black and white.

[201:02]

See, here's the difference. It's not

[201:04]

affecting the house too much. It's

[201:05]

mostly this kind of green stuff. We also

[201:07]

have hue versus luminance. So that's

[201:09]

just the brightness of certain hues. So

[201:11]

if I want to darken this backpack, I can

[201:12]

select this backpack and maybe take that

[201:14]

down a little bit in our hue versus

[201:16]

luminance. That can be kind of nice

[201:18]

sometimes. We also have luminance versus

[201:20]

saturation. And so depending on how

[201:22]

bright something is, you can adjust how

[201:24]

saturated it is. And so a little trick

[201:26]

some people use is just to desaturate

[201:29]

anything that's getting close to white

[201:30]

and desaturate anything that's close to

[201:32]

black. And so really we only have

[201:33]

saturation in the midtones. And oftent

[201:35]

times you can add a pretty harsh curve

[201:38]

on this and it doesn't make that big of

[201:40]

a difference unless you have a really

[201:42]

harsh push on it. So if I push this

[201:44]

offset really blue, you can see that

[201:47]

with this curve on it, we don't add too

[201:49]

much blue to the shadows or the

[201:51]

highlights. These are still black and

[201:53]

these are still white. So if I were to

[201:54]

take this out, everything would be blue.

[201:56]

We also have saturation versus

[201:57]

saturation. So if something is more

[201:59]

saturated, we can remap it to be less

[202:01]

saturated and so on. This kind of helps

[202:03]

us kind of keep our saturation problems

[202:05]

under control. We have something that's

[202:07]

just way too bright. Then we have

[202:08]

saturation versus luminance. So if

[202:09]

something's more saturated or less

[202:11]

saturated, you can turn its brightness

[202:12]

up or down. So yeah, if I could only

[202:15]

teach you one panel, it would be the

[202:16]

primaries. If I could only teach you two

[202:18]

panels, it would be the curves and the

[202:19]

primary. And now before we go any

[202:21]

further, I want to stop and talk about

[202:23]

the scopes. This is pretty darn

[202:25]

important when it comes to color

[202:26]

grading. And I don't want you to watch

[202:28]

through the color part of this video and

[202:29]

not know how to read scopes cuz that

[202:31]

would be sad. Down in the lower right,

[202:33]

we have a panel called color scopes. And

[202:35]

you can select the kind of scopes with

[202:36]

this little drop down here. There are a

[202:39]

few different kind of scopes. Parade

[202:40]

waveform, vector scope, histogram, and

[202:43]

CIE chromaticity. We're going to start

[202:46]

with the waveform. And I'm going to put

[202:49]

this into big mode. That'll bring up our

[202:51]

big scopes here. And I'll switch this to

[202:53]

a single scope. And I'll go to this

[202:55]

little menu here. And I'm going to turn

[202:56]

off colorize and switch this to Y mode

[202:59]

just because it's easier for me to

[203:01]

explain some things. This is called a

[203:03]

waveform scope. And the idea of this

[203:06]

scope is that it is a graph of all of

[203:09]

the colors in your image. So every pixel

[203:11]

in your image has a little dot on this

[203:14]

graph somewhere. And on this graph on

[203:16]

the x-axis here, we have the horizontal

[203:18]

position of each pixel. All right? So

[203:21]

that means that a pixel that's over here

[203:23]

on the left is going to be somewhere

[203:25]

here on the left of our scope. A pixel

[203:28]

that's going to be in the middle of our

[203:30]

image is going to be somewhere here in

[203:32]

the middle of our scope. But we really

[203:33]

only care about the horizontal position

[203:35]

here. Why is that? Because the up and

[203:37]

down is the graph of the brightness. So

[203:40]

it's the horizontal position and the

[203:42]

brightness. So, what that means is that

[203:44]

if we had something really bright, let's

[203:46]

actually let's go to a different shot

[203:48]

that's a little bit easier to figure out

[203:50]

here. If we had something that's a

[203:51]

little bit brighter on the left side of

[203:53]

our image, it's going to be on the left

[203:55]

side of our graph and it's going to be

[203:57]

towards the top. So, this bit right

[203:59]

here, this is going to be this kind of

[204:02]

bluish part. It's a little bit towards

[204:04]

the top. It's at about 10% into the

[204:06]

image and it's brighter. So, that is

[204:08]

right here. If we look at our scope, we

[204:10]

also have something on the right side of

[204:12]

the image that's a little bit brighter

[204:14]

than this blue. And it's especially

[204:17]

bright, right? There's like something

[204:18]

really bright right here. Something like

[204:20]

that. And so, let's look at this. Yeah,

[204:22]

there we go. We have this lamp right

[204:25]

here. So, it's really bright right

[204:26]

there. We also have the second lamp,

[204:28]

which is this spike right here. This

[204:30]

lamp is right here. We have something

[204:32]

bright right here. So, that's going to

[204:34]

be this part of his arm. And so we can

[204:36]

kind of tell what the brightness of

[204:38]

things are from this waveform scope.

[204:41]

This graph is from 1023 to 0. What the

[204:44]

heck does that mean? There's technical

[204:45]

reasons. Basically, 1023 is pure white

[204:48]

and 0 is pure black. So if you have an

[204:51]

image with things that should look

[204:53]

bright and things that should look pure

[204:55]

black, you're going to have a signal

[204:57]

that stretches from 0 to 1023. A lot of

[204:59]

things in the real world aren't actually

[205:01]

pure white and pure black. And so oftent

[205:03]

times you'll have stuff that's almost a

[205:05]

zero and maybe somewhere up in here. And

[205:08]

that's in fact what we have right here.

[205:09]

Right here. That's kind of where our

[205:11]

image lives. Let's look at another image

[205:14]

here. Here's one that's a little

[205:15]

brighter. You'll see we have this big

[205:17]

kind of purple blanket here that's

[205:19]

somewhat darker. That's right here in

[205:22]

our signal. We have brighter parts. This

[205:25]

little edge right here. This kind of

[205:27]

bright part. This bright part. That's

[205:30]

right here. We have his shirt, which is

[205:32]

going to be hereish. And once you go

[205:34]

through a few different shots, you can

[205:35]

start to be able to read the scope a

[205:37]

little better. Here in this shot, we

[205:38]

have this really bright part here.

[205:40]

That's this. This waveform scope is

[205:43]

great for knowing the brightnesses of

[205:45]

things. But what's even more helpful is

[205:47]

the parade. So, we can switch from

[205:49]

waveform to parade. And what that is is

[205:51]

basically three waveform scopes next to

[205:53]

each other. One for the red channel, one

[205:55]

for the green channel, and one for the

[205:56]

blue channel. All images are made up of

[205:59]

a combination of red, green, and blue

[206:00]

light. And the percentage of light in

[206:02]

each channel determines what color

[206:04]

things are going to be. If you have

[206:05]

equal parts red, green, and blue light,

[206:07]

that makes a neutral color like gray or

[206:10]

white or black. So, what's cool about

[206:12]

this is if we can find something that's

[206:13]

supposed to be relatively neutral, let's

[206:15]

say this pavement right here, we can

[206:17]

find that on the scope, which is going

[206:19]

to be right here, and we can balance

[206:21]

that using our color wheels to kind of

[206:23]

fix the white balance. So, if this came

[206:24]

in like this, we would know that this is

[206:27]

a little bit tinted blue because if this

[206:30]

is assuming this is supposed to be gray,

[206:31]

which you honestly don't know, but it's

[206:32]

probably going to be pretty close to

[206:34]

gray, this signal should be equal across

[206:37]

these channels. And so, if I can adjust

[206:40]

this offset and make that signal equal,

[206:43]

then the image is going to look

[206:44]

balanced. Like here, let's try another

[206:46]

shot. If we wanted to white balance to

[206:48]

this wall, we can pick the wall here in

[206:50]

our signals and we can balance that out.

[206:53]

Right now, the red channel is a little

[206:55]

bit higher than the green channel, and

[206:58]

the blue channel is a little bit higher

[206:59]

than the green channel. So, what this

[207:00]

means is this is going to look just a

[207:02]

little bit pink. Now, it's hard to tell

[207:04]

just by looking at that image, which is

[207:06]

honestly why we have the scopes, but I

[207:07]

can take this offset and I can push this

[207:09]

around until, and I just need to do it a

[207:12]

little bit until these are right about

[207:14]

equal. And now this is going to be a

[207:16]

neutral color. That's going to be a

[207:19]

gray. We could also do this for the

[207:20]

window, which we can tell just by

[207:23]

looking at it is a little bit blue, but

[207:24]

we can confirm it with this signal right

[207:26]

here. Red, green, blue. If you have blue

[207:28]

higher than red and green, it's going to

[207:31]

have more blue light, which means it's

[207:33]

going to be tinted blue. Actually, a

[207:35]

little bit more cyan because the green

[207:36]

is high, too. So, again, we can take

[207:38]

this offset and we can move this around

[207:40]

like this. And if we move this around

[207:42]

and just balance those signals, then we

[207:46]

can balance those out. And now this is

[207:49]

like a neutral white. Okay, it's like a

[207:52]

neutral bright gray. Everything else is

[207:54]

thrown off though because this is more

[207:56]

of a blue light that's coming into the

[207:58]

window and the white neutral light is

[208:00]

more on our subject. And so when we

[208:02]

balance this to white, everything else

[208:04]

kind of turns yellow. So I'll just reset

[208:06]

that. We can look at this again. We have

[208:07]

this is blue. This is maybe just

[208:09]

slightly magenta. So depending on if we

[208:12]

think either of these should be white,

[208:13]

then we can balance to that if we want

[208:15]

to. I can also use my temperature and

[208:16]

tint to kind of balance it a little bit.

[208:18]

Sure, something like that might be a

[208:20]

little bit more accurate to an actual

[208:22]

balance here. Kind of depends on how you

[208:24]

want it to look. By the way, it's not

[208:26]

totally essential that you get

[208:28]

everything perfectly neutally balanced.

[208:30]

What's important is that the image looks

[208:32]

how you want it to look. Okay, that's

[208:33]

kind of the bottom line when it comes to

[208:35]

color correction. If anybody tells you

[208:37]

that you need to balance everything and

[208:39]

that everything should have pure bright

[208:40]

whites, completely neutral whites,

[208:42]

that's not necessarily true. Sometimes

[208:45]

the style that you're going for or the

[208:47]

feeling that you might want to go for in

[208:49]

your movie or something that your client

[208:51]

might want would be pure neutral whites.

[208:53]

Then in that case, yes, you should make

[208:55]

everything pure neutral white. But

[208:56]

that's not like a universal thing that

[208:58]

you need to do for every video. In fact,

[209:00]

pretty much look at any movie and you'll

[209:02]

see there's usually some kind of tint to

[209:03]

it. It's not always purely beautifully

[209:06]

white balanced. There's a little bit of

[209:07]

style there. The other major scope that

[209:09]

we can talk about here is the vector

[209:11]

scope. You can think of this like a big

[209:12]

color wheel. The closer this signal is

[209:15]

to the middle, the less saturated it is.

[209:17]

The farther it goes out, the more

[209:19]

saturated it is. And the direction is

[209:22]

the hue. So if we had stuff kind of

[209:24]

coming over here towards this B, that's

[209:26]

going to be really saturated blue.

[209:28]

Something up here towards this red is

[209:29]

going to be really saturated red. So you

[209:31]

can really tell what colors are in your

[209:32]

image just by looking at this vector

[209:34]

scope. So just looking at this, we can

[209:36]

see we have a little bit of orange and a

[209:38]

little bit of red. And guess what? Skin

[209:40]

is basically light orange. And then we

[209:42]

have this red. We also have just a

[209:44]

little bit of this kind of cyan blue,

[209:46]

which is obviously right here.

[209:47]

Everything else is somewhat neutral. If

[209:49]

we push the saturation up a lot, we can

[209:52]

see that this image kind of grows and

[209:54]

now we have really saturated stuff.

[209:56]

Generally, you have this invisible line

[209:59]

in between these targets. This right

[210:01]

here is like pure magenta, pure blue,

[210:03]

pure cyan, pure green, pure yellow, and

[210:05]

pure red. And usually, you don't want

[210:07]

your signal even touching these things

[210:09]

because it's going to be way too bright

[210:11]

and it's not going to look natural. You

[210:12]

usually want your signal like something

[210:14]

like that. That's what tends to look

[210:17]

natural. You don't usually want it too

[210:19]

small like this or it's going to look

[210:20]

desaturated and black and white unless

[210:22]

you're going for it. But if you're

[210:23]

looking for just like a normal amount of

[210:24]

saturation, you know, maybe somewhere in

[210:26]

there. But the reason that we have

[210:27]

scopes is so that we have some data on

[210:30]

what our colors actually look like. The

[210:33]

reason we need that is because it's very

[210:35]

easy for your eyes to get used to an

[210:37]

image. You can look at an image and

[210:39]

after a while, even if it's kind of

[210:41]

crazy, like I could take this offset and

[210:43]

just push this pretty orangish red and

[210:46]

it won't take long just staring at this

[210:48]

image for your eyes to sort of get used

[210:50]

to it. And they say it usually takes

[210:52]

like 10 seconds for your eyes to just

[210:54]

kind of accept the colors and it sort of

[210:57]

just doesn't seem so bad anymore. Like

[210:59]

right now, I'm looking at this image and

[211:01]

I go, you know, it's a little warm. It's

[211:03]

not crazy. It's not unreasonable, but

[211:05]

this is where we were. It's a huge huge

[211:08]

difference this warmth that we're

[211:10]

putting into that image. But after a

[211:11]

while, your eyes don't really notice it.

[211:13]

But when we look at the scope, the scope

[211:15]

always notices it. It says this thing is

[211:18]

warm. If we look at the parade, this red

[211:21]

channel is huge compared to the green

[211:23]

and blue channels. It is a warm image

[211:25]

objectively. And so the scopes are a way

[211:28]

for you to tell the tint of an image,

[211:30]

the brightness of an image without your

[211:32]

eyes playing tricks on you because they

[211:33]

do really quickly. In fact, it's usually

[211:36]

advised like once you switch to a shot

[211:38]

to figure out what you think of that

[211:40]

shot in the first like few seconds

[211:42]

because if you look at it longer than

[211:43]

that, your eyes start to play tricks on

[211:45]

you. Okay? So, you'll see a lot of

[211:47]

people that are into colorists and

[211:49]

people that are good to color kind of

[211:51]

switching in between shots like this.

[211:52]

I'm just hitting up and down on the

[211:53]

keyboard. And when you do that, it lets

[211:55]

your eyes kind of reset. All right. So,

[211:57]

I go from this one to this one and I go,

[211:59]

I feel like this needs a little bit of

[212:00]

saturation. I can push that up. I feel

[212:02]

like it needs a little bit of contrast.

[212:03]

Right? And so we could push that in

[212:06]

there and then maybe look at something

[212:07]

else for a while. Maybe literally just

[212:09]

look away from your screen and then look

[212:11]

back and then yeah, I mean that looks

[212:13]

looks pretty good. Maybe it's a little

[212:14]

bit cool. Could maybe add a little bit

[212:16]

of warmth there. Something like that.

[212:18]

Maybe take away that green just a touch.

[212:20]

And so color is part of the way making

[212:22]

decisions on your image, but also part

[212:24]

of the way resetting your eyes and kind

[212:26]

of keeping moving because that's the way

[212:28]

that you can really make good decisions

[212:31]

with your colors. If you're just spend

[212:32]

all your time looking at one image and

[212:34]

you never kind of reset your eyes, your

[212:36]

eyes will play tricks on you and you'll

[212:38]

end up with all kinds of weird stuff.

[212:40]

So, for a lot of what I do in the color

[212:41]

page, I'm pretty much just using these

[212:44]

three palettes, the primary color

[212:46]

wheels, the curves, and looking at the

[212:48]

scopes, usually on the parade, because I

[212:51]

can go through a whole movie and do a

[212:54]

lot of work and make things look really

[212:57]

good just using these tools. And yeah,

[213:00]

those are kind of the basic controls for

[213:03]

actually adjusting an image as a whole.

[213:06]

Okay, so we have a good idea of how to

[213:08]

adjust a single image here in the color

[213:10]

page. But color grading is more than

[213:13]

just adjusting a single shot. It's all

[213:16]

about adjusting all of the shots so that

[213:19]

they work together in the context of the

[213:21]

movie. So, one of the first things that

[213:22]

you're probably thinking is, "Okay, if I

[213:24]

make an adjustment to one shot and I

[213:26]

want to do the same thing on another

[213:27]

shot that's very similar, do I have to

[213:29]

do all that work again?" And of course,

[213:30]

no. That would be terrible. You can

[213:32]

easily copy a color grade from one shot

[213:35]

to another one just by selecting the

[213:37]

shot that you want to copy it to and

[213:39]

then mousing over the shot you want to

[213:41]

copy it from and then clicking down on

[213:43]

your scroll wheel. That's this button

[213:45]

right here. clicking down on this scroll

[213:47]

wheel and that will instantly copy the

[213:49]

color grades from the shot that you

[213:51]

clicked on to the shot that was

[213:52]

selected. And you can do this with

[213:54]

multiple different shots, too. If I hold

[213:56]

shift and select all of these, middle

[213:58]

button, mouse click here. If I have a

[213:59]

couple grades selected, it's going to

[214:01]

ask me, do you want to replace the

[214:03]

existing active grade? I'll say, and now

[214:05]

it will put that blue over everything.

[214:07]

All right, so that's how you quickly

[214:09]

just copy one grade to another. Anytime

[214:11]

you want to reset a node, you can

[214:13]

rightclick here in the empty space and

[214:15]

say reset all grades and nodes. You can

[214:17]

also shift select everything and then do

[214:19]

the same thing. Just right click in the

[214:21]

empty space, reset all grades and nodes,

[214:23]

and that will reset it for everything

[214:25]

that's been selected. So, this is great

[214:27]

because then you don't have to duplicate

[214:29]

work that you need to do on every single

[214:31]

shot. So, we can just color grade this

[214:32]

shot. That looks good. And then anything

[214:34]

that's similar, just middle button,

[214:35]

mouse click right there. This one's

[214:37]

probably pretty similar. This one's

[214:39]

probably pretty similar. We can at least

[214:40]

start with that. Here's similar. And we

[214:42]

can go through and very quickly work

[214:45]

through our entire timeline. When I have

[214:47]

my mouse over these thumbnails, I can

[214:49]

also hit control A on the keyboard to

[214:51]

select everything. And then I can copy a

[214:53]

grade from a shot like this. Just

[214:55]

clicking down on that scroll wheel. And

[214:57]

I can copy that. And I can also

[214:59]

rightclick reset all grades to reset

[215:01]

everything. Now, there are a lot of

[215:02]

different ways to copy grades and parts

[215:04]

of grades and and group shots and use

[215:07]

parts of the grades and all of that

[215:09]

stuff and we just don't have time. This

[215:11]

is a multiple hour tutorial and we still

[215:12]

just don't have time to get into that.

[215:14]

But there are ways to do that. If you

[215:15]

want more info on that, let me know in

[215:17]

the comments and we'll make a follow-up

[215:18]

video. But right now, the need to know

[215:20]

stuff is that middle button mouse click

[215:22]

copies those grades. And anytime that

[215:25]

I'm adjusting the colors on a shot,

[215:27]

we'll just make this really pink just so

[215:28]

we can see that happens to just this

[215:30]

clip. And that adjustment I made lives

[215:33]

in this first node of the clip. Now

[215:36]

these nodes live in what we call the

[215:38]

clip grade. See there are different kind

[215:41]

of layers of our color grades. You can

[215:44]

think of these sort of like different

[215:45]

groupings. So each clip can be adjusted

[215:48]

by itself. So I can make this one green.

[215:50]

I can make this one orange. I can make

[215:52]

this one blue. And these can all look

[215:54]

different, right? That's because they

[215:56]

all have their own node tree that lives

[215:58]

in each clip. But there is also a node

[216:02]

tree for the timeline. If I go up here

[216:05]

to these little dots and I click on this

[216:08]

right dot that you can just barely see

[216:09]

right here, that's going to switch to a

[216:12]

new node graph here. And if I right

[216:14]

click and say add node corrector and

[216:17]

then link this up like this is going to

[216:19]

be a node that applies to the entire

[216:22]

timeline. That means all of these shots.

[216:25]

So, if I have 186,000 shots in our

[216:28]

timeline, this is going to apply to

[216:30]

186,000 shots. If I have three shots,

[216:33]

it's going to apply to three shots. All

[216:34]

right. And you'll notice as I switch in

[216:37]

between these, I'm still looking at the

[216:39]

same timeline node. So, let's take this

[216:41]

and maybe let's take the saturation and

[216:43]

turn the saturation all the way down.

[216:45]

So, we're making this black and white.

[216:46]

Now, when I switch through this, look,

[216:48]

everything's black and white. What the

[216:50]

heck is going on? Every single clip in

[216:52]

here has its own color grade. So, its

[216:54]

own set of nodes. And then those nodes

[216:56]

are being put through these nodes, the

[216:59]

timeline nodes. Okay. So, we're going to

[217:01]

turn this bright blue. And then we're

[217:03]

going to put it into this node right

[217:04]

here, which turns it black and white.

[217:06]

And all of these clips have their own

[217:08]

nodes. And I'll just move some of these

[217:10]

around so we can see the difference when

[217:12]

I switch in between. These are all

[217:14]

different nodes. If I have several

[217:16]

different nodes here on each one, right?

[217:19]

If I switch in between the clips, they

[217:21]

all have separate trees for their nodes,

[217:24]

but they all share the same timeline.

[217:26]

So, anything that I put in this timeline

[217:27]

is going to happen to all of the clips.

[217:30]

So, if I make it black and white,

[217:31]

they're all black and white. If I give

[217:33]

it a little bit of contrast like this,

[217:34]

they're all going to have that intense

[217:36]

contrast. So, this is a great way to

[217:40]

make a style that goes over every single

[217:44]

clip in your timeline. It's the perfect

[217:46]

place for establishing a creative look

[217:49]

for your project or for something like

[217:51]

this, making it making it all black and

[217:53]

white, making it all look like old film

[217:55]

or whatever. Whatever you put here is

[217:57]

going to be applied to each of these

[217:59]

nodes. But after the clip, that's why

[218:02]

all of these look black and white. Even

[218:03]

though they're super tinted, all these

[218:05]

different colors, the result is black

[218:07]

and white because we're tinting them

[218:09]

like crazy and then desaturating. So

[218:12]

again, just this level of understanding.

[218:14]

Oh my goodness, you can do so much cool

[218:17]

stuff with this. Let's right click on

[218:18]

these timeline nodes and reset. And I

[218:20]

can hit alt s to add a serial node, a

[218:24]

new corrector here. Then I'll switch

[218:25]

back to my clip nodes. Crl+ A,

[218:28]

rightclick, and reset all grades and

[218:30]

nodes. And what I can do is make a

[218:32]

common look here in the timeline. And so

[218:34]

let's just make something that's pretty

[218:36]

extreme just so we can see it. Okay,

[218:38]

normally you wouldn't probably go quite

[218:39]

this extreme. We're getting crazy. We're

[218:41]

having fun. So, let's say that we have

[218:43]

some bright orange kind of highlights

[218:45]

and some kind of cool blue shadows. All

[218:49]

right. And we'll just really push this.

[218:52]

And I'm going to right click and label

[218:53]

this. And we'll call this teal orange.

[218:55]

Now, this isn't the best looking grade

[218:57]

in the world. There are much more

[218:59]

tasteful ways to do this, but just

[219:00]

pretend that this is whatever style you

[219:02]

want to add. Okay, I'll make another

[219:04]

node by hitting Alt S, and then I'll

[219:06]

make a little S curve like we were

[219:08]

talking about earlier. Great. And maybe

[219:10]

I'll make another node. And let's go to

[219:13]

our luminance versus saturation. And I'm

[219:16]

just going to saturate things in the

[219:17]

middle. And then take anything that's a

[219:19]

little bit brighter and desaturate the

[219:22]

bright parts and the dark parts like

[219:24]

this. So now we have this very intense

[219:26]

look. If I hit control and D, I can

[219:29]

disable these nodes. And so we're really

[219:31]

putting a lot of style into this. Okay.

[219:33]

Again, this may or may not be what you

[219:36]

like, but the principle here is that we

[219:38]

have one creative look that we're going

[219:41]

to put over our entire movie. And we

[219:43]

call this, surprisingly, the look. It's

[219:46]

a really technical term. And we're not

[219:47]

only going to have this look on this

[219:50]

shot because we're working in the

[219:51]

timeline nodes. As I switch to the other

[219:53]

shots, we're going to have this same

[219:55]

kind of teal and orange look. Now, when

[219:58]

you add this kind of look, especially

[220:00]

one that's really extreme like this,

[220:01]

your other shots aren't necessarily

[220:03]

going to look good, because that's

[220:05]

really only going to happen if you have

[220:07]

an image that has similar colors and

[220:09]

saturation and exposure and everything

[220:11]

to the clip that you designed this look

[220:12]

on. So, for instance, I could switch

[220:14]

over to shot six and it looks as

[220:16]

expected, but I switch to shot five and

[220:19]

what the heck is going on? It looks, as

[220:21]

my daughter would say, poopy. It looks

[220:23]

like poopy. So, in order to make this

[220:24]

less poopy, let's switch over to our

[220:26]

clip nodes. And here's where we can

[220:29]

adjust our colors really before it goes

[220:32]

into that creative look. And for

[220:34]

instance, maybe this needs to be a

[220:36]

little bit brighter. I can push up the

[220:37]

offset and that's going to help a lot

[220:39]

because now we're pushing a little bit

[220:41]

more colors into the highlights and

[220:42]

those highlights get tinted orange. And

[220:44]

so, we have a lot less that is tinted

[220:47]

teal and we actually have something that

[220:48]

like sort of looks like it belongs in

[220:50]

this world. Okay, maybe the dark parts

[220:52]

need to be a little bit darker. I can

[220:54]

take the lift and push that down. Can

[220:55]

add a little bit of contrast like that.

[220:57]

And now we have two shots that sort of

[221:00]

look like they belong together, right?

[221:01]

But the idea here is that the more

[221:04]

extreme your creative look is, the more

[221:06]

you might have to tweak all of the shots

[221:09]

and make sure they match together in

[221:11]

order to have that kind of cohesive look

[221:13]

actually work. So for instance, shot

[221:15]

seven, that's it's not good. So we can

[221:18]

take that offset up. Maybe maybe push

[221:20]

this lift up a little bit and kind of

[221:22]

really push this around a little bit so

[221:24]

we get a nice looking image with that

[221:27]

look on it. If we're planning on doing

[221:29]

this extreme look like this and we

[221:31]

didn't set this look first, then we

[221:33]

might look at these different shots and

[221:35]

they might look like they match

[221:36]

relatively well. But what happens when

[221:38]

you have this extreme look is it can

[221:40]

sometimes amplify the differences in

[221:42]

between these clips. And so we always

[221:44]

want to make our look first, especially

[221:47]

if it's an extreme look like this. That

[221:50]

way we can view our shots with that look

[221:52]

applied and make some adjustments here

[221:54]

in the clip nodes so that the shots

[221:57]

actually look somewhat reasonable. Okay.

[221:59]

And we can go through and make our

[222:01]

adjustments however we see fit to

[222:03]

hopefully get these things matching and

[222:04]

looking decent and get a good result.

[222:07]

So, that's the big bird's eyee view of a

[222:10]

workflow is you want to figure out what

[222:12]

your creative look really is before you

[222:15]

do tons and tons of work on everything

[222:17]

else because the work you do in this

[222:19]

creative look may make some problems in

[222:22]

your shots worse and it might make some

[222:24]

problems completely irrelevant. So, it's

[222:26]

a good idea to make sure you put that on

[222:28]

first. So, this is the smartest

[222:30]

workflow. Make sure you have that

[222:31]

creative look and then go back and match

[222:34]

your shots together. Now, I'm not really

[222:36]

a fan of this creative look. It's a

[222:37]

little bit too extreme for me. And it

[222:39]

also brings up one little pet peeve that

[222:41]

I have about color grading. A lot of

[222:43]

people, they'll see a tutorial on the

[222:45]

internet and they'll say, "Oh, look at

[222:46]

all of these controls I have over color.

[222:49]

I can just go crazy and I can make all

[222:51]

kinds of wild color looks." And so, they

[222:53]

end up making something that sort of

[222:54]

looks like this. Because they watched

[222:56]

The Matrix 5 years ago, and they

[222:57]

remember it being green, which was

[222:59]

really cool. And so, now they want their

[223:00]

movie to look green. Here's a great big

[223:03]

colorist secret. The reason a movie

[223:06]

looks good is often not because of the

[223:08]

color grading, but because of how it was

[223:10]

shot and the lighting and the set design

[223:13]

and the costumes and things like that.

[223:15]

That's what gets a movie 80 90% there.

[223:18]

The color grading is just like the spice

[223:20]

on top. It's like the salt on something

[223:22]

that already tastes good. It just

[223:23]

enhances the flavor. And so putting this

[223:26]

heavy style on this image that wasn't

[223:29]

designed for this kind of style is going

[223:32]

to look bad. You just can't change the

[223:34]

character of the image too much or else

[223:37]

it just doesn't look natural. It just

[223:39]

doesn't look good. And so a quick hack

[223:40]

that will save you years of pain, years

[223:43]

of torture, years of unhappy clients is

[223:46]

just this. Look at the footage before

[223:48]

you start adding style to it. Just look

[223:51]

at your color managed footage and think

[223:53]

about the style that's already there

[223:56]

because that's where the best color

[223:58]

grade is going to live. It's going to be

[224:00]

a enhancement of that existing style of

[224:04]

that existing tone. So in this shoot we

[224:07]

have these kind of cooler toned windows.

[224:11]

We have the warmer toned lamps. We have

[224:14]

these kind of red and maroon and blue

[224:16]

tones. We have just a little bit of

[224:18]

green. We have white walls. That's the

[224:21]

kind of set design that we have. It's

[224:23]

not really dark and moody. It's not

[224:25]

super bright and clean. And so our color

[224:28]

grade needs to be somewhere in that

[224:30]

feeling. And so if I were creating a

[224:32]

look for this shot, a creative look, the

[224:35]

first thing I would do is just make sure

[224:37]

that we have decent exposure on this

[224:39]

clip because this is what we're going to

[224:41]

design our look on. And I think the

[224:43]

exposure looks pretty good. I could

[224:44]

maybe just bring it up just a touch.

[224:46]

Maybe I'll just push the offset up just

[224:48]

a little bit with this master wheel.

[224:50]

Okay, maybe just a little bit of

[224:51]

contrast just to take some of the fog

[224:53]

out of it. So, here's before and here's

[224:56]

after. Very subtle adjustment because

[224:58]

this is shot pretty well. Okay, there

[225:00]

aren't any major white balance issues.

[225:02]

There aren't any major exposure issues.

[225:04]

It looks pretty good. Now, if we want to

[225:06]

enhance it, I can switch to the timeline

[225:08]

nodes. I'll hit Alt S to add a serial

[225:11]

node. And this is where I'm going to

[225:12]

start to build my look. And if you've

[225:14]

never built a look before, if you've

[225:16]

never really tried to stylize something

[225:18]

before, I would really highly recommend

[225:21]

that you stay with something like this.

[225:23]

take this curve and make just a slight

[225:25]

scurve. All right. What that's going to

[225:27]

do is give us a little bit of contrast.

[225:29]

It's going to take away some of the

[225:30]

muddiness here. So, here's before and

[225:33]

here's after. It's just going to clarify

[225:35]

things a little bit. Let's rightclick

[225:36]

and just let's just call this S curve.

[225:39]

Let's make a new serial node. Alt S. And

[225:42]

then let's take that image and maybe

[225:44]

let's play around with the temperature.

[225:47]

So, I can go here to where it says

[225:48]

temperature and tint. And maybe just

[225:50]

push this, push it a little to the left

[225:52]

and see how we like it. Push it a little

[225:54]

to the right and see how we like it. And

[225:55]

I think just pushing this a little to

[225:57]

the left a little bit cooler feels nice.

[226:00]

That starts to feel cleaner. It starts

[226:02]

to feel like it's at night time. Like

[226:04]

here's before. We have this gray gray

[226:07]

green kind of look. And here's after. It

[226:09]

just feels like it's clarified a little

[226:11]

bit. That feels nice. Okay. And even

[226:14]

though this look isn't extreme, it's

[226:16]

still a nice look. It still looks good.

[226:18]

If I select both of these and hit Ctrl +

[226:20]

D to disable. Here's before. Here's with

[226:22]

no style. And here's with the style

[226:24]

added. It's very subtle, but it feels

[226:26]

natural for the image. We're not

[226:29]

fighting against the production here.

[226:31]

We're just taking what already looks

[226:33]

good and enhancing it. Maybe we want a

[226:35]

little bit brighter colors here. Maybe

[226:36]

we can make another node. This second

[226:39]

one is a temperature. Maybe this third

[226:42]

one will do some saturation. So, let's

[226:44]

just push up our saturation knob a

[226:45]

little bit. We don't want to go too

[226:47]

crazy. Once we go up here, that's just

[226:48]

too bright. Okay, we can always check

[226:50]

this on our vector scope. I'll make this

[226:52]

a little bit bigger so we can see it.

[226:54]

Here's our vector scope. We can even go

[226:56]

to the little controls here. And I like

[226:58]

to turn on extents. That'll show the

[227:00]

very most extreme parts of our image

[227:03]

here. And see here, when we push the

[227:05]

saturation up, these extents are almost

[227:07]

all the way out here. And some of the

[227:09]

blue is even beyond like it's way too

[227:12]

blue. Remember, we don't want things

[227:14]

that saturated. We really want stuff to

[227:16]

stop like hereish. All right. We want

[227:19]

this graph to be like here. All right.

[227:22]

So, we can take the saturation down.

[227:24]

Let's just put it somewhere in there.

[227:25]

There. Our extensor like here for the

[227:27]

red. The blue is maybe still a little

[227:29]

bit hardcore, which we could fix with a

[227:31]

curve maybe. But we're still putting

[227:33]

quite a bit of saturation in here.

[227:35]

Here's before and here's after. We're

[227:37]

really brightening stuff up without it

[227:38]

being way too bright. Okay. Also, your

[227:41]

saturation and everything is going to

[227:42]

depend on your lighting and the

[227:44]

exposure. the colors of the things that

[227:46]

you're shooting, the context, the tone,

[227:48]

all of that stuff. Maybe let's work on

[227:50]

these blues. Let's go to the hue versus

[227:53]

saturation. And we see we have this

[227:55]

spike here in the blues, which is

[227:56]

certainly going to be right here. I can

[227:58]

take my color picker and just draw over

[228:00]

this. And that's going to make a couple

[228:02]

little control points here and a control

[228:04]

point in the center. I can take this

[228:05]

control point here. And look at this

[228:06]

vector scope while I do this. Here's our

[228:08]

blues. And what we're really trying to

[228:10]

do is bring this little cloud this way.

[228:12]

All right. So, if we take this curve and

[228:14]

I push this down, look what happens.

[228:16]

That squishes that cloud down to

[228:18]

something that's reasonable. And again,

[228:20]

I don't want this that far beyond just

[228:22]

like halfway out. So, somewhere in

[228:24]

there. That's where that's going to look

[228:25]

actually reasonable. All right. And so

[228:27]

now we still have our saturation getting

[228:30]

pushed up, but our blue isn't out of

[228:32]

control here. It doesn't look neon blue.

[228:34]

And so now we have a look that looks

[228:36]

really nice and it isn't just completely

[228:39]

wild compared to what we shot. So again,

[228:41]

here is before and here's after. Still

[228:44]

looks nice, not too different. The other

[228:46]

advantage to doing it this way is that

[228:49]

your shots are going to match a little

[228:51]

bit easier than if you're doing some

[228:53]

insane thing where you turn all the skin

[228:55]

purple or something like that. So I'll

[228:57]

just open up our clips again and we'll

[228:59]

go through here, go back to our clip

[229:01]

nodes, and I'll just select everything

[229:04]

and reset all the grades, everything

[229:06]

except for that shot I was working on.

[229:08]

Okay. And now we have this look applied

[229:11]

to all of our shots. And it'll be a lot

[229:13]

less tweaking to make this look good

[229:15]

under this look. Maybe take the gain

[229:18]

down on this one. And flipping back and

[229:20]

forth, we have a little bit closer

[229:22]

match. Now, there are some problems

[229:24]

where this shot maybe looks a little bit

[229:26]

too blue. This one maybe looks a little

[229:27]

less blue. We could do things like

[229:29]

highlight this window and turn it more

[229:30]

blue and that kind of thing, but we'll

[229:32]

get to that in a minute. The idea is

[229:33]

that we want all these shots to feel

[229:35]

like they live in the same world. When

[229:37]

we're matching shots, that's really our

[229:39]

main goal. Shots might not match 100%

[229:42]

completely, especially when you're just

[229:43]

starting and especially when you've just

[229:45]

started a project and you haven't done

[229:47]

lots of work on all the shots yet. But

[229:48]

you want them to feel like they could

[229:50]

live in the same world, right? So, they

[229:52]

should have similar saturation. One

[229:54]

shouldn't be way too bright. We could

[229:55]

take this one down and just adjust this

[229:57]

to where they all feel like they could

[229:59]

live in this world. This one maybe looks

[230:02]

a little too yellow. And you can go

[230:04]

through and just use your first

[230:05]

impression when you switch to the shot.

[230:07]

This one maybe looks a little bit too

[230:09]

green to try and match this the best you

[230:11]

can. Okay. Same thing here. Let's take

[230:13]

this down. It's a little bit too

[230:15]

saturated. Sure. And we can turn that

[230:17]

into a night shot with some work, but

[230:18]

we'll just leave it like a daytime shot

[230:20]

for now. And now we have these all

[230:22]

matched. This one maybe looks a little

[230:24]

purple now that I look at it again.

[230:26]

Okay. Adjust this to look good. But now

[230:29]

we've done a couple things all at once.

[230:31]

We picked a style for our scene and

[230:33]

we've started matching these shots to

[230:35]

sort of look like each other. And that's

[230:37]

going to help this scene not be

[230:39]

distracting when we play it back. You

[230:40]

don't want people thinking about why do

[230:42]

the colors look like that or why doesn't

[230:44]

one shot look like another one. You want

[230:46]

them to be invested in the moment. And

[230:48]

so there shouldn't be any shots that

[230:50]

kind of just stand out. They should all

[230:51]

just feel like they live together. And I

[230:53]

think we're pretty much at that point

[230:54]

here. It's not a perfect match, but it

[230:57]

works. That's a great place to be in

[230:59]

your color grade. So now, if you want to

[231:01]

get a little bit more picky, I want to

[231:02]

show you a technique that is so helpful

[231:04]

for matching your shots. What we can do

[231:06]

is we can find a shot that we like.

[231:08]

Let's say we like this one, and we can

[231:10]

rightclick here on the viewer and select

[231:12]

grab still. What this will do is grab a

[231:15]

still shot of this image, and it will

[231:17]

save it to our gallery. So our gallery

[231:20]

is a panel that lives up here in the

[231:22]

upper left. Click on gallery and that

[231:24]

comes up here. And they call these

[231:26]

stills, but it's really more like a

[231:28]

saved preset, a saved color grade that

[231:31]

also includes a still image. It's like a

[231:33]

color grading preset with a thumbnail.

[231:35]

And so what's cool about that is if I

[231:37]

were to reset this and I don't know,

[231:39]

let's just do something really

[231:40]

different. I'll just desaturate it and

[231:42]

make it really dark or something so that

[231:44]

we can see this difference is that if I

[231:46]

have one grade on this shot, I can

[231:48]

middle button mouse click on this still,

[231:50]

boop, like that, and apply that color

[231:53]

grade right here from the still just

[231:55]

like I can from a different shot. So,

[231:57]

you can easily save your color presets

[231:59]

up here in the gallery. But what's also

[232:01]

great is that you can rightclick and say

[232:04]

play still right here. And what that'll

[232:06]

do is give you a still frame of that

[232:09]

color graded image that you can compare

[232:12]

with the other shots in your timeline.

[232:14]

And so now I have a really nice kind of

[232:17]

split screen where I can compare one

[232:19]

shot to another. And so if I have a

[232:21]

couple shots that were maybe shot at a

[232:23]

little different time, I can compare

[232:25]

these with a split screen and I can do

[232:28]

some work to match these and make these

[232:30]

feel like they live in the same world

[232:32]

again. And so that's great if you're

[232:34]

trying to get an exact match on a setup

[232:36]

like this. But it also works if you're

[232:38]

comparing similar subjects. So for

[232:40]

instance, this guy's face both here and

[232:43]

here. See here? This looks a little bit

[232:45]

more pink. This one looks a little bit

[232:46]

more kind of yellow. And so maybe it's

[232:48]

going to help this shot if we push it a

[232:51]

little bit of green in there. Maybe a

[232:53]

little less blue. And maybe that's going

[232:54]

to feel a little bit better. So yeah,

[232:56]

already that feels like it's matching a

[232:58]

little bit better. Maybe the

[232:59]

saturation's up just a touch. And now we

[233:01]

can match these together using this

[233:04]

still. Same thing here for this other

[233:06]

shot. We want all of these to feel the

[233:08]

same. And that looks pretty good. That's

[233:10]

a pretty good match, I would say. Same

[233:13]

thing here. Let's take a look at this.

[233:16]

That's also a pretty good match, I would

[233:18]

say. You can really drive yourself crazy

[233:20]

second guessing your match. The best

[233:22]

idea is to immediately decide whether it

[233:25]

matches or not, and if it's close

[233:26]

enough, move on. If it bothers you

[233:28]

later, you can come back and adjust it.

[233:30]

But you can go through your whole movie

[233:32]

and you can compare it to this one shot.

[233:34]

And this is a really good idea because

[233:36]

this one shot is like your constant. You

[233:38]

can always see how bright or dark or

[233:40]

saturated or blue or yellow or green

[233:43]

something compares to this. The shot

[233:45]

that you initially graded this saved

[233:49]

still right here. This is what we call

[233:50]

our hero shot. It's our hero that we

[233:53]

always compare all of the shots to. This

[233:55]

is how you get a consistent look from

[233:57]

beginning to end in your color grade.

[234:00]

Because what can happen is you can say,

[234:02]

"Okay, I want this shot and this shot to

[234:04]

match because they're next to each

[234:05]

other, right?" And you can maybe make

[234:07]

those match, right? You'll say, "Okay,

[234:08]

this one needs a little bit more

[234:09]

offset." Then you go to this shot and

[234:11]

you go, "Okay, I need these to match."

[234:12]

And so you try and figure out like, "Oh,

[234:14]

actually this one needs to be a little

[234:15]

bit more pink, right, to match with

[234:17]

that. And then this one and this one

[234:19]

should match. And now this one doesn't

[234:21]

match at all. And so this one should

[234:22]

really be more pink." And what ends up

[234:25]

happening is you get this shot matches

[234:27]

good. These shots match well. These

[234:29]

shots match well. And you get a slow

[234:32]

drift from one shot to the other. And

[234:34]

then the first shot and the last shot

[234:36]

don't look anything alike. That's why we

[234:39]

always compare all of our shots to this

[234:42]

one constant shot so we can easily tell,

[234:44]

oh, this one's way off or this one's way

[234:46]

off or this one's a lot closer. Then

[234:48]

you're comparing your last shot and your

[234:50]

first shot to the exact same thing. So

[234:53]

take some time and try that right now. I

[234:55]

want you to open up maybe shot five and

[234:58]

adjust it. Go into the timeline nodes

[235:00]

and make a look that you like. It can be

[235:02]

subtle like this or you can go ahead and

[235:04]

make something that's a little bit more

[235:05]

extreme. Play around. Have fun. That's

[235:07]

what this is for. But just know that the

[235:09]

more extreme your look is, the harder

[235:10]

it's going to be to match your shots.

[235:12]

But do that. Make a creative look for

[235:15]

this shot. Right click, grab still. And

[235:17]

then you can rightclick and play still

[235:19]

here. and then match all of your shots

[235:21]

to it using this split screen technique.

[235:24]

Again, make sure that you go to your

[235:25]

clip nodes to do those adjustments

[235:28]

because you're only going to want to

[235:29]

adjust that one shot and not all of them

[235:32]

in the timeline. This kind of thing,

[235:33]

just practicing this over and over again

[235:35]

is going to be so helpful for you. There

[235:37]

is so much more to go over and to say

[235:39]

just about workflow here, but I want to

[235:41]

show you a couple of my favorite tools

[235:43]

here in the color page. The things that

[235:45]

really feel exciting about color. We're

[235:47]

going to dive into a concept called

[235:49]

secondaries. Now that we have our shots

[235:51]

relatively matched and our creative look

[235:54]

made and everything, it's a good time to

[235:56]

get into my favorite part of color

[235:59]

grading, which is secondary corrections.

[236:01]

I'm just going to close my clips and

[236:03]

just focus on this one shot for this.

[236:05]

Now, what is a secondary correction? A

[236:07]

secondary correction is basically a

[236:09]

correction that happens to one part of

[236:11]

the image. And that can either be like a

[236:14]

physical area on the image or it can be

[236:16]

something that targets a specific color

[236:18]

or saturation or hue or something like

[236:20]

that. Basically, what we've been doing

[236:22]

so far are primary corrections. A

[236:24]

primary correction is a correction that

[236:26]

applies to the entire image. Whereas a

[236:29]

secondary correction is a little part of

[236:31]

the image. Okay. So to do that, what

[236:33]

I'll often do is hit alt s and make a

[236:36]

serial node. Okay. This is a node that

[236:37]

comes after this node. And so we're

[236:39]

going to take this image and we're going

[236:41]

to refine it further. And some of this

[236:44]

we've already learned about with these

[236:45]

curves. And so I could do something like

[236:47]

select just these reds and adjust the

[236:50]

saturation of them. That would be a

[236:52]

secondary correction. So we have our

[236:54]

original footage, we have our primary

[236:56]

correction, and then we have our

[236:58]

secondary correction which adjusts these

[236:59]

reds. But I can also do a correction to

[237:02]

just a part of the image using a mask

[237:04]

which in the color page is called a

[237:06]

window. So, I'm going to go to the

[237:07]

Windows palette right here. It looks

[237:09]

like this little ellipse with the little

[237:11]

control points on it. And here in this

[237:13]

palette, it lets us make masks for

[237:16]

whatever is happening in this node. So,

[237:18]

if this node turns everything pink and

[237:20]

then I apply a window just by clicking

[237:22]

on one of these shapes, like this

[237:24]

ellipse shape, that's going to apply

[237:26]

that correction just inside of that

[237:28]

window. So, it's a mask that's applied

[237:30]

to this node. Now, something to notice,

[237:32]

we're not cutting out the image. All

[237:35]

we're doing is limiting the corrections

[237:37]

that happen in this node to only happen

[237:40]

inside of this mask. So just this

[237:44]

absolutely like exponentially increases

[237:47]

the amount of freedom that you have

[237:50]

adjusting your images. So I'll just

[237:51]

reset the primary color wheels here and

[237:54]

let's move this around and let's do

[237:55]

something like just brighten his face.

[237:57]

I'm going to adjust this circle mask and

[237:59]

yeah, maybe I will actually turn this

[238:00]

purple here for a second so that we can

[238:02]

see what's going on. I can adjust the

[238:04]

size and the shape and everything of

[238:06]

this mask by grabbing this bounding box.

[238:08]

But we also have these little red dots

[238:10]

here that I can pull. And what that does

[238:12]

is it softens the mask. And so if you

[238:16]

get into any color grading tutorials and

[238:18]

you watch a colorist that's been doing

[238:19]

it for a while, they almost always just

[238:21]

use a big circle mask. A big soft circle

[238:24]

mask. The reason is because you can do

[238:27]

so much stuff with just a soft circle.

[238:29]

Look at this. I don't have to roto his

[238:31]

face or anything. And I have, look at

[238:33]

this. I'm doing a really extreme

[238:35]

correction to his face. And I just have

[238:37]

this soft circle mask. And I can go down

[238:39]

here to this little button and turn off

[238:42]

our overlays. And it honestly doesn't

[238:45]

look terrible as far as the actual mask

[238:48]

goes. It's hard to tell where the mask

[238:50]

starts and stops. And this is like the

[238:52]

most extreme possible example of doing a

[238:55]

localized secondary color correction.

[238:57]

And so this is a great way to isolate

[238:59]

any kind of adjustment that you just

[239:01]

want to happen to part of your image. So

[239:03]

we have our face selection here. And

[239:05]

maybe I'll just make this a little bit

[239:07]

smaller. Maybe just adjust one side of

[239:10]

his face a little bit. Then I'll reset

[239:12]

my correction here. And one thing I'll

[239:14]

often do just to quickly turn off this

[239:17]

overlay is just switch to a different

[239:18]

palette here. So I can switch to the

[239:20]

curves and any adjustments we make are

[239:23]

still going to apply to that mask

[239:25]

because it's applied to this node and we

[239:28]

have this node selected. So anything

[239:29]

that we do is going to happen just

[239:31]

within the mask because we're masking

[239:32]

that node. So what I like to do is

[239:34]

switch over to the curve and let's say I

[239:35]

want to brighten this side of his face.

[239:36]

I can just push up the brightness there

[239:39]

like this. Maybe more the darker parts.

[239:41]

Yeah, just add a little bit of fill

[239:43]

there. So here's before and here's

[239:45]

after. Here we go. We can add a little

[239:47]

bit of brightness to his face if we want

[239:49]

to. We could also do the opposite. I can

[239:51]

move this over here. Let's reset this

[239:53]

again. Let's reset our curves here. And

[239:56]

we can take it down a little bit. And

[239:58]

again, big soft circle window is magic,

[240:00]

man. Telling you. Just going to put that

[240:02]

right there. And now we can darken that

[240:04]

side of the window. Here is before. And

[240:06]

here's after. So now we can shape the

[240:08]

light using these controls that we

[240:09]

already know, but just combining it with

[240:11]

a mask. Now, let's say that I want to do

[240:13]

multiple things, like I want to darken

[240:15]

this part, and I want to maybe brighten

[240:17]

his eyes a little bit, maybe change the

[240:19]

color of his lips, whatever I want to

[240:21]

do, and I want to do all of those things

[240:23]

to this shot. What I would recommend is

[240:26]

that you do those in parallel nodes.

[240:27]

Now, there are some reasons for this

[240:30]

that are honestly a little bit hard to

[240:32]

explain. If you're really interested in

[240:34]

learning the different kinds of nodes in

[240:36]

the color page, let me know. But it's

[240:38]

honestly not like super super important.

[240:40]

Here's just a good general rule to go

[240:42]

by. If you're doing a primary correction

[240:44]

where you're adjusting the entire image,

[240:46]

a lot of the time I'll just use a serial

[240:49]

node. If you're going to do multiple

[240:51]

different things, adjust a bunch of

[240:53]

different parts of the image like this.

[240:55]

I would do those all in parallel nodes.

[240:57]

To make a parallel node, rightclick and

[240:59]

go to add node, add parallel. You can

[241:00]

also hit alt p. And what this is going

[241:03]

to do is basically take this original

[241:05]

image and that's going to feed it to all

[241:08]

of these different corrections. So each

[241:10]

one of them have the same starting

[241:11]

point. And so this node right here isn't

[241:14]

looking at this image. It's actually

[241:15]

looking at an image that looks like

[241:16]

this, which can be convenient if you're

[241:19]

doing things like selecting stuff by

[241:21]

color or brightness. Then you don't have

[241:23]

the other nodes kind of messing with

[241:25]

that. And so let's just rightclick and

[241:26]

say node label here. We'll just say

[241:28]

darken window. For this one, let's

[241:31]

brighten his eyes. So maybe we'll make

[241:33]

another kind of soft circle here. I'll

[241:35]

just put maybe on this eye just to

[241:37]

brighten it up a little bit. Maybe we'll

[241:39]

just take this curve and just push that

[241:41]

up just a touch just to brighten it. I

[241:43]

don't know if I like that. Maybe I'll

[241:44]

take the offset up a little. Yeah, I

[241:46]

like that a little better. Take the

[241:47]

offset up. Then I can also add another

[241:50]

window just by going here and clicking

[241:52]

this plus circle like this. That'll add

[241:54]

another circle window. And those are

[241:56]

both going to be applied by default,

[241:58]

just added together for our node. And

[242:00]

you can see in the little preview here

[242:02]

that it's only affecting the eyes. You

[242:04]

can also go here to this tab, which is

[242:06]

the key tab, and we can look at the

[242:09]

selection that we're making. So, we're

[242:10]

brightening his eyes. And then over

[242:12]

here, maybe we'll adjust his lips. So,

[242:13]

let's do that curves trick here. Hue

[242:16]

versus hue. I'll just select his lips

[242:18]

like that. And maybe we don't want those

[242:19]

quite as pink. I'll just push that down

[242:21]

a little bit. Widen out these here a

[242:23]

little. It's going to just tone those

[242:24]

red lips down a little bit. And we're

[242:26]

also going to limit this with a window.

[242:28]

That's the cool thing is you can do

[242:30]

multiple things in one node. I can put

[242:32]

curves and stuff with our primaries and

[242:34]

sharpening and all kinds of stuff into

[242:36]

this. And then I can limit it with this

[242:38]

window. So I'll take circle window and

[242:40]

just limit it to the lips right there.

[242:42]

So now I'll just disable these by

[242:44]

hitting Ctrl + D. Now we have our

[242:46]

original footage. We have our primary

[242:48]

correction. Then we darkening this side

[242:50]

of the screen, brightening up his eyes a

[242:53]

little bit, and changing the color of

[242:55]

his lips. And because these are all in

[242:57]

parallel nodes, these nodes are going to

[243:00]

interact with each other in a way that's

[243:01]

expected. If that's too much for you,

[243:03]

it's really okay. Just do your big wide

[243:06]

corrections in serial nodes and your

[243:08]

little localized corrections in parallel

[243:10]

nodes. You'll be fine. Now, we have our

[243:12]

masks set up here, and we have some

[243:14]

specific masks like right on his eyes,

[243:16]

which is cool, and it looks good for

[243:17]

this frame. But as soon as we play this

[243:19]

back, there's some problems. Now, it's

[243:21]

not so obvious on this shot, but if we

[243:23]

look with the overlay, we'll notice that

[243:26]

we're not really selecting his eyes. His

[243:28]

head is moving around. And so, this

[243:30]

brightness on his eyes should really

[243:31]

follow his eyes, right? So, how do we do

[243:34]

that? Well, we can use a tracker right

[243:36]

here in the color page that is

[243:38]

absolutely mindblowingly fantastic.

[243:41]

Check this out. I'm going to start at

[243:43]

the beginning of my clip, just cuz

[243:44]

that's where we set this up. And I'm

[243:46]

just going to put my windows where I

[243:48]

want them to be. And I'm going to select

[243:50]

this window and go over to this next tab

[243:52]

here. This is our tracker tab. And I'll

[243:55]

just hit this track back and forth

[243:57]

button. And look what happens. Watch

[243:58]

this. It just locks onto his eye and

[244:01]

tracks it in 1 second. Okay. Same thing

[244:03]

for this one. Tracks it. Crazy. So now

[244:06]

look at that. They perfectly follow his

[244:08]

eyes. Isn't that nuts? It's like no

[244:11]

effort to track stuff in the color page.

[244:14]

And again, it's very forgiving because

[244:16]

really a lot of the time you're using

[244:17]

pretty soft masks. And so it's amazing

[244:20]

how quickly you can refine an image,

[244:22]

even an image that's moving and zooming

[244:24]

and doing all kinds of stuff and people

[244:25]

turning their heads and all of that. You

[244:27]

can get really fine on these details. Do

[244:29]

the same thing on the lips. We'll just

[244:30]

make sure we select this window and then

[244:32]

track this back and forth. No problem.

[244:34]

And it completely follows his face.

[244:36]

Isn't that nuts? That's just wild. There

[244:38]

are so many other things you can do in

[244:40]

the color page. I'm trying to keep it to

[244:42]

just the essentials, but man, it's hard.

[244:44]

Let's hit alt P and make another node.

[244:46]

And in this one, I want to soften kind

[244:48]

of the details in his face. Now, there

[244:50]

are a lot of ways to do this, but one

[244:52]

way that works pretty darn well is to

[244:54]

take this mid detail slider here and

[244:57]

just push this to the left. And look at

[244:59]

what that does. That kind of gives us

[245:01]

that kind of Instagram kind of gloss

[245:03]

filter. Look at that. That really starts

[245:05]

to soften his skin. All right. Now, it

[245:07]

makes everything else look really bad.

[245:09]

And so again, this is one of those times

[245:11]

where we're going to want to combine

[245:12]

this with a selection of some kind. So

[245:15]

one thing that we could do would be to

[245:17]

just again grab a soft circle window. We

[245:19]

can just put this in here like this. And

[245:22]

that's probably going to give us a

[245:23]

pretty good result, honestly. So here's

[245:25]

before. Here's after. But there are a

[245:27]

few problems here. We're blurring a

[245:29]

little bit of the background here. It's

[245:31]

going into his eyes a little bit,

[245:33]

blurring his hair. And so it would be

[245:35]

nice if we could just select his skin.

[245:37]

And there are automated, a little bit

[245:39]

fancier ways to do this in the paid

[245:41]

version of Resolve, but I want to show

[245:43]

you just an old school trick. All right,

[245:45]

we're going to keep this window on here.

[245:46]

We're going to just limit it to

[245:48]

something like this. But then we're

[245:50]

going to make another selection just by

[245:51]

selecting his skin here. Now, how do we

[245:53]

do that? We can go to this fourth tab

[245:56]

right here and select this little

[245:57]

eyropper. What this will do is this will

[246:00]

make a selection kind of like we select

[246:02]

with our windows, but it's doing it kind

[246:04]

of like the way that you will select a

[246:06]

color for a green screen. And so I'll

[246:07]

actually turn off our window here and

[246:09]

probably turn off our midtone detail

[246:11]

too, just so we can see just what this

[246:13]

is doing. And I can take my eyropper and

[246:15]

just drag over his skin like this. And

[246:18]

that's going to set these sliders to

[246:20]

certain values. What this is basically

[246:22]

doing is keying our image and setting

[246:25]

the mask for this node to be whatever

[246:27]

colors are included. It's selecting by

[246:29]

the color. And I can see this a little

[246:31]

bit better if I go up here to this icon,

[246:33]

which is our highlight icon, which will

[246:35]

turn on our highlight mode. And that

[246:37]

will pretty much put this on this gray,

[246:40]

and just show you the colors that it's

[246:42]

selecting. So, we can go back to our

[246:43]

qualifier here. By the way, this is

[246:45]

called a qualifier. And we can adjust

[246:47]

these sliders back and forth and the

[246:50]

softness of this selection to only

[246:52]

select his skin color. All right. Maybe

[246:54]

turn off the saturation. Probably turn

[246:56]

off the luminance because it doesn't

[246:57]

help too much. And we can get a good

[247:00]

selection here using this key because

[247:02]

what we really want is just the skin.

[247:05]

Once we have a pretty good selection

[247:06]

here, we can go to these matte finesse

[247:08]

controls. And this will let us adjust

[247:11]

our selection a little bit. One thing

[247:12]

that's going to help is if we push up

[247:13]

this pre-f filter just a touch, that's

[247:15]

going to get rid of some of those blocky

[247:16]

things. We can also clean the black and

[247:19]

clean the white. That's going to fill in

[247:21]

some of those holes. We also might just

[247:22]

want to play with this center until we

[247:24]

get mostly just his skin. We don't

[247:26]

really want his eyes or anything. So

[247:29]

maybe we do want to adjust the luminance

[247:31]

here. Just push this around. There we

[247:33]

go. We're mostly just wanting his skin.

[247:35]

Something like that. And this process is

[247:38]

very tricky to make this work. And so

[247:39]

you really only want to do these kind of

[247:41]

things with subtle adjustments. And so

[247:43]

maybe we'll do something like that. And

[247:44]

then limit it with the window even more.

[247:46]

So I can take this and just select his

[247:49]

skin like this. And now we have mostly

[247:52]

just his skin being selected. Then I can

[247:54]

switch out of highlight mode and I'll

[247:57]

take this midtone detail down. And

[247:58]

that's going to soften his skin in a way

[248:01]

that's a little more subtle. So we

[248:03]

aren't messing with the rest of the

[248:05]

image so much. We're just dealing with

[248:07]

some of the details on his skin. That

[248:09]

gives him just a little bit more

[248:10]

softness. You can really overdo this,

[248:13]

too. So we're just going to push this up

[248:14]

just a little bit just to take the edge

[248:16]

off. And so that's how you can do a

[248:17]

little bit of beauty refinement and

[248:19]

everything. Again, what this qualifier

[248:20]

is doing is it's making a selection. And

[248:23]

in that selection, we can do anything

[248:25]

that we would do to this node, just like

[248:27]

we can with a window. But you can get

[248:29]

yourself in trouble here because if you

[248:31]

do some kind of really extreme

[248:33]

correction, so if I take this gamma and

[248:34]

push it blue, you can really easily see

[248:36]

this selection. All right? And usually

[248:38]

it doesn't even look as good as this.

[248:40]

You can really get yourself in trouble

[248:42]

with this kind of thing. And so if

[248:43]

you're going to do something like change

[248:44]

a color, I'd highly recommend that you

[248:47]

do that with something like this hue

[248:48]

versus hue curve because it's just a lot

[248:51]

harder to get yourself in trouble. But

[248:52]

these are all things that we can do to

[248:54]

just refine each image even more. Let's

[248:57]

do another shot. Again, I'll hit alt s

[248:59]

for a new serial and then a couple of

[249:01]

parallels. Alt P like that. And we can

[249:04]

use these kind of circle windows to

[249:06]

really darken down parts of our frame. A

[249:08]

lot of the time I'll just grab the

[249:09]

offset and push that down. And you can

[249:11]

really make a big difference in your

[249:12]

shot just with these little windows. And

[249:15]

you can add multiple windows to each

[249:17]

node. And remember, you can always add

[249:19]

more windows to each node. And they

[249:20]

don't have to be the same kind either.

[249:22]

This window is one that I use a lot.

[249:24]

This is a gradient. And what it does, if

[249:26]

I were to make this pink, this does the

[249:28]

correction and then fades it out over

[249:30]

this line. And so I could do something

[249:32]

like push this here on the side. And

[249:34]

then let's not make this pink. Let's

[249:36]

just have that darken stuff a little

[249:38]

bit. And we can just darken one side of

[249:40]

our frame pretty easily. Okay. Really

[249:42]

gives that a lot more impact. Maybe we

[249:44]

want to darken this part because there's

[249:46]

just too much light here. Same thing.

[249:48]

Probably just a soft circle would do

[249:50]

fine. Put it here. Take that offset down

[249:52]

a touch just so it's not so distracting.

[249:54]

So here's before and here's after. And

[249:56]

you can go absolutely crazy on this and

[249:59]

do this for every single shot if you

[250:00]

want to. I'd recommend that you wait to

[250:03]

get this detailed on stuff until you

[250:05]

have time. The very first thing that you

[250:07]

should do when color grading your shots

[250:09]

is get a creative look and then match

[250:11]

them all together. Once you have that,

[250:12]

then if you have time, you can go

[250:14]

through and make things look prettier

[250:15]

and prettier. But don't start with that

[250:17]

even though it's fun. You can't always

[250:19]

start with the most fun thing,

[250:20]

unfortunately. Last thing I want to

[250:22]

touch on in the color page are there are

[250:25]

a couple other color wheel palettes that

[250:28]

you'll see used on a regular basis if

[250:30]

you watch color grading tutorials. One

[250:32]

is the log wheels. The other one is the

[250:35]

HDR wheels. Now, what the heck? Why are

[250:37]

there so many wheels? Here's the short

[250:39]

answer. These primaries, if I were to

[250:42]

Let's go to a different shot here so we

[250:44]

can see what's going on. These

[250:45]

primaries, if I were to grab this gain,

[250:47]

let's look at our waveform here. If I

[250:49]

were to take the gain and push that up,

[250:51]

what that's going to do is adjust the

[250:53]

entire image, but it's going to adjust

[250:55]

the brighter parts stronger. All right?

[250:58]

It's like in the curves when you take

[251:01]

the top part and you move it like this.

[251:03]

In fact, that's pretty much what gain

[251:05]

is. All right. The gamma adjusts the

[251:07]

middle, but it leaves the white point

[251:09]

and black point where they are. So, it's

[251:10]

basically doing this. The lift adjusts

[251:13]

the black point, which is doing this.

[251:15]

So, it affects the entire image, but

[251:17]

it's a lot stronger in the darker parts.

[251:20]

Okay. Now, if we go to our log wheel, we

[251:22]

have a similar layout here, but look

[251:24]

what happens when I adjust the

[251:25]

highlights. As I push this up, actually,

[251:27]

not a lot's happening. And that's

[251:29]

because adjusting these highlights is

[251:31]

like putting a dot here and then

[251:34]

adjusting the white point from there. It

[251:36]

sort of limits the adjustment to the

[251:38]

upper part of the image. And really, you

[251:40]

don't see a whole lot going on because

[251:41]

we don't have that brightest stuff. Same

[251:43]

thing for the shadows. As I move those

[251:45]

around, it only affects the lower part

[251:47]

of the image like this. There's an

[251:48]

anchor right here. So, to see that

[251:50]

difference, lift does this. Shadow in

[251:54]

the log wheels does this. So, it's

[251:57]

limited to just the dark parts. And you

[251:59]

can adjust where that little cut off

[252:01]

point is with these sliders right here,

[252:03]

the range sliders. And so, as I push up

[252:05]

the shadows, see, I'm pushing those up,

[252:07]

and it's really only affecting this part

[252:09]

of the image. But as I adjust the range,

[252:12]

then I can have it adjust more or less

[252:15]

of the image. And so, I could do

[252:16]

something like push my highlights really

[252:18]

yellow, and it doesn't really affect

[252:19]

anything until I bring this highlight

[252:21]

range down and start to tell it that

[252:23]

more things are highlights. So, there we

[252:25]

go. Now we're considering this part and

[252:27]

these parts of the image as highlights.

[252:30]

And now things are getting yellow,

[252:31]

right? So it's basically just splitting

[252:33]

up the image into kind of thresholds.

[252:35]

Highlights adjusts this, shadows adjust

[252:37]

this, mid tones adjust this. Instead of

[252:39]

adjusting the entire image, it splits it

[252:41]

up. Okay. So what the heck do you do

[252:43]

with these kind of things? This is if

[252:45]

you're trying to adjust something really

[252:48]

specific. Like for instance, if I want

[252:50]

just this window to be darker, but I

[252:53]

don't want to adjust anything else, I

[252:55]

could take my highlights down a little

[252:57]

bit and then adjust this range to where

[252:59]

it starts affecting the window. And so

[253:02]

now I'm mostly just adjusting the

[253:04]

highlights without even touching the

[253:05]

shadows and the mid tones so much. And

[253:07]

so again, this is for secondary

[253:08]

corrections for the most part. Something

[253:10]

that's confusing about calling these log

[253:12]

wheels is a lot of people think that if

[253:15]

you have log footage, you should use the

[253:17]

log wheels or that log wheels only work

[253:19]

in log space or that by using it, it

[253:23]

turns it into log or anything. None of

[253:25]

that's a thing. Where this starts and

[253:27]

stops is this is called log wheels.

[253:29]

That's it. Just ignore everything else.

[253:31]

This is what they call the adjustments

[253:33]

that split up the image into these tonal

[253:35]

areas. Okay. The HDR pallet is basically

[253:38]

a big boy version of that. Instead of

[253:41]

splitting it up into three parts, it

[253:44]

splits it up into six parts. That's it.

[253:46]

And so we have the range control for

[253:48]

each one and the softness for the

[253:50]

threshold of each one. And it's split up

[253:52]

into six parts. If you click on the

[253:54]

little sunshine for any of these, you

[253:55]

can see what it's affecting. So

[253:57]

specular, basically nothing. Highlights,

[253:59]

things that are a little bit darker.

[254:00]

Light is that range. Shadow is this

[254:03]

range. Dark is this range. and black is

[254:06]

this range. And so it splits it up into

[254:08]

these tonal ranges and you can adjust

[254:10]

each one to your liking. Basically, if

[254:12]

you want to get really detailed with

[254:14]

things, my advice, if you're brand new

[254:16]

to color, don't even worry about the HDR

[254:18]

wheels. Don't even touch them. Sometimes

[254:20]

maybe you'll get into the log wheels,

[254:21]

but honestly, just stay with primaries

[254:23]

because that is going to be able to do

[254:25]

99% of what you ever need to do, and

[254:28]

it's much, much simpler. Now, something

[254:30]

about color. This is one of the most fun

[254:32]

things about color. They have these

[254:35]

color surfaces that are really cool.

[254:37]

It's basically a way for you to be able

[254:39]

to touch all of the controls with

[254:42]

hardware knobs and sliders and

[254:44]

everything and it makes it go a lot

[254:45]

faster and it's more fun, more tactile.

[254:48]

There's all kinds of good reasons to use

[254:50]

a color panel. They have multiple

[254:52]

different versions. The most affordable

[254:54]

one being this Da Vinci Resolve micro

[254:56]

color panel, which actually works with

[254:58]

an iPad, which is really neat. There are

[255:00]

three track balls here and those

[255:02]

correspond to lift, gamma, and gain. And

[255:05]

there's these rings that rotate around

[255:08]

the track balls, which correspond to the

[255:10]

master wheels. And then a lot of these

[255:13]

knobs and buttons and everything are

[255:15]

basically these things. All right, so

[255:18]

there isn't really anything that you can

[255:20]

only do on a color surface. It just

[255:22]

makes things a little bit easier and a

[255:24]

little bit faster. They have a bigger

[255:25]

version of the color surface called the

[255:27]

mini panel and an absolute crazy

[255:29]

spaceship version which is called the

[255:31]

advanced panel which has a million

[255:33]

different buttons and things. And like I

[255:35]

said, this is really fun and it gives

[255:37]

you the tactile control that is there's

[255:39]

just really nothing like it. And these

[255:41]

color panels are a little bit expensive.

[255:43]

The micro color panel starts at $559.

[255:46]

The mini panel is about $2,300 and the

[255:48]

advanced panel is $30,000. But the

[255:51]

question is, do you actually need one to

[255:53]

do color? No. No. You don't need one to

[255:56]

do color. In fact, I would recommend

[255:58]

that unless you plan on doing a lot of

[256:00]

color. And when I mean a lot of color,

[256:02]

color grading more than a thousand shots

[256:05]

a week. I think that's when it really

[256:07]

gets useful to have a color surface. If

[256:10]

you're doing that kind of volume of

[256:12]

color work, it's absolutely worth the

[256:14]

investment and it makes it more fun. If

[256:16]

you're making a video every couple weeks

[256:18]

and it has 80 shots, honestly, it's

[256:20]

probably not going to be that big of a

[256:22]

deal that you get a color surface or

[256:23]

not. So, do you actually need it? Not

[256:25]

really. If you're really into gear and

[256:27]

you want your desk to look really cool

[256:29]

and you really want to practice getting

[256:30]

quick at color, maybe you're wanting to

[256:32]

be a colorist and maybe eventually do

[256:33]

1,000 shots a day. If you're really

[256:35]

hardcore on that, then yeah, you should

[256:36]

totally get one. Or if you have the

[256:38]

money and can responsibly spend it and

[256:40]

you need to justify something like this

[256:42]

to your boss or spouse, you can show

[256:43]

them this part of the video. They

[256:45]

absolutely need a color surface. It's

[256:47]

imperative. If you don't have a color

[256:49]

surface, what are you doing? Do you even

[256:51]

video? Go ahead and make that

[256:53]

investment.

[256:54]

Are they gone? Okay. So, there's about

[256:56]

11 billion other things that I want to

[256:58]

show you on the color page. If you want

[257:00]

to learn more about color, let me know

[257:02]

in the comments. We'll talk more about

[257:03]

it. But we got to move on. We got to

[257:05]

keep going. The porcels who edit this

[257:07]

video are going to have my hide if I

[257:09]

don't keep moving. So, let's go. All

[257:11]

right. Let's talk about the Fairlite

[257:13]

page. So, this is the audio world of Da

[257:17]

Vinci Resolve. You can think of this as

[257:19]

like the main dedicated audio app. In

[257:22]

the Adobe world, this would be like

[257:24]

Adobe Audition or something, or for

[257:26]

those of us who've been around for a

[257:27]

little bit, something like ProTools.

[257:29]

This is the dedicated audio part of

[257:32]

Resolve. Now, you can do a lot of audio

[257:34]

stuff in the edit page of Resolve, but

[257:36]

you can think of this as there's two

[257:38]

separate apps here. There's your editing

[257:40]

app which has general effects and it has

[257:42]

some audio tools and you can add clips

[257:45]

and you can move them around and you can

[257:46]

fade things and you can adjust volume

[257:48]

and that kind of thing. So, it's like

[257:49]

the basic version of adjusting audio.

[257:52]

Whereas an audio app, the idea is that

[257:55]

you can get super detailed with your

[257:56]

audio. You can have lots and lots of

[257:58]

tracks. There are specialized audio

[258:00]

effects, plugins, all kinds of things.

[258:02]

And it's just really tuned into making

[258:05]

good audio. And that's exactly what's

[258:07]

happening here in Fairlite page. Just

[258:09]

like the other pages of Resolve, your

[258:12]

timeline here in the edit page can just

[258:14]

be opened in Fairlite just by clicking

[258:16]

on the Fairlite page. So here we are.

[258:18]

Here's our color timeline that we've

[258:20]

been working on. And this part down here

[258:22]

is a similar interface where we have our

[258:24]

timeline and we can adjust the height of

[258:26]

our audio tracks. But look how big we

[258:28]

can make these audio tracks. And look

[258:30]

how much we can zoom in here. So I'll

[258:32]

just put this in here and just hit

[258:33]

control plus a bunch. We can really zoom

[258:36]

in here crazy, even down to the sample

[258:40]

level of audio. So, Fairlite can get

[258:42]

just as crazy as you want to get when it

[258:44]

comes to getting detailed with your

[258:46]

audio. One of the first things you might

[258:47]

be thinking is, okay, I can do a lot of

[258:49]

this in the edit page, right? I can zoom

[258:51]

in and I can get crazy with audio here

[258:53]

in the edit page. When should I move to

[258:55]

the fairlight page? What's the point of

[258:57]

doing Fairlite stuff over the edit page?

[258:59]

And the honest truth is that you can

[259:00]

move back and forth. It's not really

[259:02]

that essential that you're like ready to

[259:05]

do audio before you go into the

[259:07]

Fairlight page. A lot of the time what I

[259:08]

do is I'll jump into Fairlite and I'll

[259:10]

adjust some things that Fairlight's good

[259:12]

at and then switch back to the edit and

[259:13]

kind of keep editing. And then if I want

[259:15]

to mess with the clip, maybe I'll go

[259:17]

over to Fairlite and adjust the clip and

[259:19]

everything. What's really cool is that

[259:21]

this whole timeline on the Fairite page

[259:23]

is the same as the edit page. And so if

[259:25]

I add a fade on the fairlight page and

[259:27]

switch over to the edit page, we have

[259:29]

that same fade right here on the edit

[259:31]

page. If I were to write click and

[259:33]

change the clip color here on the

[259:34]

fairlight page, guess what? That clip

[259:37]

color is on the edit page. And so it's

[259:39]

nice because you can really just go back

[259:40]

and forth. And this is huge because in

[259:43]

basically every other app ever, you

[259:46]

can't do that. you would have to do

[259:47]

something like export your timeline as

[259:50]

an XML or some kind of format that an

[259:53]

audio app can open, which means that you

[259:56]

should have things pretty well dialed in

[259:58]

and pretty much finalized before you go

[260:00]

into the audio app. And you don't even

[260:02]

have to worry about that with Fairlite.

[260:04]

We're so spoiled. You can just switch

[260:06]

over to Fairlite and do some

[260:07]

adjustments, switch back to edit, no

[260:09]

problem. Okay, so we can switch into

[260:10]

Fairlite and back if we want to get a

[260:12]

little bit more fancy with our audio.

[260:14]

But let's take a second and look at the

[260:16]

interface here. So right here we have

[260:18]

our timeline. And this acts pretty much

[260:20]

like it does in the edit page. There are

[260:22]

tracks, there are clips, you move around

[260:24]

in time, all of that. Now, it's possible

[260:26]

that on your system you don't have the

[260:29]

video tracks. If you go up here to this

[260:31]

little icon, there are all kinds of

[260:33]

options for viewing our timeline. And

[260:35]

there's actually a similar button to

[260:37]

this in the edit page right here and the

[260:40]

cut page, right? So, anytime you want to

[260:42]

adjust how your timeline looks, there's

[260:45]

some kind of version of this. But here,

[260:47]

this top menu item is display video

[260:50]

tracks. And so, if you're just working

[260:51]

on audio, sometimes you don't really

[260:53]

need the video tracks. But, I don't

[260:54]

know, for me, it's comfortable to be

[260:56]

able to see the video tracks just so

[260:58]

that this looks a little bit more

[261:00]

familiar to the edit page cuz sometimes

[261:02]

I'll have clips colored a certain way or

[261:04]

arranged a certain way that kind of

[261:06]

helps me navigate where things are on

[261:07]

the timeline and I don't want to lose

[261:09]

that in Fairlight. Over here on our

[261:11]

track headers, we have our mute and our

[261:12]

solo. So, we can mute tracks and solo

[261:15]

tracks. Solo basically just mutes

[261:17]

everything except for that track. We

[261:18]

have meters for the tracks. And I'll

[261:20]

tell you something in Fairlite, tracks

[261:22]

are your best friend, okay? You need to

[261:25]

be good friends with tracks. Don't be

[261:27]

afraid to add lots and lots of tracks.

[261:29]

Get familiar with how tracks work

[261:30]

because tracks are the magic when it

[261:33]

comes to audio. We'll talk about that

[261:34]

more in a little bit. Over here to the

[261:36]

right, we have our mixer. And this is

[261:39]

where we adjust controls for our mix as

[261:42]

well as each track. This is where we can

[261:44]

set inputs for recording. We can add

[261:46]

effects. We can adjust dynamics, which

[261:49]

we'll get into in a little bit. We can

[261:51]

adjust EQ. We can route each track to a

[261:54]

separate bus, which is like a group of

[261:56]

tracks, like a submix. We have pan

[261:58]

controls and our volume here for each

[262:01]

track. Up here in the middle, we have

[262:03]

our tools, which are very similar to the

[262:05]

edit page. Playback controls. Again,

[262:08]

very similar. And we have a big bunch of

[262:11]

audio meters here. This is going to show

[262:13]

you the volume of every single track in

[262:15]

your mix. We have a loudness meter here,

[262:17]

which helps monitor how loud things are

[262:20]

perceived, which can be good if you're

[262:21]

doing broadcast things and even somewhat

[262:23]

useful if you're making mixes for

[262:25]

YouTube. And then we have our viewer

[262:27]

here. It's a lot smaller, but we can

[262:29]

actually pop this out and make a little

[262:31]

bit bigger viewer if we want to. I'll

[262:33]

just pop that back in. But really, we

[262:35]

have a lot of space here in the timeline

[262:36]

because this is where we're going to do

[262:38]

most of our work. We're going to be

[262:40]

adding sound effects and mixing things

[262:42]

and moving them around. A lot of that

[262:43]

happens in the timeline and the mixer.

[262:46]

Up along the top, we have some familiar

[262:48]

windows, our media pool and our effects.

[262:51]

Those work just like the other ones. We

[262:53]

have our metadata and our inspector.

[262:54]

Again, same thing as the other pages.

[262:56]

And some other panels that we might get

[262:58]

into here in a little bit. So, let's

[263:00]

work on something, shall we? Let's

[263:01]

switch back to the edit page here for a

[263:02]

second. And in the Fairlight folder, if

[263:04]

you imported it with me at the beginning

[263:06]

of this video, you should have several

[263:08]

different files here. I'm just going to

[263:09]

rightclick here in the empty space and

[263:11]

hit timelines, create new timeline. And

[263:13]

we'll call this Fairlite timeline. Hit

[263:15]

create. And let's build our quick time

[263:17]

that we can work through together. You

[263:19]

should have a movie here called

[263:20]

Fairlight Page Video Track. Drag this in

[263:23]

like this. And then there's also

[263:25]

Fairlight Dia. That's short for

[263:27]

dialogue. We'll drag this down here. And

[263:29]

this is going to be the audio for our

[263:30]

scene. And we're going to make sure this

[263:32]

came through just right here in a

[263:33]

second. But this is a different scene

[263:35]

from the same movie that lends itself to

[263:37]

some sound design, some mixing, some

[263:39]

fun. So, let's switch over to the

[263:41]

Fairlite page and take a look at what

[263:42]

we've got in the Verite page. By

[263:44]

default, it shows you a little bit more

[263:46]

about the audio channels. This dialogue

[263:49]

is coming in as a mono track. The reason

[263:51]

I know that is because this track is a

[263:55]

stereo track. I can tell by this little

[263:57]

2.0 right here. What that's going to do

[263:59]

is have a list of channels within this

[264:02]

track. So, this dialogue is actually

[264:04]

just one track that comes in on the left

[264:07]

channel. Hold up, I got to get my

[264:08]

headphones. There we go. So, if we play

[264:11]

this back, we're just going to hear that

[264:12]

on the left speaker. And there are

[264:14]

actually more tracks in this wave file.

[264:17]

So, let's open this up in the media

[264:18]

pool. Rightclick and go to clip

[264:20]

attributes. We're going to go to audio.

[264:22]

And we're going to make sure that our

[264:23]

format is set right. We should set it

[264:25]

like this. format mono audio one mix

[264:27]

mono audio 2 mix. You can pick which

[264:30]

track you want on each of these. That

[264:32]

looks good. And I'll hit okay. And let's

[264:34]

take this dialogue and let's drag this

[264:37]

down. And look at this. This is actually

[264:38]

adding it in two different tracks. So

[264:41]

why don't we instead why don't we

[264:43]

rightclick on this track here and say

[264:45]

change track type to mono. And then we

[264:47]

have our audio 2. This is mono as well.

[264:50]

So let's get rid of this and just move

[264:51]

this down. So that's what we should have

[264:53]

is two separate tracks like this.

[264:55]

Sometimes things just don't come in

[264:57]

right for whatever reason on the edit

[264:59]

page. Sometimes when you have fancy

[265:01]

audio tracks, you might need to jump

[265:02]

into fair light to get that working. But

[265:04]

this is what we should have is our

[265:06]

dialogue wave should have one channel on

[265:09]

this track and one channel on this

[265:10]

track. And both of these tracks should

[265:12]

be mono. Okay. So now if we play this

[265:14]

back, because these are mono, they're

[265:15]

both going to come out of both speakers,

[265:17]

but they are going to be separate tracks

[265:19]

here.

[265:26]

Where is he?

[265:27]

I had him and then you pushed me.

[265:29]

Great. So, this is just the dialogue for

[265:32]

our sequence and probably 75% of what

[265:36]

we're going to be doing here in Fairlite

[265:38]

is stuff that you've really already

[265:40]

learned in the edit page. So, this

[265:41]

section of this video is going to be a

[265:44]

little bit shorter, but I do want to

[265:45]

show you some specific stuff in Fairlite

[265:47]

that's really neat. One thing that we

[265:49]

can do is split each of these up into

[265:51]

little clips, which again happens like

[265:53]

you would on the edit page. But you'll

[265:55]

notice when I click on this, it actually

[265:57]

selects both of these tracks. So, I'm

[265:59]

going to select this, rightclick, and go

[266:01]

down to where it says link clips and

[266:03]

uncheck that. Now, I can move each of

[266:05]

these separately, which is probably

[266:06]

going to be really good for what we're

[266:07]

doing. And I can use the same shortcuts

[266:10]

that I was using. I can split each

[266:12]

track. I can just select it like this. I

[266:14]

can grab and trim it very similar just

[266:16]

like we would on the edit page. Just

[266:18]

splitting and trimming like this. And

[266:21]

it's silent here. So, we don't really

[266:23]

have to trim this, but I like to do that

[266:25]

just to keep organized a little bit. A

[266:26]

little bit easier to think of these in

[266:28]

little chunks. And it also feels like

[266:30]

it's empty here, which it is. There's no

[266:33]

sound at all here. And so that kind of

[266:35]

reminds us that hey, we need to actually

[266:37]

add some sound to this in order for this

[266:39]

to feel like a finished professional

[266:42]

kind of product. Now, something that's

[266:44]

really unique to the Fairlite page is

[266:47]

its way of selecting pieces of clips.

[266:50]

So, let's zoom in here a little bit.

[266:52]

I'll go ahead and close my media pool

[266:54]

just so we have a little bit of space.

[266:55]

Make this a little bigger. And let's say

[266:57]

that I want to select and adjust this

[267:00]

waveform right here. In the edit page,

[267:02]

what I would have to do would be to go

[267:04]

here and split this and then I have this

[267:06]

as a separate thing. But what I can

[267:07]

actually do in the fairlight page is I

[267:10]

can select regions. So I can grab this

[267:13]

second tool here, which is range mode,

[267:14]

and I can click and drag. And that's

[267:16]

going to set an in and an out, and

[267:18]

that's going to let me go in and be a

[267:20]

little bit more detailed with the actual

[267:22]

sounds itself. So I can make this

[267:23]

selection and hit backspace, and that'll

[267:25]

just get rid of that part of the audio.

[267:28]

I can also grab this line and push it

[267:30]

up. And that's going to add little key

[267:32]

frames to this volume line. And so I can

[267:35]

push that up like that. And then if I

[267:37]

want to select a different part, I can

[267:38]

do it like this. And so that makes it

[267:40]

really easy to be able to select a piece

[267:42]

and kind of adjust it without having to

[267:45]

do a bunch of manual key framing and

[267:47]

stuff. Now the thing that's not great

[267:48]

about this is that if I want to say move

[267:51]

this clip around, I can't. I'm just

[267:53]

selecting parts of it. I would have to

[267:54]

switch to this other mode. But what I

[267:57]

can do is switch to this focus mode and

[267:59]

that's a combination of these tools. So

[268:01]

if I'm on the top part of the clip, I

[268:03]

can do my range mode just like before.

[268:05]

But if I'm on the bottom part of the

[268:07]

clip, I can grab the clip and move it

[268:08]

back and forth. And so this is a really

[268:10]

nice way to work inside of Fairlite,

[268:12]

especially if you're going in and

[268:13]

adjusting pieces of your clips. Just

[268:16]

remember to be on the top part of the

[268:17]

clip if you want to adjust a range and

[268:19]

the bottom part if you want to move

[268:20]

things around. So yeah, just like the

[268:22]

edit page, I can hit alt and add little

[268:25]

key frames here to the volume. But

[268:27]

what's cool is I can animate a whole

[268:29]

bunch of stuff in the same way. And to

[268:32]

select what I want to animate, I can go

[268:33]

over here to this little drop down where

[268:35]

it says none. And there are all kinds of

[268:37]

things that I can key frame here. So by

[268:40]

default, it's the clip volume right

[268:42]

here. But I can also adjust the fader

[268:44]

level. It kind of does the same thing,

[268:46]

but for the track. And so what this is

[268:48]

going to do is automate this slider. And

[268:50]

watch what happens when I play this

[268:51]

back. It turns it down. And so you can

[268:54]

key frame anything in the mixer for the

[268:57]

track. Just like that. And this is the

[268:59]

kind of thing that you just can't do on

[269:01]

the edit page. And now if I want to

[269:02]

remove that automation, I can hold

[269:04]

control and alt and just click on these

[269:06]

little points and get rid of it. Yay. So

[269:09]

we have our dialogue here in our movie.

[269:12]

But what's really going to help here is

[269:14]

to add a little bit of room tone, a

[269:16]

little bit of ambience. And so let's go

[269:18]

over to our media pool here in our sound

[269:20]

effects folder. We should have a clip

[269:23]

called GC ambience interior bathroom,

[269:26]

which is going to be really helpful. And

[269:27]

so this is just kind of like the sound

[269:30]

of the air, sound of the environment,

[269:32]

the room tone here. And that's going to

[269:34]

kind of fill in some of these little

[269:36]

gaps that are just completely silent.

[269:38]

You pretty much never want that. That's

[269:39]

called dead air. We don't want that. And

[269:41]

before I play this back, I'm actually

[269:42]

going to take the volume down here for

[269:44]

our preview because these ambients are

[269:46]

very, very loud. So, there we go. That's

[269:49]

kind of what we're looking for is that

[269:50]

little that little bit of just kind of

[269:52]

ambient noise. And in this preview, this

[269:55]

is where we can set our in andout just

[269:56]

like we would normally do in the viewer

[269:58]

in the edit page. But I'm just going to

[270:00]

use this whole thing. I can grab it and

[270:02]

drag it down here. And I can either drag

[270:03]

it to an existing track or I can make a

[270:05]

new track just by dragging it down like

[270:07]

this. So, let's put that in. And this is

[270:09]

going to be our ambience. Now, before

[270:11]

long, our tracks are going to get crazy,

[270:13]

and so it's probably a good idea to

[270:15]

start renaming these. All you do is

[270:16]

click on the track name. And so, we'll

[270:18]

call this dialogue dash guy, and we'll

[270:21]

say uh dialogue dia/girl.

[270:24]

And this is going to be our ambience

[270:26]

amb. You can name these however you want

[270:28]

as long as you recognize it. And the

[270:30]

first thing I'm going to do on this

[270:31]

ambience is I'm going to take the volume

[270:33]

down on this track. So, to do that,

[270:36]

that's going to be in our mixer. And

[270:37]

it's a little bit confusing because the

[270:38]

mixer is right here on the side. And

[270:40]

what we're going to do is look for track

[270:42]

three. So there's A1, audio one, audio

[270:45]

2, and audio 3. Here we have audio one,

[270:47]

audio 2, and where's audio 3? Well,

[270:49]

there is a little scroll here that we

[270:51]

can scroll over. Or we can even move

[270:53]

this out a little bit to see more

[270:54]

tracks. And so here on track three,

[270:56]

we're going to take this fader all the

[270:58]

way down. Let's take this to like, I

[271:00]

don't know, -20, something like that,

[271:01]

and just see how that sounds compared to

[271:03]

our audio. There we go. That's a little

[271:06]

better. push this up so we can hear it.

[271:08]

So, that ambience is still a little bit

[271:09]

hot. We'll take this down a lot lot

[271:11]

more. And what's nice is I can play this

[271:12]

back while I'm adjusting the volume in

[271:15]

this track, which is a little bit harder

[271:17]

to do here on the interface or in the

[271:19]

inspector. So, I can just take this down

[271:20]

and just bring it up just to where I

[271:22]

start to notice it. I don't even know on

[271:23]

your on your speakers, but it definitely

[271:26]

like it sounds like there is air in the

[271:29]

environment now. So, that's great. Let's

[271:30]

go ahead and close our media pool and

[271:32]

we'll just work with this again. Let's

[271:33]

just grab the edge of this and I'll just

[271:35]

split this just like we would on the

[271:37]

edit page and get rid of this edge.

[271:39]

There we go. And now we have our

[271:40]

ambience. We can also colorize a track

[271:43]

just by right-clicking and going down to

[271:46]

change track color. And this can be

[271:47]

really helpful for organizing your

[271:49]

different types of sounds. And so maybe

[271:52]

we'll have our dialogue apricot. Sure.

[271:54]

Right click track color apricot. That'll

[271:57]

also colorize them here in the mixer.

[271:58]

It'll be a little bit easier. Ambience,

[272:00]

let's turn green. Sounds good. Now,

[272:02]

let's add a little bit of music. So,

[272:04]

same thing, media pool. We're going to

[272:05]

go up to our fair light directory

[272:07]

because we have our music right here.

[272:09]

Same thing, just drag it in. We'll just

[272:11]

butt this up here. And so, we have our

[272:12]

music that's a little bit long for our

[272:14]

scene. Now, if we want to make this

[272:15]

music fit the length of the clip, there

[272:17]

are ways to do that in the studio

[272:19]

version of Resolve. That's pretty fancy.

[272:21]

So, I'll show you that. I'll just kind

[272:23]

of move this over here for a second.

[272:25]

This whole clip is about 17, 18 seconds,

[272:28]

something like that. So, what we could

[272:30]

do is trim this and then select it and

[272:32]

go to the inspector. And there are some

[272:34]

really cool AI adjustments that we can

[272:36]

make to clips here in the fairlight

[272:38]

page. This one is going to be AI music

[272:41]

editor. And so, what we can do is we can

[272:43]

select a target length. So, let's say 17

[272:46]

seconds. So, just 1700. And then hit

[272:48]

adjust. It's going to analyze that clip.

[272:51]

It's going to go through and figure out

[272:52]

where all the beats are and all that

[272:54]

kind of stuff. And it's going to try and

[272:55]

make it shorter. and it will do a decent

[272:59]

job. It's going to actually make this

[273:01]

about 20 seconds. So, let's actually

[273:03]

maybe see if we can get this to maybe

[273:05]

we'll target like 15 seconds and then

[273:08]

hit adjust. There we go. Yeah, it's

[273:10]

going to want to do 12 seconds or

[273:11]

something. So, you can get it close, but

[273:13]

it should do a pretty good job of making

[273:15]

everything happen on beat. So, let's

[273:16]

listen.

[273:20]

[Music]

[273:27]

[Music]

[273:30]

and that works. But if you don't like

[273:32]

what it's doing here, or if you don't

[273:34]

have the paid version of Resolve, here's

[273:36]

a really easy way that you can shorten

[273:37]

your music. I'm just going to reset this

[273:40]

AI music editor and look at this full

[273:43]

length. And let's just align this where

[273:45]

we want it to be. Just get rid of our

[273:47]

inspector here. Let's take a look at

[273:49]

this. I think we want this to come to a

[273:52]

head right when that toilet happens.

[273:55]

Yeah. So, let's actually just trim the

[273:57]

front of this here. And let's have this

[273:59]

end right about where that toilet

[274:01]

happens.

[274:04]

And then you push me.

[274:06]

Let's have that just end right about

[274:08]

there.

[274:10]

I had him and then you pushed me.

[274:13]

Yeah, that's nice. So, we have that kind

[274:15]

of awkward empty feeling there. Maybe

[274:18]

we'll just fade this up like this.

[274:23]

[Music]

[274:27]

Where is he?

[274:28]

I had him and then you pushed me.

[274:31]

Yeah. So, that actually works without

[274:32]

having to do a bunch of edits. But I'll

[274:34]

just alt drag this out so I can show you

[274:36]

this. If you want to shorten a clip and

[274:39]

have it on beat, this is the easiest way

[274:41]

to do it. And you don't need any AI

[274:43]

stuff. You can just do this yourself. A

[274:44]

lot of music you can listen to and count

[274:46]

on the beats. And then you want to cut

[274:48]

it and splice it on the beat. This one

[274:50]

is a little bit harder to count, at

[274:51]

least for me. And so really what we want

[274:53]

to do is just split this right here. And

[274:55]

we'll just kind of trim this to be

[274:57]

shorter. And really a great way to do

[274:59]

this is just to look at the waveform and

[275:01]

look for similar waveforms. So this and

[275:04]

this look similar. And so what I'll do

[275:06]

is just trim this to be right on that

[275:08]

peak here. And move this down. Let's

[275:11]

just see how this sounds.

[275:16]

Decent. And what we could do is

[275:17]

rightclick and say 24 frame crossfade

[275:20]

like that. Pretty good. And now we have

[275:22]

a shorter version of the song. So that's

[275:23]

a great way you can splice a song. But

[275:25]

we don't even need to do that right

[275:26]

here. We can just have it fade in. And

[275:28]

then right there we'll also have this

[275:30]

fade out. Great. Now this is going to

[275:32]

actually be masked a little bit with a

[275:35]

toilet flushing sound. So that's going

[275:37]

to be in our effects that we add to

[275:39]

this. And really a great way to go about

[275:42]

adding your sound effects and everything

[275:44]

is to do it in passes. Just like we edit

[275:46]

in passes and do our color and passes

[275:48]

and everything, doing this audio in

[275:50]

passes is really helpful. We're

[275:52]

basically looking for the big obvious

[275:54]

things, the things that are going to

[275:55]

take somebody out of the experience if

[275:57]

they don't hear it. And we want to add

[275:59]

those effects. So, anything that should

[276:01]

be making a sound that should be really

[276:02]

obvious, boy, that better be in it.

[276:04]

Okay, so let's go through here. And what

[276:06]

I'm just going to do is just hit M on

[276:08]

the keyboard for a marker. That's going

[276:09]

to add a marker to our sequence, and

[276:11]

that'll help us remember to add the

[276:13]

effects there. Okay. So, we need So,

[276:17]

right as we go, we need this closing

[276:19]

door sound

[276:22]

in the story, she falls down from inside

[276:25]

the door. So, we definitely need

[276:26]

something like that.

[276:28]

[Music]

[276:29]

Probably opening the door might be good.

[276:32]

And then you push me.

[276:34]

We need the toilet flushing sound right

[276:36]

there for sure.

[276:40]

Oh, no.

[276:42]

Moving the book. We need some kind of

[276:44]

audio for that. Opening the lid. Yeah.

[276:47]

So, all of that kind of needs to happen.

[276:48]

By the way, this scene, if it's

[276:50]

confusing, out of context. So, the kid,

[276:52]

he just shoved her in the bathroom

[276:54]

holding the alien and she fell down and

[276:57]

accidentally flushed the little blue

[276:59]

alien down the toilet. So, this is where

[277:01]

things really get bad. So, let's just go

[277:03]

through this. So, this first effect we

[277:06]

need is the door closing. And we can

[277:08]

open up the media pool and look for our

[277:10]

door closing stuff. But I want to show

[277:11]

you a really cool thing about Fairlite.

[277:14]

So let's say that you have a whole bunch

[277:16]

of sounds, like we're just giving you

[277:18]

like 20 sounds or something. But if you

[277:20]

have 700 sounds, it can be really hard

[277:23]

to go through and listen to every sound

[277:25]

and try and figure out the exact sound

[277:26]

that you want. And so this sound

[277:28]

library, this is a way that you can tell

[277:31]

Resolve where all your sounds are and it

[277:34]

can index them and make it really easy

[277:36]

to find the sounds that you need. All

[277:38]

you have to do is go to these three dots

[277:40]

and say add library. And we're going to

[277:42]

navigate to our files and our sound

[277:45]

effects folder that we downloaded and

[277:47]

hit select folder. But you can select

[277:48]

any folder on your system, anything that

[277:50]

has all of your sounds. And then it's

[277:53]

going to go through and scan all of the

[277:55]

sounds and index them so that it can

[277:57]

quickly find them. And if you have lots

[277:59]

and lots of sounds, it might take a

[278:00]

little bit, but this is going to be

[278:02]

really quick. Sound library sounds. Scan

[278:04]

successful. Hit okay. And now we can

[278:06]

search here and it will quickly bring up

[278:09]

anything. So if I type in toilet, here

[278:11]

are all of the toilet sounds. Toilet

[278:14]

sounds. So we have toilet flush, toilet

[278:17]

lid open. And we can just double click

[278:19]

this to play it back. So there's our

[278:22]

flush,

[278:24]

toilet, dropping the book on the toilet,

[278:26]

opening the lid, all of that. We can

[278:28]

find the toilet stuff really easily. So

[278:29]

let's type in door. Now we have all of

[278:31]

our door sounds. So doorork knob sound.

[278:34]

Yeah, that's good. We need the door

[278:36]

closing.

[278:38]

Yeah, good. So, here we can set our in

[278:40]

and our out just like this. I

[278:43]

And we can drag this into a new track.

[278:45]

And I can take off snapping so that I

[278:47]

can move this back and forth really

[278:48]

easily. Good. And we'll get rid of this

[278:50]

marker here. We need the kind of falling

[278:52]

down sounds. Let's type in body. That'll

[278:55]

bring up. We have our body drops.

[278:58]

There we go. And we can use JK and L to

[279:01]

play this back. So, these are all

[279:02]

different sounds that we can layer to

[279:05]

make it seem like there's body hitting

[279:07]

the floor. So, to do that, let's make a

[279:10]

few more tracks here. I can add tracks

[279:11]

by right clicking on any track and just

[279:13]

going to add tracks. And let's add a few

[279:16]

mono tracks. Let's do five mono tracks.

[279:18]

We'll add those. We'll do below audio 5.

[279:21]

Sounds good. Make sure we rename this.

[279:23]

And generally, like it's okay to add a

[279:25]

million tracks. All right. There is a

[279:27]

limit to the tracks, but it's a really

[279:29]

big limit. So just add a new track for

[279:32]

every new sound. What I would do is

[279:33]

group similar sounds that are in a

[279:35]

similar environment at the similar time

[279:37]

on a track, but otherwise pretty much

[279:39]

make everything else a separate track

[279:41]

just because then you have control over

[279:43]

all of those tracks with the faders. And

[279:45]

it's really easy to kind of mix things

[279:46]

later. So this one will be called a

[279:48]

door. This one is music. And let's just

[279:51]

make these really tiny. And all these

[279:53]

tracks, we're going to call this body

[279:55]

one, body two, body three, and so on. So

[279:59]

now we have five tracks here. I can hold

[280:01]

shift and scroll up to give us a little

[280:03]

bit of room here. Let's just grab some

[280:05]

of these body drops. Just set an in and

[280:07]

out. Something like that. Drag this into

[280:10]

body one. Let's go a little further. Get

[280:12]

some other ones like that. Drag this in.

[280:14]

Good. We'll use the knuckles body hit.

[280:17]

Sure. Just like that. Throw that in

[280:19]

here, too. So now we have five different

[280:21]

tracks of all of these different sounds.

[280:23]

And I can quickly trim these using my

[280:25]

arrange selection here. Just grabbing

[280:28]

the empty spaces and getting rid of it

[280:31]

like that. It's really nice way to trim

[280:33]

this stuff if I need to. Good. And now

[280:36]

we can just layer these on. So, we'll

[280:38]

just shove these all together like this

[280:40]

and just see what it sounds like. Let's

[280:42]

just see how it goes.

[280:45]

Yeah. And click solo just on these.

[280:48]

There we go. Maybe I'll just kind of

[280:50]

move these around and maybe spread them

[280:51]

out a little.

[280:54]

Good. So now we have something

[280:55]

definitely falling down, crashing, that

[280:57]

kind of thing. And if we want to control

[280:59]

all of these tracks together, we can

[281:00]

group them. I can select body one and

[281:03]

shift select body five and hit CtrlG.

[281:06]

And this is going to make a group. And

[281:08]

we'll just call this body drop. And

[281:10]

we're going to link all of these

[281:12]

controls here. Let's just go ahead and

[281:13]

link all of them and then hit save. And

[281:16]

now what's going to happen is if I

[281:19]

adjust the controls for any of these, it

[281:22]

actually adjusts them all. And so I can

[281:24]

link all of these different parameters

[281:26]

for my tracks. And even though they're

[281:27]

on different tracks, they're working as

[281:29]

one track. So that's a nice way to do

[281:31]

it. So if I want this to be quieter,

[281:34]

can bring that down. So that kind of

[281:35]

works. And I can link these together

[281:38]

like that. The other thing I could do

[281:40]

would be to put these into a bus. A bus

[281:43]

is sort of like a group of tracks, but

[281:44]

it's really more like a separate mix

[281:47]

that each track goes into. What a bus

[281:50]

will do is route the output of all of

[281:53]

these tracks into one track and then you

[281:55]

can control it like we were doing with

[281:56]

these sliders, but you can also add

[281:59]

effects to all of the tracks all at

[282:01]

once. And it's actually really nice. And

[282:02]

so to do that, we can go here to our bus

[282:05]

outputs and select a different bus. But

[282:08]

we need to have another bus first. So we

[282:11]

can go up to Fairlite and go to bus

[282:13]

format. This is going to be a list of

[282:15]

all of our buses. By default, there's

[282:17]

something called bus one, which is a

[282:18]

stereo bus, and that is the main output.

[282:21]

So, the thing that our audience is going

[282:23]

to hear. Anything that we want our

[282:25]

audience to hear, it goes into bus one.

[282:26]

Let's make another bus. That'll add

[282:28]

that. And let's uh let's call this a

[282:30]

body bus. And heck, let's make it a

[282:32]

different color. How about blue? Great.

[282:34]

And then we'll hit okay. That's going to

[282:36]

add another bus here. And we can tell

[282:38]

our tracks to go into a different bus.

[282:41]

So, right here where it says bus

[282:42]

outputs, take this little drop down and

[282:44]

switch this to body bus for each of

[282:46]

these tracks. All right. And now

[282:48]

something interesting is going to

[282:49]

happen. I'll close our sound library.

[282:51]

Give us a little room here. When I play

[282:52]

this back, listen.

[282:55]

Those tracks are playing back. There's

[282:57]

audio happening here in the meters, but

[282:59]

we don't hear it. Why is that? It's

[283:01]

because we're sending these to that body

[283:04]

bus. So, this bus right here, but we

[283:07]

don't hear the body bus. The body bus

[283:09]

doesn't have any output. Our bus one is

[283:11]

automatically our main mix, so it

[283:14]

doesn't need a bus output. But body bus

[283:16]

doesn't have anywhere to go. So what we

[283:18]

should do is hit this plus and say bus

[283:19]

one. And now what's going to happen is

[283:21]

all of these tracks are going to go into

[283:24]

bus 2, our body bus. And then everything

[283:27]

that happens in body bus is going to go

[283:29]

into bus one. All right. So we're

[283:30]

routing it all through this one little

[283:33]

pipe before we put it into the mix. So

[283:35]

now when we play this back, there it is.

[283:38]

No problem. The advantage here is that

[283:40]

we could set our volume back to zero on

[283:43]

our tracks and then just turn it down in

[283:45]

the bus.

[283:47]

Okay, in this case it doesn't really

[283:49]

matter whether you turn it up in the

[283:50]

tracks or the bus, but the real

[283:52]

advantage to having a bus is that you

[283:53]

can add effects. Now, we haven't gotten

[283:55]

much into effects, at least here in the

[283:58]

Fairlite page. Probably the most

[283:59]

familiar version of effects would be to

[284:01]

go into the effects panel here, and we

[284:04]

have all kinds of audio effects that we

[284:06]

can drag onto a clip. And so real quick,

[284:08]

let's just solo the girls dialogue.

[284:10]

We'll just play this back here. I'll

[284:12]

just loop this part by hitting I and O.

[284:15]

You pushed me. I had him and then you

[284:17]

pushed me.

[284:18]

And so any of these effects I can grab

[284:20]

and put onto a clip. So sure, let's grab

[284:23]

this flanger. Let's get crazy. And when

[284:26]

I drag on an effect, that's going to

[284:28]

come up with this little dialogue here

[284:30]

where we can select presets and adjust

[284:33]

all the different crazy things about

[284:34]

these effects.

[284:36]

you push me.

[284:37]

Okay, I can turn an effect off or on

[284:39]

with this little switch. This is like a

[284:41]

broken out version of what's in the

[284:43]

inspector. In fact, if I went over to

[284:44]

the inspector and under effects, just

[284:47]

like in the edit page, we have our

[284:48]

controls for our effects. And we can

[284:51]

change those around or delete it or

[284:53]

click on this little icon here to bring

[284:55]

up our fancy interface again. So, this

[284:57]

is an effect that's applied to a clip,

[284:58]

but we can also apply it to a track. And

[285:01]

so, let's grab delay and put this on the

[285:03]

track. We can drag that right on the

[285:05]

track header and that will apply to the

[285:06]

track itself.

[285:09]

I had it and then you pushed me.

[285:11]

Great. That works. We can also see that

[285:15]

effect in the mixer. Here we have our

[285:18]

delay effect added right here in the

[285:19]

mixer. And so we can add effects with

[285:21]

this little plus. We can select a effect

[285:24]

from the list and that works. And we can

[285:26]

add effects to tracks as well as buses.

[285:28]

And so I could put an effect on this

[285:31]

bus. So we'll add a little bit of

[285:32]

reverb. Let's say let's go back to

[285:34]

bodies here. And now that's going to add

[285:37]

reverb to our body hits. And that's

[285:39]

because this is applied to the bus.

[285:41]

That's actually taking all of this stuff

[285:43]

and routing it through our reverb and

[285:45]

all the other things in this track and

[285:47]

then putting it into our bus one, which

[285:50]

is our main output. Now, not only can we

[285:52]

use effects like this, but we can also

[285:55]

use these kind of builtin strip effects

[285:58]

here. And this is actually going to be

[285:59]

really convenient for these body hits

[286:01]

because we want it to sound like they're

[286:03]

happening on the other side of the door.

[286:05]

So, in a different room. And if you want

[286:07]

something to sound like it's in a

[286:08]

different room, you want it to sound a

[286:10]

little bit muffled. And that muffled

[286:11]

sound comes from cutting out the high

[286:14]

frequencies, which we can do with an EQ.

[286:17]

So, to add an EQ to any track, all we

[286:19]

have to do is just double click on this

[286:20]

little cyan line, and that's going to

[286:22]

bring up our EQ. If you're not familiar

[286:23]

with an EQ, it's short for equalizer.

[286:26]

And it's basically kind of like curves,

[286:28]

but for your frequencies. So the higher

[286:31]

frequencies are over here, the lower

[286:33]

frequencies are here. And then this line

[286:35]

is the volume of those frequencies. And

[286:38]

so if you want the higher parts to be

[286:40]

louder, you take something towards the

[286:42]

right and you push it up like this. If

[286:44]

you want the higher parts quieter, you

[286:45]

push this low like this. See? And now

[286:48]

that sounds like it's muffled, like it's

[286:50]

happening in the other room. So that's

[286:52]

exactly what we want to do is take this

[286:54]

side of our signal and just push it

[286:55]

down.

[286:57]

There we go. We can even take one of

[286:59]

these other numbers and push it up a

[287:01]

little bit just to give it a little more

[287:02]

thump.

[287:04]

Yeah, that's good. And so this EQ is

[287:06]

being applied to all of our tracks here

[287:08]

all at once because they're going

[287:10]

through this bus. This again is so

[287:12]

valuable because really think about just

[287:14]

about anything you need to do. This is

[287:16]

the kind of essential stuff is putting

[287:18]

audio into tracks. You can group the

[287:20]

tracks if you want to. You can arrange

[287:21]

the audio in time here on the timeline.

[287:24]

And then you can route these tracks

[287:26]

through different submixes using buses

[287:28]

and apply any kind of effects or

[287:30]

anything that you want to the individual

[287:32]

clip, the track, or the bus. So you have

[287:35]

so much control over your audio. And

[287:37]

again, this is stuff that you don't

[287:38]

really get in the edit page. But

[287:40]

something to mention is that this audio

[287:42]

will still play back in the edit page.

[287:44]

It'll sound just like it does in the

[287:45]

fairlight page in your timeline. And so

[287:47]

that's really the essentials of adding

[287:49]

sounds and messing with them and doing

[287:51]

the sound design part of your movie.

[287:53]

It's all about that clips, tracks,

[287:55]

buses. Now, I'm going to skip ahead to a

[287:58]

timeline that I had prepared just so I

[287:59]

can show you a couple more things. You

[288:01]

aren't going to have this timeline. I

[288:02]

want you to build this yourself, but

[288:04]

it's using all of the techniques that we

[288:06]

just went over. So, let's take a listen

[288:08]

to what we have here. You have all of

[288:11]

the resources to be able to make this.

[288:15]

Hello.

[288:19]

Where is he?

[288:20]

I had him and then you pushed me.

[288:30]

There we go. So now we have a lot of

[288:33]

action and everything happening here.

[288:35]

When it comes to the audio, we have the

[288:36]

toilet flushing, we have the ambience,

[288:38]

we have the music, we have the effects

[288:41]

of stepping and moving around and all of

[288:43]

that. and it really feels like a fleshed

[288:45]

out scene. This is an entire huge audio

[288:48]

app that just has so much to go over,

[288:51]

but these are really the essentials that

[288:52]

you need. I do want to go over one more

[288:55]

part, which would be working with our

[288:57]

dialogue. One thing that we can do is

[288:59]

take our dialogue and we can route that

[289:01]

into a bus. And so, let's go up again to

[289:04]

Fairlite. So, you can do this on your

[289:06]

timeline if you want to. I can go to

[289:07]

Fairlite bus format. Let's add a bus.

[289:09]

And we'll call this a dialogue bus. and

[289:12]

we're going to take A1 and route that to

[289:14]

dialogue bus. A2, route that to dialog

[289:17]

bus. And take our dialog bus and route

[289:19]

that to bus one. So now all of our

[289:21]

dialogue is going to go through bus one.

[289:24]

What I can do, I'll just solo these real

[289:26]

quick. If I want to balance out this

[289:28]

dialogue a little bit, I can go to my

[289:31]

dynamics here, which is this green line.

[289:34]

I can double click on that. And this is

[289:36]

going to do a lot of work with kind of

[289:39]

how loud and quiet things are. That's

[289:41]

just dynamics is the fancy word for

[289:42]

that. And for your dialogue, a lot of

[289:45]

the time, what you want to do is make

[289:47]

sure that it's loud enough to be heard

[289:49]

and not too loud to where it's clipping.

[289:51]

And so again, we have an interface

[289:52]

that's sort of like our curves where if

[289:54]

we play this back, you can see there's

[289:56]

this little visualization here. And this

[289:59]

shows how loud the signal is coming in

[290:01]

along the bottom. And on the side, this

[290:03]

is how loud the signal will be coming

[290:05]

out. And so we can use a variety of

[290:07]

these tools to change that signal. So,

[290:10]

one thing that's pretty common is to

[290:11]

turn on the compressor. And what that

[290:13]

does is adds a little curve right here.

[290:15]

And so, as things get louder, it turns

[290:17]

it down. So, it makes sure that as

[290:19]

things get loud, they don't get too

[290:21]

loud. It rolls off the louder parts of

[290:24]

the signal. And so, this threshold is

[290:26]

where it starts to roll it off. And

[290:28]

ratio is how heavily it does that. So,

[290:31]

what I like to do is have my threshold

[290:32]

down here a little bit and push my ratio

[290:34]

down so that if something's too loud, it

[290:37]

just kind of gets dampened down. And

[290:39]

what we're really looking for here is

[290:40]

there to be just a little bit of gain

[290:42]

reduction. So this little thing should

[290:43]

have just a little bit of that. That's

[290:46]

just taking the louder parts and pushing

[290:47]

them down a little bit. And then we can

[290:48]

take that and we can push this makeup up

[290:50]

a little bit. And what that's going to

[290:52]

do is make the entire signal louder. So

[290:54]

it's kind of like we're taking the

[290:55]

louder parts and squishing them down.

[290:56]

And we're taking the quieter parts and

[290:58]

pushing them up. And what that's going

[291:00]

to do is level out the dialogue so that

[291:02]

we don't have things that are too quiet

[291:04]

or too loud. Now you can get yourself in

[291:06]

trouble with this. you can make it a

[291:07]

little bit too hardcore. So, you want to

[291:09]

be careful. You want to listen to it.

[291:10]

Make sure it still sounds good. But,

[291:12]

this is a quick way to be able to make

[291:14]

sure that your dialogue is audible,

[291:16]

especially with something like a

[291:17]

documentary or projects that have a

[291:20]

little bit more runand gun audio that

[291:21]

isn't perfectly recorded. This can

[291:23]

really help make sure that you can

[291:25]

actually hear everything that's going

[291:27]

on.

[291:28]

Where is he?

[291:29]

I had him and then you pushed me.

[291:31]

So, now this is a lot louder.

[291:33]

Where is he? I had him and then you

[291:35]

pushed me.

[291:36]

But it's not too loud. It has that

[291:38]

presence. In fact, there is a dynamics

[291:41]

just like this on my voice right now as

[291:43]

you're listening to it so that when I

[291:44]

say stuff that's pretty quiet, you can

[291:46]

still hear it. And when I talk really

[291:48]

loud, it's not too loud. But this

[291:50]

dynamics panel, spend some time with it.

[291:53]

Play around with it because this is

[291:54]

really powerful. It can help you get a

[291:56]

good mix in a lot less time. And just

[291:59]

this panel, there's so much to go over.

[292:01]

We just can't do it all. A great place

[292:03]

to start would be to up here where it

[292:04]

says default, go to something like

[292:06]

dialogue compression. And that's going

[292:08]

to give you a pretty good result. Where

[292:09]

is he?

[292:10]

I had him and then you pushed me.

[292:12]

And that's going to be a really great

[292:13]

starting point for kind of leveling out

[292:15]

your audio. So I usually do some kind of

[292:17]

compression on the dialogue. Little bit

[292:19]

of EQ as needed on each of these tracks.

[292:21]

We have this track of the mom, some

[292:23]

voice over from the mom, and we made it

[292:25]

seem like it's far away by one turning

[292:28]

it down a little bit. Although we do

[292:29]

have a little bit of compression on it

[292:31]

just so that her voice isn't up and down

[292:34]

too much. And we also have this EQ that

[292:36]

again just cuts out these higher

[292:39]

frequencies.

[292:40]

Hello. You guys left your bikes on the

[292:43]

steps again.

[292:44]

So now it sounds like it's farther away

[292:46]

when we take this EQ off.

[292:47]

Oh, you guys left your bikes on the

[292:50]

steps again.

[292:51]

It sounds like it's a lot closer. It

[292:52]

doesn't sound like it's outside. Like I

[292:54]

said, there is so much to go over here,

[292:56]

but this should really get you started

[292:57]

with the Fairlight page. If you really

[292:59]

want to get detailed with your audio,

[293:01]

this is the very best way to do it. And

[293:03]

the thing that's so amazing is that

[293:04]

Fairlite shares the timeline. Just like

[293:07]

the color page shares the timeline,

[293:09]

Infusion shares clips from the timeline.

[293:11]

These three pages all work together with

[293:14]

the edit page to help you make the very,

[293:16]

very best project possible. Speaking of

[293:18]

actually making a project, your project

[293:20]

does not exist. Your movie is not a

[293:23]

thing until you actually deliver it. So

[293:26]

go ahead and pick a timeline that you

[293:27]

like. maybe one of these that you've

[293:29]

been working on and just click on the

[293:30]

deliver page for me. That's going to

[293:32]

bring up our deliver interface. And this

[293:35]

is much less complicated, much more

[293:37]

simple, a lot less to go over here. But

[293:39]

what the heck does the deliver page do?

[293:42]

There are really three main phases here

[293:44]

when you're talking about working with

[293:45]

footage. There's production, which is

[293:46]

actually shooting the footage. Of

[293:47]

course, there's pre-production before

[293:49]

that, but then there's post-production,

[293:50]

which is editing, effects, graphics,

[293:52]

sound, color. That's post-production.

[293:54]

And then there's delivery. And delivery

[293:56]

is converting your project from a file

[293:59]

that just lives inside of Resolve into a

[294:02]

movie that people can actually watch.

[294:04]

Something that you can upload to YouTube

[294:06]

or you can give to a client or put on a

[294:09]

website or store on a hard drive that

[294:11]

doesn't need all of your original media.

[294:14]

It's kind of its own thing. So that's

[294:16]

pretty much what the deliver page does

[294:18]

is it takes your same timeline. Again,

[294:20]

this shares a timeline with the edit

[294:21]

page and everything. This will take your

[294:23]

timeline and convert it into a movie

[294:25]

that people can watch. Pretty simple

[294:26]

interface. We have our viewer here. We

[294:28]

have our timeline down here. And we have

[294:30]

our clips right here. Clips is just a

[294:33]

quick way to select each clip. Timeline

[294:35]

is kind of just a way to look at what's

[294:37]

on your timeline. But you don't really

[294:38]

do any editing or moving anything around

[294:40]

here. This is mostly just for reference.

[294:42]

The big action, the big stuff happens

[294:45]

right here in our render settings. This

[294:48]

is where 99% of the work happens in the

[294:51]

deliver page. This is where you decide

[294:53]

what kind of movie format you want to

[294:55]

make. What kind of file are you creating

[294:57]

here? What kind of quality and

[294:59]

resolution and encoding and audio and

[295:03]

everything do you want? And your choice

[295:04]

on all of that stuff is going to be

[295:06]

dependent on what you're making. And if

[295:08]

you have no idea what you're doing, the

[295:09]

great news is that you can start up here

[295:11]

with some presets. If we scroll back and

[295:14]

forth, we have presets for YouTube,

[295:15]

Vimeo, Tik Tok, all kinds of stuff. And

[295:18]

really what any of these do when you

[295:20]

click them is it just sets all of the

[295:22]

settings down here. And it's really

[295:23]

split up into three different tabs.

[295:25]

Video, audio, and file. Video is all

[295:28]

about the visuals, right? Audio is the

[295:30]

sound, and file is kind of how things

[295:33]

are named and organized. You have an

[295:35]

option to render this in a single clip,

[295:37]

so just as a movie, which is what you're

[295:39]

going to do most of the time. But you

[295:40]

can also render your movie as individual

[295:42]

clips. That means that you can render

[295:44]

each clip on your timeline as a separate

[295:46]

movie. And so for various reasons, you

[295:48]

might want to do that. If you're wanting

[295:50]

to convert a whole bunch of clips into

[295:52]

separate movies, that works. If you're

[295:54]

wanting to prepare your shots to go into

[295:56]

a different app or if you want to prep a

[295:58]

bunch of media for a course like this, I

[296:01]

used that kind of thing a lot. But most

[296:03]

of the time, you'll hit single clip and

[296:05]

then it gets into the details of the

[296:08]

video. So, you have to pick your format

[296:11]

and your codec and your encoder. And if

[296:12]

you're lost at this point, you're like,

[296:14]

"What the heck is any of that?" I'll

[296:15]

show you the most common things to pick

[296:17]

here in just a minute. But I do want to

[296:19]

give you a little bit of information.

[296:21]

When you make a video file, there are

[296:22]

basically kind of like two main things

[296:24]

that you're selecting. One is the codec

[296:27]

and the other is the container. You

[296:28]

could think of this as if you were

[296:31]

organizing a bunch of papers. If you had

[296:33]

a big long document and each frame of

[296:35]

your video was a paper, let's say, the

[296:37]

codec is kind of the way the papers are

[296:39]

printed and put together. So, what kind

[296:41]

of quality you used on your printer,

[296:43]

what size of type, what kind of paper

[296:45]

you used, it's kind of like the details,

[296:48]

right? The container is sort of like the

[296:51]

box that you put it in. So, what's sort

[296:53]

of confusing is you can have a codec in

[296:55]

different containers. So, examples of

[296:57]

codecs would be DNx HD, ProRes, H.264,

[297:00]

H.265, 265 capform and there are a bunch

[297:03]

of others. You don't really need to know

[297:04]

all of them. You just need to know that

[297:06]

this is the codec. It's the specific way

[297:09]

that video is kind of encoded and

[297:12]

created. It's kind of like the type of

[297:14]

images that are being made. And the

[297:16]

container is the file format that it's

[297:18]

kind of putting those images into. So

[297:21]

the container is called format here in

[297:23]

Resolve. So there are a bunch of

[297:25]

different formats, AVI, Synon, all kinds

[297:27]

of stuff. Do yourself a favor and unless

[297:29]

you have any reason not to select

[297:31]

QuickTime. QuickTime will let you create

[297:33]

videos for just about anything you need,

[297:35]

unless you have a client that asks for

[297:37]

something specific like an MP4 or a MXF

[297:40]

or something like that or if they need a

[297:41]

series of stills like a TIFF sequence or

[297:43]

something like that, just click

[297:44]

QuickTime. And then the codec. There are

[297:46]

a bunch of different codecs here. And

[297:47]

this mostly has to do with how

[297:49]

compressed the images are. There are

[297:51]

very compressed formats like H.264 and

[297:53]

H.265. And there are formats that are

[297:55]

less compressed, things like ProRes, DNx

[297:58]

HR, and then there, of course, is

[297:59]

uncompressed. Never do that. Never do

[298:02]

that.

[298:04]

You always want some kind of compression

[298:05]

just because the compression is so good

[298:07]

these days, and it's going to be an

[298:09]

insanely massive file if you don't have

[298:12]

compression on it. Okay, encoder,

[298:13]

probably just leave at auto. Resolution,

[298:15]

you're going to usually use a timeline

[298:17]

resolution. Frame rate is usually going

[298:19]

to be the timeline frame rate. And the

[298:21]

rest of this you can probably just leave

[298:23]

as default. For audio, same thing.

[298:25]

Probably leave it as default. And for

[298:26]

your file, you want to make sure that

[298:28]

you name it right. You can switch it to

[298:29]

automatically do timeline name, which is

[298:31]

helpful if you're rendering a bunch of

[298:33]

different timelines. Or you can just set

[298:34]

a custom name and just type it in right

[298:36]

there. You can also tell this to use a

[298:38]

subfolder and do a bunch of stuff that I

[298:39]

very rarely do. So, what settings should

[298:41]

we use? Well, it's come to my attention

[298:43]

that most things in life can be

[298:44]

expressed with a ven diagram. So, we're

[298:46]

going to do that here. If you've ever

[298:48]

heard the expression that you can have a

[298:50]

job done fast, cheap, or good, but not

[298:52]

all three, this is kind of what we're up

[298:54]

against for our codecs here. You can

[298:56]

have something that's a small file size

[298:58]

or looks great or plays back easily. And

[299:01]

you can often get something that does

[299:03]

two of these, but there isn't really a

[299:05]

way to get all three. And so, if you

[299:07]

want your video to look really, really

[299:09]

good, you have a couple options. One is

[299:11]

you have a more compressed option, which

[299:13]

would be like H.265. This codec looks

[299:16]

really good and it's a small file size.

[299:18]

A lot of cameras shoot H.265 these days.

[299:21]

Consumer cameras, even kind of the Sony

[299:23]

mirrorless cameras, iPhones, those will

[299:26]

shoot H.265 because it's a small file

[299:28]

size and it looks good. The only problem

[299:30]

with H.265 is that it is sometimes hard

[299:32]

to play back on some systems because

[299:34]

it's so compressed. Your computer has to

[299:36]

do a lot of work to decompress it and so

[299:39]

it can kind of be hard to edit. Now, if

[299:41]

you're not going to be editing this and

[299:42]

you're just putting it out on, say,

[299:44]

YouTube, that's a pretty good choice

[299:46]

because it's a small file size. It's a

[299:47]

quick upload and it looks good. Now,

[299:49]

there are a couple codecs. One is called

[299:51]

ProRes. The other one is called DNx HR,

[299:53]

which I know sounds super technical, but

[299:55]

it's just the name of the codecs. And

[299:56]

those are designed to look really,

[299:58]

really good, but their file size is big,

[300:01]

big files. The advantage is that not

[300:03]

only do they look good, but they also

[300:05]

play back easily. they aren't as

[300:06]

compressed and so if you need to edit

[300:08]

them, your computer doesn't have to work

[300:10]

as hard. It is a bigger file, but it's

[300:11]

also uh higher quality than H.265. It's

[300:14]

especially good if you need to save it

[300:16]

out into a video file and then convert

[300:19]

it again later. The less compression the

[300:22]

better. And so ProRes or DNx HR really,

[300:24]

really fantastic if you need to export a

[300:27]

video that you're going to edit more

[300:29]

later or if you're going to give a

[300:30]

highquality version to somebody that

[300:32]

they might need to cut a clip from at

[300:34]

some point or if you want to archive

[300:36]

your movie so that you can go back and

[300:38]

edit it in 5 years. ProRes or DNxH are

[300:41]

super great. Really, the only

[300:42]

disadvantage is the file sizes are big.

[300:44]

Now, we also have H.264, which actually

[300:46]

plays back pretty easily these days.

[300:48]

Even though it is really compressed, it

[300:50]

has a very small file size. The problem

[300:52]

is that it doesn't look so great. Looks

[300:54]

a little bit blurry, a little bit

[300:55]

blocky, and especially in kind of

[300:57]

detailed shots, m not the best. And so,

[300:59]

what format do you export? Well, it

[301:01]

depends on what is more important to

[301:02]

you. Do you want it to look great and

[301:04]

play back easily? That's ProRes. Do you

[301:06]

want a small file size and have it play

[301:08]

back easily? You don't really care if it

[301:09]

looks that great, H.264. If you want it

[301:11]

to look great and have a small file size

[301:12]

and you're not that worried about

[301:14]

actually editing it, H.265. These are

[301:16]

probably the main codecs that you're

[301:17]

going to run into, especially if you're

[301:19]

a beginner. If you're doing something

[301:20]

like creating movies for Netflix or

[301:22]

something like that, they're going to

[301:23]

probably want some other different kinds

[301:24]

of codecs, but this will do great to get

[301:26]

you started. So, what's nice is up here

[301:28]

in our render settings, we have some

[301:30]

presets. So, I can just select H.264,

[301:33]

H.265, or ProRes. And that's going to

[301:36]

set my settings to be probably just

[301:38]

plenty good until you get much more

[301:40]

nerdy about this. If you have the paid

[301:43]

version of Resolve, you can render

[301:44]

H.265. 265. Literally clicking on H.265

[301:47]

master and setting a file name is a lot

[301:50]

of the time what I do when I'm rendering

[301:52]

something out. That is a great small

[301:54]

video file that you can upload to

[301:56]

YouTube or play back on a website. You

[301:58]

can give to people and generally they

[302:00]

can play it back. It's a little less

[302:02]

compatible and a little bit harder to

[302:03]

play back than H.264. So be aware of

[302:06]

that. Do some tests. The other thing is

[302:08]

that I believe on PC if you have the

[302:10]

free version of Resolve, it won't let

[302:12]

you render H.265. I think you have to do

[302:14]

H.264. So, this is yet another reason to

[302:17]

get the paid version of Resolve because

[302:19]

you can render out H.265 in the free

[302:21]

version. On Mac, I believe you can just

[302:23]

render out H.265, no big deal, but

[302:25]

there's some licensing thing with uh the

[302:27]

Windows version or something. But

[302:28]

ideally, if you're going to render out

[302:31]

to something like YouTube, I would just

[302:32]

click on H.265 master and call it good.

[302:35]

The optional step, the the thing that I

[302:37]

would recommend if you're going to

[302:39]

render for YouTube is click on this

[302:41]

resolution and upres this. So, if you

[302:44]

have like say a 1080p video, I would

[302:46]

switch this to ultra HD. That's going to

[302:48]

render this out at four times the

[302:50]

resolution. Why the heck would we need

[302:52]

that? Well, it doesn't actually make the

[302:54]

image look any better. There's no magic

[302:56]

there. What it does is if you're going

[302:58]

to put this on YouTube, if you upload an

[303:00]

Ultra HD video to YouTube, YouTube uses

[303:03]

a different compression and the video

[303:05]

ends up looking better on YouTube. So,

[303:07]

it's really kind of just tricking

[303:09]

YouTube to be nicer to the video, which

[303:12]

I know is kind of weird, but that's a

[303:14]

great way to do it. So, if you're

[303:15]

rendering out for YouTube, H.265 master

[303:17]

and then upres to Ultra HD once you have

[303:20]

all your settings set. And so we'll just

[303:22]

call this um movie dash YT for YouTube.

[303:26]

Once you have your settings set, you can

[303:27]

pick a location. I'll just browse. I'll

[303:29]

just put this on my desktop. You should

[303:31]

put it somewhere else. Okay. Don't put

[303:32]

it on your desktop. That's that's lame.

[303:34]

And then we go down here and select add

[303:36]

to render Q because I'm uping this. It's

[303:39]

telling me, hey, you know, this isn't

[303:41]

actually going to look any better,

[303:42]

right? Like it's it's really why are you

[303:45]

doing this? And you just say it's okay.

[303:46]

Just add. I know what I'm doing. And

[303:50]

that's going to add a job here to the

[303:51]

render queue. And so this is like a

[303:53]

to-do list. You're telling it to render

[303:55]

this timeline to the desktop in H.265

[303:59]

format, but it's not actually going to

[304:00]

render it out and convert it into a

[304:02]

movie until I hit this render button

[304:04]

right here. Now, why didn't it just

[304:06]

render it? Well, you can make multiple

[304:08]

different versions of your movie for

[304:11]

different purposes. Maybe I want to

[304:12]

render out a different version. Maybe

[304:14]

one somebody can just watch on their

[304:16]

computer. There's no reason to upres

[304:17]

this to Ultra HD. So, I could just

[304:19]

switch back to timeline resolution.

[304:20]

We'll call this movie. We'll just say

[304:22]

computer. Okay. Add to render Q. That's

[304:24]

going to add that. And then, let's say

[304:27]

maybe I want a version of my movie

[304:29]

that's really high quality that I'm just

[304:31]

going to kind of put on an external hard

[304:33]

drive or put on a server or back up

[304:35]

somehow just so that I have it. I just

[304:38]

want the highest quality version of this

[304:40]

video so that I can keep it safe. That's

[304:43]

what we would call an archive version.

[304:44]

to make an archive version in 2025. What

[304:47]

I would do is select this ProRes preset.

[304:50]

And honestly, that's probably good.

[304:52]

Probably just do that. If you want to,

[304:54]

you can go into the type and select

[304:55]

something like ProRes 4444 or the XQ

[304:58]

version. And this is going to be higher

[305:00]

quality. Chances are you probably won't

[305:02]

actually notice a difference. ProRes 422

[305:05]

HQ is fantastic. And so then I would

[305:08]

call this movie

[305:10]

archive.

[305:13]

The other thing I would do is go to the

[305:14]

audio tab. Make sure this codec is

[305:17]

linear PCM. That means wave files, files

[305:19]

that aren't compressed. I can push up

[305:21]

this bit depth. If you want the very

[305:23]

highest quality audio, you could go to

[305:24]

32-bit float. Sure. And then this is

[305:27]

really cool. You can output different

[305:28]

audio tracks for your movie. So you

[305:30]

could have 16 different audio tracks if

[305:32]

you want to. And you could render each

[305:35]

track in your mix as a separate track.

[305:37]

And so this is great for something like

[305:39]

an archive where you might want to go in

[305:41]

and remove some audio or replace the

[305:44]

music or remix your audio or whatever

[305:47]

you want to do down the road. This is a

[305:49]

great thing to do for your archive

[305:50]

version. And so right here, I'll put

[305:52]

track one. I'm just going to actually

[305:53]

switch this to all timeline tracks like

[305:55]

this. And that's going to render all the

[305:57]

timeline tracks. Now for this one, I

[305:58]

only have one track. If we switch over

[306:00]

to our fairlight timeline, we have all

[306:02]

these different tracks. And we can

[306:03]

render each one of these as a separate

[306:05]

track. That awesome. So, I'll go ahead

[306:07]

and add this to render Q. And once we

[306:10]

have all of the different formats we

[306:12]

want, all we have to do is hit render

[306:14]

all. That'll go through pretty quick and

[306:16]

render our movie. And let me just show

[306:18]

you this archive version here. Let's

[306:20]

just add this to a new timeline. Check

[306:22]

this out. So, we have our high quality

[306:24]

video here, but we also have

[306:27]

all of the tracks that it rendered out

[306:30]

as separate tracks,

[306:33]

which is so cool.

[306:36]

And now if we have this video file, we

[306:39]

have all of the audio and visual in the

[306:40]

highest quality possible all in one file

[306:43]

that we can go through and edit later if

[306:45]

we want to. We can open up in 10 years

[306:47]

and render to some new format that's

[306:49]

even better. And it's kind of future

[306:51]

proofing yourself. You know what I'm

[306:52]

saying? But that's pretty much the

[306:53]

deliver page is you set your render

[306:55]

settings here, you add them to the

[306:57]

render queue, you can kind of stack them

[306:58]

up and then render your project. So, at

[307:01]

this point, we pretty much covered all

[307:03]

of the need to know stuff about Da Vinci

[307:05]

Resolve, and I hope that this is really

[307:07]

encouraging and empowering for you. I

[307:10]

hope that you feel like you can jump

[307:12]

into Resolve and actually start using

[307:13]

it. If we've never met before, my name

[307:15]

is Casey, and I'm part of a company

[307:17]

called Ground Control. And our mission

[307:19]

is to encourage you and empower you to

[307:22]

be able to make things that you want to

[307:24]

make. That's a really big part of what I

[307:26]

feel like my purpose is here on on Earth

[307:29]

is to tear down anything that's in the

[307:31]

way of creativity so that you can

[307:32]

express yourself and make the things

[307:34]

that you want to make because that's

[307:36]

good for the world and it's good for

[307:38]

you. It's good for your mental health.

[307:39]

It's good for I mean so much stuff. So

[307:41]

that's one of the big reasons why we

[307:43]

made this video is it needs to exist. I

[307:45]

mean, Resolve is one of the most

[307:46]

powerful tools for post-production

[307:48]

available, and it's free, and you can

[307:50]

get started so easily. And so, I never

[307:52]

want knowledge or confusion about an

[307:55]

interface to be what's in the way of you

[307:57]

creating things. And if you've watched

[307:59]

this far in the video, odds are you're

[308:01]

probably pretty serious about getting

[308:03]

better at Resolve. And so whether you're

[308:05]

brand new to video editing or just brand

[308:07]

new to Resolve, I want you to make sure

[308:09]

that you get that media and you open it

[308:11]

up, you play around, you start to edit,

[308:13]

and you start to mess around with Fusion

[308:15]

and mess around with color grading and

[308:16]

mess around with audio. Actually put

[308:18]

this stuff into practice because that's

[308:21]

where you're really, really going to

[308:22]

learn. Go out and shoot some videos with

[308:24]

your phone. Throw it into the timeline

[308:25]

and cut it up and start making videos.

[308:28]

They don't have to be perfect. They

[308:29]

don't have to be amazing. Just start

[308:31]

making stuff. It's so important. We find

[308:34]

that our students that get the most out

[308:35]

of our videos and courses are the ones

[308:38]

that really put their hands on and start

[308:40]

working and start actually learning

[308:42]

things by doing. And so I want you to do

[308:44]

that in any way that you can. Now, if

[308:46]

you need some help with that, if you

[308:48]

need a little bit of direction,

[308:49]

something a little bit more solid than

[308:50]

go shoot something with your phone, we

[308:52]

do have a course that we just made

[308:53]

called Make a Film in Dinci Resolve.

[308:55]

This is really the perfect next step

[308:57]

after you watch this video because now

[308:59]

you have a foundation of how the heck

[309:01]

resolve works and all of the important

[309:03]

things that you need to know to be able

[309:05]

to make stuff. But where the rubber

[309:06]

really hits the road, where it really

[309:08]

starts to lock into your brain is when

[309:11]

you go through the whole workflow of

[309:12]

making a project from beginning to end.

[309:15]

And so what we did is we shot a movie

[309:18]

and we got all of the media together

[309:21]

that you would need to be able to edit

[309:23]

that movie. This isn't a really long

[309:24]

movie. It's a little short film, but it

[309:26]

has all of the unedited, ungraded

[309:28]

footage, all of the sound effects and

[309:29]

graphics and assets that you need. And

[309:31]

we packaged them up in a little kit. And

[309:33]

then I recorded an entire walkthrough of

[309:35]

creating the project from very

[309:37]

beginning, like just holding a bunch of

[309:39]

media going, I don't know what to do

[309:41]

with this. I don't even know how to

[309:42]

organize it to making the rough cut and

[309:44]

getting your story laid out in the edit

[309:46]

page. Doing some pretty impressive

[309:48]

visual effects in the fusion page. doing

[309:50]

the color grade, matching the shots,

[309:51]

mixing the audio, and making it look and

[309:54]

sound beautiful all the way to final

[309:55]

render. We walk you through the entire

[309:57]

process of creating that from start to

[309:59]

finish. And that's a little bit more

[310:00]

than you get with this video where we

[310:02]

have examples of things that you can do

[310:04]

in each page, but it's not like a

[310:06]

cohesive project. And when you put that

[310:08]

project together yourself and you have

[310:09]

ownership over that edit and then you're

[310:11]

doing the effects and you're doing the

[310:13]

color grade all in one thing, at the end

[310:15]

you're going to have a film that you can

[310:17]

show your friends and family and say, "I

[310:19]

edited this entire film from start to

[310:22]

finish. Everything that you see was

[310:24]

touched by me." And that's such a cool

[310:26]

feeling and I want that for you. So if

[310:29]

you want to take the next step and you

[310:30]

watch through this video and you said,

[310:31]

"Man, I just cannot get enough of this."

[310:33]

The perfect next thing to do is to check

[310:35]

out this course. There's a link in the

[310:37]

description. I'll also put a link on

[310:38]

screen right thereish. And because you

[310:40]

watch this video all the way through,

[310:41]

you'll get a special discount. Does that

[310:43]

sound good? But either way, whether it's

[310:44]

through this course or through just

[310:46]

shooting your own stuff, you need to get

[310:48]

to work because the more reps that you

[310:50]

get in making things, the easier it'll

[310:52]

be and the more cool things you'll be

[310:53]

able to make. And that's what it's all

[310:54]

about.

Download Subtitles

These subtitles were extracted using the Free YouTube Subtitle Downloader by LunaNotes.

Download more subtitles

Related Videos

Download Subtitles for Unreal to DaVinci Resolve Workflow Video

Download Subtitles for Unreal to DaVinci Resolve Workflow Video

Enhance your understanding of the Unreal to DaVinci Resolve workflow with downloadable subtitles. Follow along easily as you learn about ACES and sRGB color management techniques to improve your video projects.

Download Subtitles for Adobe Illustrator Beginners FREE Course

Download Subtitles for Adobe Illustrator Beginners FREE Course

Enhance your learning experience with accessible subtitles for the Adobe Illustrator for Beginners FREE Course. Download captions to follow along easily, improve comprehension, and master the software at your own pace.

Download Subtitles for 2026 Unreal Engine to DaVinci Resolve Guide

Download Subtitles for 2026 Unreal Engine to DaVinci Resolve Guide

Easily download accurate subtitles for the 2026 Unreal Engine to DaVinci Resolve guide video. Enhance your understanding of ACES and sRGB color workflows with clear, accessible captions. Perfect for learners and professionals aiming to improve their video editing skills.

Download Java Full Course Subtitles for Free (2025)

Download Java Full Course Subtitles for Free (2025)

Enhance your learning experience with downloadable subtitles for the Java Full Course 2025. Access accurate captions to follow along easily, improve comprehension, and review key concepts at your own pace.

Download Subtitles for CLAUDE CODE Full Course 2026

Download Subtitles for CLAUDE CODE Full Course 2026

Enhance your learning experience with downloadable subtitles for the CLAUDE CODE FULL COURSE 4 HOURS: Build & Sell (2026). These captions help you follow along easily, improve comprehension, and revisit key concepts anytime. Perfect for learners who want clear, accessible content at their own pace.

Most Viewed

ดาวน์โหลดซับไตเติ้ล DMD LAND 3 The Final Land Day 1

ดาวน์โหลดซับไตเติ้ล DMD LAND 3 The Final Land Day 1

ดาวน์โหลดซับไตเติ้ลสำหรับวิดีโอ DMD LAND 3 The Final Land Day 1 เพื่อช่วยให้เข้าใจเนื้อหาได้ง่ายขึ้น และเพิ่มความสะดวกในการติดตามทุกช่วงเวลา เหมาะสำหรับผู้ชมที่ต้องการความชัดเจนและเข้าถึงข้อมูลอย่างครบถ้วน

Untertitel für 'Nicos Weg' Deutsch lernen A1 Film herunterladen

Untertitel für 'Nicos Weg' Deutsch lernen A1 Film herunterladen

Laden Sie die Untertitel für den gesamten Film 'Nicos Weg' herunter, um Ihr Deutschlernen auf A1 Niveau zu unterstützen. Untertitel helfen Ihnen, Wortschatz und Aussprache besser zu verstehen und verbessern das Hörverständnis effektiv.

Descarga Subtítulos para NARCISISMO | 6 DE COPAS - Episodio 63

Descarga Subtítulos para NARCISISMO | 6 DE COPAS - Episodio 63

Accede fácilmente a los subtítulos del episodio 63 de '6 DE COPAS', centrado en el narcisismo. Descargar estos subtítulos te ayudará a entender mejor el contenido y mejorar la experiencia de visualización.

Subtítulos para TIPOS DE APEGO | 6 DE COPAS Episodio 56

Subtítulos para TIPOS DE APEGO | 6 DE COPAS Episodio 56

Descarga los subtítulos para el episodio 56 de la tercera temporada de 6 DE COPAS, centrado en los tipos de apego. Mejora tu comprensión y disfruta del contenido en detalle con nuestros subtítulos precisos y accesibles.

Download Subtitles for Your Favorite Videos Easily

Download Subtitles for Your Favorite Videos Easily

Enhance your video watching experience by downloading accurate subtitles and captions. Enjoy better understanding, accessibility, and language support for all your favorite videos.

Buy us a coffee

If you found these subtitles useful, consider buying us a coffee. It would help us a lot!

Let's Try!

Start Taking Better Notes Today with LunaNotes!